Home

Roland VR-5 Music Mixer User Manual

1. Xchg Insert Cut Erase Time Comp Exp LOCATOR Loc1 6 Loc2 8 Loc3 M roc 4 8 CLEAR SCENE LJ tt OOOO 5 3 Release your finger from LOCATOR As described in the procedure for Storing a Time Location register the locator point Making Fine Adjustments to Stored Locators 1 Move to the locator whose time you wish to change Use the LOC buttons 1 5 4 8 2 Press LOCATOR several times until LOC Loc is the locator number that you wish to change is displayed 3 Use the TIME VALUE dial to input the desired time 4 When you finish making adjustments press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 37 Chapter 2 Basic Operation Deleting a Stored Time Location 1 While holding down CLEAR press the LOC button 1 5 4 8 for locate point that you wish to delete For example if you wish to delete the LOCATOR 1 s located point then press CLEAR and 1 5 simultaneously If you wish to delete the time that was registered in Locator 5 hold down SHIFT and press CLEAR and 1 5 CQ LOCATOR Loc1 6 Loc2 8 Loc3 M oc 4 8 CLEAR SCENE O 6 O O Q O Along with the playback locate points you can set up to 1000 Markers in sequence The Markers are also a useful and convenient way to define sections of a song to be repeated
2. os oe i LO Op of 1 E OUT2 N2 Digital In oo CECECECECA OO DAT Recorder 2 Set the DAT recorder so that it is able to record digital signals Normally the sample rate at which song data is transmit ted is set at 48 kHz This sample rate has no relation to the sample rate of the song data If your DAT recorded requires you to set the sample rate set it to 48 kHz 3 Press SONG several times until SNG DAT Backup appears in the display 4 Press YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 5 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 6 SNG Bak appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the song that you wish to save To save all songs from the current drive select All Song Number Song Name POS AUX MASTER Sample Rate Recording Mode Total number of songs in the current drive 3 songs REMAINING TIME os 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER 7 Press PARAMETER gt J Tape Len appears in the display 8 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Tape Len Tape Length Specify the interval at which backup will be paused Set this so that the interval is no less than about five minutes
3. 1 Hold down REC and press the STATUS button which you wish to re record 2 Press ZERO to return to the beginning of the song 3 Press PLAY to begin playback of the song At this point the performance that has already been recorded on the track or tracks that you want to re record is monitored 4 Press the STATUS buttons again The STATUS indicator alternately blinks red and orange Now confirm that you can hear source you want recorded to the track coming from the moni tors 5 During playback of the song each time the button is pressed the monitor switches between source and track Using the input sensitivity knob adjust the volume of the source so that it matches that of the prerecorded performance 6 Once you have adjusted the input sensitivity press STOP 7 Move to previous located point where you want to re record 8 Press PLAY again to playback the song 9 When you reach the point in the performance you want to re record press REC The VS 880EX goes in to record mode start rerecord ing the song or performance 10 When you have finished recording press REC once more or press PLAY to playback the song 11 Each time the REC button is pressed the unit alternately punches in and out Repeat Steps 9 and 10 for any other tracks you wish to re record 12 Press STOP to stop the song 13 Listen to the results of the rerecording Return to the beginning of
4. a o HN Gamm When the master Clock is set to DIGIN1 or DIGIN2 the VS 880EX operates according to the Clock digital signal transmitted by the connected MIDI device You can thus make MTC the master Clock However in this case the slave VS 880EX B attempts to operate according to the MTC transmitted by the master VS 880EX A while the master VS 880EX A attempts to operate according to the digital signals transmitted by the slave VS 880EX B In such instances since this ends up in there being no reference clock the VS 880EX cannot operate correctly gt 000000 0 NS O00004 Rio lololojojo oele e A lolo ojo jojojo o NU laspeesaalal AS Laia Spore DE i og z A ey pi se A e J JAL oja 0O A O O AS A T i f J f gt e DS ae U 1_ YQUOODODO j om OGO gO T I a A es oas E aa E n A i ao B ran D aa lt ODODOC MASTER A 176 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples Making Digital Connections with Cakewalk When you have a sound card such as A
5. Press SEL CH EDIT for the track to be written to the CD R R track The display appears as shown below Check each of the capacity Disk space occupied by a song when written to a disc 27MB Writing source tracks left right AB LR AUX MASTER 12345678 INPUT TRACK CD R disc free space 790 MB Internal hard disk free space 468 MB MEASURE BEAT field Disk space required for the song being written to the CD R disc SYNC MODE SCENE field Free space on the internal IDE hard disk REMAINING TIME field Free space on the CD R disc If the space required for the song being written to the CD R disc exceeds the total of the free space on the internal IDE hard disk and the free space on the CD R disc you cannot write the song to the CD R disc Disk space required for the song being written to the CD R disc The disk space occupied by a song when written to a CD R disc may not be equivalent to the size of the song itself the space is indicated when SHIFT SONG are pressed This is something that varies with the number of tracks and record ing mode used You can make a rough estimate of the space required for a song when written to a CD R disc as shown below Size bytes 44 100 Hz x 2 stereo tracks x 2 bytes x song length in seconds The used capacity of the song is displayed as 1 MB 1 000 000 bytes The displaye
6. There are two ways to carry out the Song Copy proce dure Select the method depend on the amount of free space on the destination disk 100 MB for Zip disks The size of the current song is shown in the display To see the size of the current song hold down SHIFT and press SONG p 164 Playable Use this method to copy songs that use relatively little data onto disks with sufficient memory to hold them If the destination drive or disk already has saved song data on it then you can copy additional songs that will fit within the remaining free space y Archives Use this method to copy songs that are too large to be saved on a single disk The song data is converted into a data format specifically for saving archives format and is copied onto multiple disks according to the free space on the disks This means that it will not be possi ble to directly play back the song data If you wish to play back song data copied in archive format you will need to reload the archive data into the current drive using the appropriate procedure Furthermore song data cannot be copied onto disks that already have songs recorded on them Song About Optimize When operations such as punch in recording are repeated old now unused performance data still remains on the disk drive By erasing this unnec essary data from the disk drive you can free up a significant amount of disk space When you find that you cann
7. Corr FIFI 00 DAT Recorder 2 Insert the tape which contains the song data into the DAT recorder If the song data is backed up on two or more tapes insert the first tape 3 Prepare the tape for playback from the beginning of the song data 4 Press SONG several times until SNG DAT Recover appears in the display 5 Press YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 6 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 7 D IN Sel appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial D IN Sel Digital In Select Select either DIGIN1 coaxial or DIGIN2 optical if you are going to recover data using the VS 880EX s DIGITAL IN connector 8 Press PARAMETER gt Recover Ready appears in the display 9 Press YES 131 Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder DAT Backup 10 The display will indicate Init OK OK to initialize the current drive will show TDE for the internal hard disk or SC0 SC7 for an external drive the number is the SCSI ID number The number following the disk drive name is the partition number For example when recovering to partition 0 of the internal hard disk the display will indicate IDE 0 11 If you
8. 16 Press FADER EDIT several times to let the FADER indicator lights red 17 Press CH EDIT SELECT on Channel 6 18 Press PARAMETER gt several times until RTN StereoIn appears in the display 19 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial RTN Stereoln Master Stereo In Here select Input 56 Off Stereo In is not used Input 12 Selects INPUT jacks 1 2 for use with Stereo In Input 34 Selects INPUT jacks 3 4 for use with Stereo In Input 56 Selects INPUT jacks 5 6 for use with Stereo In Digital Selects the DIGITAL IN connector coaxial or optical for use with Stereo In 20 Press PARAMETER gt J MST StIn Level appears in the display 21 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial RTN Stin Level Master Stereo In Level This adjusts the volume level 0 127 for Stereo In Set the initial value to 100 22 Press PARAMETER gt J RTN StlIn Bal appears in the display 23 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial RTN Stin Bal Master Stereo In Balance This adjusts the balance L63 0 R63 for Stereo In Set the initial value to 0 24 With this you are now ready for add the external effect Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 25 While playing back the song adjust the sound of the effect The volume level of Stereo In can be adjusted directly with the channel fader 6 when the effect return mixer is in effect when the FADER indicator is lit red 186 A
9. 103 Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive To Load Data from Disks Drive Select If you want to take playable songs that have been copied to Zip disks and load them onto the VS 880EX s hard disk first switch the current drive to the Zip drive Drive Select This is referred to as Drive Select Afterwards you can make playable copies onto the internal hard disk from the Zip disk Even if you remake a playable copy of a song from the Zip disk to the internal hard disk without first deleting an existing playable copy of the song from the hard disk even if you return it to the hard disk the original song is not overwritten In this case a new song is created with the same song name as that of the original and is written to the lowest available song number Internal Hard Disk Zip Disk Internal Hard Disk Song 1 Song 2 Song 3 Zip Disk Song 4 Internal Hard Disk Zip Disk Internal Hard Disk Zip Disk 1 Confirm that power of both the Zip drive and the VS 880EX is turned on Insert a disk into the Zip drive Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Drive Select appears in the display 4 Press YES The connected disk drives will be detected 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Select the disk drive to which you want to change The internal hard disk will be shown as IDE and external disk drives will be shown as SCO SC7 The number following each disk drive indicate
10. 7 Press YES If a CD RW Disc which Contains Data is Placed 7 1 If a CD RW disc which contains data is placed in the above step 2 Finalized CD or Not Blank CD appears in the display Press Enter and CD RW Erase appears Press YES CD RW Erasing appears in the display and all the contents in the CD RW disc is erased If you do not wish to erase the data press NO then place another CD RW disc and press YES When erase is finished Continue appears in the display Press YES If you do not wish to save the song data but only wish to erase the contents in the CD RW disc press NO the current drive select All It is impossible to save any additional song data to the 8 If the song holds a large amount of data and can CD RW discs or the CD R discs that already have songs not be contained on a single CD RW disc the disc backed up on them When you back up onto the CD RW is ejected and the message Insert Disc indi discs existing contents should be totally erased before the cates the number in the order of insertion new contents are saved appears in the display to check the total amount of necessary discs Insert the next CD RW disc and press YES At this time we recommend that you write the disc numbers on the labels so that you can keep track of the order in which the discs were inserted into the drive Song Number Song Name 9
11. 9 Press YES Please Play DAT appears in the display 10 Put the DAT recorder in play mode Verify the tape If you have backed up the data to mul tiple tapes then the operation is suspended when the end of each tape is reached Insert the number tape indicated in the display press YES and start the DAT recorder playing again 11 When loading is finished Please Stop DAT appears in the display Stop the DAT recorder then press YES 12 If there is no problem with the condition of the recorded song data Complete appears in the display If Verify Error Retry appears when the song data is loaded then that song data can not be loaded correctly If you wish to check a tape again insert the number tape indicated in the display press YES and start the DAT recorder playing again Press NO if you want to finish the procedure without checking the tape again To cancel this operation press CANCEL NO 135 Chapter 11 Compatbility Disks used with Roland s VS 880 and VS 840 models can also be used by the VS 880EX Additionally song data recorded on such disks can be loaded by the VS 880EX However because differences in the structure of disk space and song data on disks that can be used there are a number of precautions concerning the load ing and saving of data that should be observed Disk Compatibility When internal hard disks that have been used by a VS 880 are i
12. 1 Song If two or more songs were saved to the Zip disk the names of the saved songs will also be displayed Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the name of the song you wish to copy 14 Press YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 15 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 16 If you have selected All in step 3 the display will ask Init IDE 0 OK This message is asking you to confirm that you wish to initialize the load ing destination drive the internal hard disk If you wish to initialize the drive and then load press YES If you decide not to initialize press NO If at this point you press YES all songs saved on the internal hard disk will be lost Normally you should press NO If the loading destination hard disk does not have sufficient space you should first make a backup copy of the internal hard disk and then press YES 17 Execute the load When copying over multiple disks Insert Disk indicates the number in the order of insertion appears in the display Insert the next disk and press YES 18 When the Archive Extract procedure is finished return to Play condition About power save mode If approximately thirty minutes pass without data being written to or read from a disk a Zip drive will automatically stop rotation of the disk This i
13. 2 Press PARAMETER gt gt to let ATT appears in the display 157 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Attenuation In the example 0 dB CONDITION MARKER TIME are s 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER ATT Attenuation Adjusts the volume level 12 12 dB of each chan nel s digital signal 4 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition When Using Balanced Inputs The VS 880EX features balanced TRS INPUT jacks each one configure as follows TIP HOT RING COLD SLEEVE GND However some audio devices have the opposite HOT TIP and COLD RING configuration Using such equipment as is may result in poor sound placement disintegration of the left right balance and a loss of the separation between left and right sounds when using stereo inputs In such instances you need to switch the phase of each channel 1 Press CH EDIT SELECT for the channels whose phase you wish to switch 2 Press PARAMETER a a gt gt to let Phase appears in the display 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Phase In the example Inverted phase INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER Phase This selects the phase NRM INV for each channel Usually NRM is selected NRM Normal phase same phase as the input INV Inverted phase opposite phase 4 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Determining
14. 4 Press STATUS for the channel containing the insert source track The STATUS indicator will light red 93 Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance Track Editing 5 Rotating the TIME VALUE dial allows you to specify the insert destination V track For exam ple 1 1 means V track 1 of track 1 1 means all V tracks of track 1 and means all V tracks of all tracks blinking Insert destination track TIME L CONDITION MARKER pmm 0 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER 6 If you want to insert multiple tracks simultane ously repeat Steps 4 and 5 7 If there are any tracks which you decide not to insert press that track s STATUS once again The STATUS indicator will blink green Alternatively you can use PARAMETER kd gt gt to access the settings for that track and press CANCEL NO 8 Press PARAMETER several times until TRK To appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial To To point Specify the time location at which the blank will be inserted 10 Press PARAMETER B gt TRK Len appears in the display 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Len Length Specify the time length length of the blank 12 Press PARAMETER gt gt gt TRK Track Insert OK appears in the display 13 Press YES This executes Track Insert If you wish to cancel pres
15. In the seams or breaks that occur when recording is begun or ended or when a phrase is copied obtrusive noise may occur The VS 880EX fades in and fades out these breaks so that this noise will not be heard If objectionable noise occurs you can adjust the length of the fade in and fade out It is not possible to set the fade in fade out time to 0 Thus in some cases such as if you copy a sustained sound such as strings and use it elsewhere the break may be even more noticeable than if there had been no fade 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display Press YES 3 Press PARAMETER B several times until SYS Fade Length appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Fade Length This sets the length 2 10 20 30 40 or 50 ms of the fade in or fade out 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Resetting Mixer and System Settings to Their Original State After repeatedly making new settings to the input mixer track mixer and Master Block as well as after changing the content of settings in System condition you can restore the initial parameters existing when you started to create a song Even if you restore the settings to their initial state the song scene tempo map and sync track data will not be lost Furthermore the IDE drive p 167 SCSI self ID p 167 Scene Mode p 74 Shift Lock p 166 and Numerics Type p 153
16. SELECT cHEDIT r in FX1RTN FX2RTN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FROH a CO UJ sss r r 1 EQ Mid EQHi Aux Sena EFFECT EFFECT 2 PLAY OFF STATUS El a 0 0O O B L2 s 4 es ieiz 7 8 Sources Assigned to Tracks In a newly created song sources are assigned to tracks as shown below anas xnv__ v g 4 Determine the source volume Since what is recorded is the sound after it passes through the fader the faders should normally be set to around 0 dB 5 Adjust the input sensitivity with the INPUT knob of the channel input assigned as the source Get a strong input signal by having instrument volumes as high as possible At this time raise the volume level as much as possible without making the PEAK indicator light up Normally this range is adjusted that the level meter moves within 12 to 0 dB when the channel fader is set to 0 dB 6 Press REC The REC indicator blinks red 7 Press PLAY The PLAY indicator lights green and recording starts Now begin playing 8 When the performance is finished press STOP The song then stops 9 Listen to the recorded performance Press ZERO to return to the beginning of the song 10 Switch to the track
17. Sounding the Metronome No matter how accurately one tries to play listening to the recording play back sometimes reveals inaccura cies in rhythm or tempo The VS 880EX provides a metronome click track that can be sounded at a spec ified tempo By listening to the metronome as you play your instrument you will be able to record your per formance with more accurate timing At the same time since this allows you to specify segments for song editing by measure and beat you can edit songs in a more musical way The metronome tempo can be controlled by the Tempo Map or Sync Track MIDI Clock When using this feature set up the Tempo Map p 121 or Sync Track p 119 beforehand When you create a new song the Tempo Map default settings include a 4 4 rhythm and tempo of 120 Using the Metronome During Recording The metronome will begin sounding when record ing or playback begins However you may some times wish to hear a count in on the metronome to help you catch the tempo before recording begins In such cases you can set aside the first few mea sures of the recording to be only for the count in and not record on those measures The metronome sound is only for the purpose of helping you keep your playing in time 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS Gen appears in the display 4
18. The number and name of the currently selected effect will be displayed and you can select the desired effect Effect Number Effect Name s8 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER 3 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the effect you wish to use Here select A00 RV LargeHall 4 After selecting the effect press YES Specify the Track to Which the Effect is to be Applied 5 Press FADER EDID to light the TR Track indi cator 6 Hold down SHIFT and press the channel 7 EFFECT 1 CH EDIT EFFECT 1 appears in the display 7 Press the channel 1 CH EDIT SELECT 8 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial 61 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording EFFECT1 Effect 1 Send Select Switch This sets how the signal is sent to the EFFECT 1 bus Here select PstFade post fader to apply reverb to the sound after the output of the channel fader Off The signal is not sent PreFade The signal before passing through the channel fader is sent PstFade The signalafter passing through the chan nel fader is sent If the effect has been inserted into another channel the effect cannot be used But the signal from the channel will be sent to EFFECT bus 9 Press PARAMETER BP EFFECT1 Send appears in the display 10 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial EFFECT1 Send Effect 1 Send Level This adjusts the level 0 127 of the signal sent to the EFFECT 1 bus Set the
19. This sets the interval 0 10 for checking MTC recep tion when synchronizing the VS 880EX as MTC is transmitted by an external MIDI device When MTC is not sent continuously the VS 880EX checks the MTC and cancels synchronization if there is an error By set ting a longer interval under such circumstances syn chronization can continue even if there is a certain degree of error 6 Press PARAMETER gt SYS MTC Type appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MTC Type This selects the MTC type 30 29N 29D 25 24 Select the MTC that matches your MIDI sequencer 118 Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices 8 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 9 Set your MIDI sequencer to send MTC 10 Hold down SHIFT and press SYSTEM The SYNC MODE field of the display will show EXT indicating that the unit will now operate in synchronization with MTC received from a MIDI sequencer 11 Press PLAY The PLAY indicator blinks green indicating that the VS 880EX is in MTC receive standby mode When the MIDI sequencer begins playback then playback also begins on the VS 880EX During synchronization the PLAY indicator are lit 12 When you stop the MIDI sequencer the VS 880EX will also stop The PLAY indicator blinks green 13 Press STOP The PLAY indicator goes off 14 Hold down SHIFT and press SYSTEM The SYNC MODE field of the display will show INT
20. also indi cating that the Shift Lock function is on 2 Press SOLO EZ ROUTING The display will briefly indicate SOLO Mode ON indicating that the Solo function is on The SHIFT indicator goes off When Holding Down the SHIFT Button If SHIFT is held down during the operation the Shift Lock function will be ignored For example if you hold down the SHIFT and press AUTOMIX VARI PITCH Shift Lock will not be turned on when you take your finger off SHIFT The function of SHIFT itself remains in effect so the the Vari Pitch function is on at this time Additionally rotating the TIME VALUE dial while holding down the SHIFT button increases or decreases the value of some parameter setting by a factor of ten or 1 10 If both the metronome is being used and MIDI clock messages are being transmitted the measure and beat of the song can be displayed in the graphic display When you are running in synchronization with an external device or recording a song along with a previ ously created tempo map this allows you to operate the VS 880EX just as though you were operating a MIDI sequencer Set the metronome to sound as described in Sounding the Metronome p 154 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS MeasureDsp appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME
21. gt gt several times until MIX Sw appears in the dis play 5 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIX Sw Mix Switch This selects the bus to which the source or track output will be assigned For this example select On On The source or track will be sent to the mix bus Set this to On when for example you simply want to mix the inputs without recording the source However the sources that are assigned to the RECORDING bus are disabled The source or track will not be assigned to the mix bus If it is not assigned to a record ing bus either then that source track will not be output anywhere 5 4 Press PARAMETER gt 5 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIX Pan This adjusts the pan setting L63 0 R63 of the signal sent to the MIX bus and the RECORDING bus 5 6 Repeat Steps 5 1 through 5 3 for all input channels to which you want to make pan settings 5 7 After making the pan setting press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording Saving a Recorded Performance Song Store The contents of any recorded performance will be lost if you simply turn the power off or even if there is an accidental power failure or power outage Once lost the contents of a recorded performance cannot be restored to the previous conditions To avoid this from happening use the following procedure to save your songs to the disk When handling important
22. indicating that the unit will no longer operate in synchronization When the VS 880EX is running under the control of the MTC from an external MIDI device you can syn chronize the song s playback time and the MTC time This time is called the offset For example if the MTC time is 01h00m00s00f00 and the song s time is 00h10m00s00f00 the offset is as follows Offset MTC time destined time of the song 01h00m00s00f00 00h10m00s00f00 00h50m00s00f00 If the offset value turns out to be negative add 24h00m00s00f00 to the MTC time before subtracting the destined time of the song For example if the MTC time transmitted is 0OOh00m50s00f00 and you want the song to play back at 00h01m00s00f00 then the offset works out as shown below Offset MTC time destined time of the song 00h00m50s00f00 00hO1m00s00f00 24h00m00s00f00 00h00m50s00f00 00h01m00s00f00 23h59m50s00f00 With the VS 880EX continuous playback from 23h59m59829f99 to 00h00m00s00f00 does not corre spond to overnight mode The song that crosses over 00h00m00s00f00 momentarily stops at 23h59m59s29f99 then resumes playback x _ _ _ 23h59m59s00 00h00m00s00f Time 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt TimeDispFmt appears in the display Rotate the T
23. 2 LOCATOR Button and AUTO PUNCH Pressing this button allows you to store or recall Locators and Markers or to store or recall Scenes the mixer settings LOC1 5 LOC4 8 This button selects Locators CLEAR SCENE PREVIOUS NEXT TAP and Scenes This button deletes Locators Markers and Scenes 3 This is pressed when storing recalling and deleting Scenes This button recalls the previous Marker This button recalls the next Marker This button is pressed to set Markers off Pressed with the LOC1 5 LOC4 8 buttons it spec ifies the range to be recorded in Loop Recording This button turns Auto Punch In Recording on and off Pressed with the LOC1 5 LOC4 8 but tons it specifies the range to be recorded in Auto Punch In Recording NUMERICS Button Press this when you want to use the LOCATOR button for 10 key entry of Western numerals 16 Preparations 4 Transport Control Buttons These buttons are used to operate the recorder ZERO This returns the current time to 00h00m00s00 zero return REW The current time is moved back only while this button is held down This corresponds to the rewind button on a tape recorder FF While the button is held down the current time is moved forward This corresponds to the fast forward button on a tape recorder STOP Stops recording or playback of the song PLAY Starts
24. Limitations on changing the starting mea sure Tempo maps are numbered from the beginning of the song as tempo map 1 tempo map 2 tempo map 3 etc This means that it is not possible to modify the starting measure of a tempo map to make it earlier than the starting measure of the previous tempo map or later than the starting measure of the following tempo map For exam ple if tempo map 2 has a starting measure of 8 and tempo map 4 has a starting measure of 16 the starting measure of tempo map 3 can be modi fied only in the range of 9 15 15 When you are finished making tempo map set tings press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Synchronized Operation 1 Connect the VS 880EX and the MIDI sequencer as shown below MIDI DIGITAL 7 8 OUT THRU IN1 CE Gn225 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RUI NIS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS 1 THIS DEVIC JSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE AND 2 THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT A NCE RECEIVED INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIE ne MIDI IN OOO o ogo EA JL o BS 888 E E OCDE MIDI Sequencer 122 Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices 2 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS MIDI PRM appears in the display 3 Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS
25. PstFade The sound after passing through the channel fader is sent 4 Press PARAMETER gt EFFECT1 Send appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial EFFECT1 Send Effect 1 Send Level This adjusts the volume level of the signal 0 127 sent to the EFFECT 1 bus Set the initial value to 100 6 Press PARAMETER gt gt gt EFFECT1 Pan appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial FFFECT1 Pan Effect 1 Send Pan This adjusts the stereo placement of the signal L63 0 R63 sent to the EFFECT 1 bus 8 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 9 You can use the same method to make settings for each channel for FX2 as well In this case hold down SHIFT and press channel 8 EFFECT 2 CH EDIT in step 2 Master Block Settings 1 Send Level Adjustment You can adjust the balance of the total effect send level for each effect with the effect send level and send pan settings that are assigned to each individual channel left as they are If FX1 has been inserted into another channel or if it has been inserted into the MASTER OUT jacks these dis plays will not appear settings cannot be made Hold down SHIFT and press EDIT FADER 2 Press PARAMETER lt lt gt gt until MST FX1 SND Lev appears in the display 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MST FX1 SND Lev Master Effect 1 Send Level This adjusts the total volume level of the signal
26. TAL OUT1 coaxial connector MST Same sound as is heard from the MASTER jacks MIX bus AUX The sounds assigned to the AUX bus FX1 The sounds assigned to the FX1 EFFECT bus FX2 The sounds assigned to the FX2 EFFECT bus 1 2 The sounds assigned to the Tracks 1 2 3 4 The sounds assigned to the Tracks 3 4 5 6 The sounds assigned to the Tracks 5 6 7 8 The sounds assigned to the Tracks 7 8 4 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition The DIGITAL OUT2 optical connector is set in the same way In this case make the display read DigitalOut2 in step 2 159 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions The sounds from each of the Tracks 1 4 or Tracks 5 8 are output from separate analog jacks Hold down SHIFT and press EDIT FADER Press PARAMETER lt lt gt gt to let DIR OUT appears in the display 3 Determine what is to be output from the DIRECT OUT by rotating the TIME VALUE dial DIR OUT Direct Out The metronome sound is not output Off The DIRECT OUT is not use 1 4 The sounds from Tracks 1 4 are output from the following jacks In this case the settings for the MASTER and AUX jacks are not in effect The sounds from Tracks 1 and 2 are output from the PHONES jack Additionally the sounds output from the DIGITAL OUT connec tors are specified in the Master Block p 159 Track 1 MASTER jack L Track 2 MASTER jack R Track 3 AUX A jack L
27. appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send level If in step 14 you selected either Ins InsL InsR or InsS the sound already processed by the effect will be sent to the effect bus It will not be re input to effect 1 Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt SndPan appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send pan Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt d Use EFFECT2 appears in the display If you wish to use effect 2 press YES and make settings for effect 2 as described in steps 12 23 If you do not wish to use effect 2 press NO and proceed to step 26 85 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings 26 AUX Snd appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to send the track source to the AUX bus select either Pre or Pst and proceed to step 27 If you do not wish to send the track source to the AUX bus select Off and proceed to step 31 CONDITION MARKER TIME MEASURE BEAT 4 a 5 6l 7 z man a s l 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 27 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd 28 TR SndLev appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send level 29 Press PARAM
28. dure the free disk space shown in the display does not change 1 Press TRACK several times until TRK Track Erase appears in the display Press YES Press CURSOR a several times until TRK Erase Tr appears in the display 95 Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance Track Editing 4 Press STATUS for the track on which you want to carry out Track Erase The STATUS indicator will light red 5 You can use the TIME VALUE dial to specify the V track that you wish to erase For example 1 1 means V track 1 of track 1 1 means all V tracks of track 1 and means all V tracks of all tracks Displayed blinking Track for erase CONDITION MARKER 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 6 If you want to erase multiple tracks simultaneous ly press repeat Steps 4 and 5 7 If there are any tracks which you decide not to erase press that track s STATUS once again The STATUS indicator will blink green Alternatively you can use PARAMETER lt lt gt gt to access the settings for that track and press CANCEL NO 8 Press PARAMETER gt TRK St appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial St Start point Specifies the starting time of the segment to be erased 10 Press PARAMETER gt TRK End appears in the display 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial End End point Spe
29. lt lt PP to let EQ Sel appears in the display 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Select 3BandEQ EQ Sel Equalizer Select Select the type of equalizer that you wish to use 2BandEQ 2 band equalizer 3BandEQ 3 band equalizer 4 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 1 If you wish to adjust the equalizer for the input source press FADER EDIT several times to make the FADER indicator light orange Input Mixer If you wish to adjust the equalizer for an already recorded track press FADER EDIT several times to make the FADER indicator light green Track Mixer 2 Press CH EDIT SELECT for the channel or track whose equalizer setting you wish to adjust The CH EDIT indicator lights 3 Hold down SHIFT and press the channel 3 EQ Low CH EDIT 57 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording 4 Press PARAMETER lt lt gt gt several times until EQ Switch appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial EQ Switch Equalizer Switch If you wish to use the equalizer set this On If not set this Off When equalizer settings are being made the equalization curve will be shown graphically in the bar display If this is Off the equalizer related parameters will not be available For this example select On so that the equalizer will be applied 6 Hold down SHIFT and press the channel 3 EQ Low CH EDIT 7 Use CURSOR l
30. mercial software CD or a CD R disc on which recording has been completed press YES and try the operation once more 110 Chapter 8 Use with a CD RW Drive If Blank Disc Appears in the Display You are attempting to used the CD player func tion with a CD R disc that has no performance data written to it Insert a commercial software CD or a CD R disc on which recording has been completed and try the operation once more 5 Only the following buttons knobs and faders effect the sound Try listening to the contents of the disc ZERO Goes to the start of the first song REW Rapidly rewinds as long as the button is held down FF Rapidly advances as long as the but ton is held down STOP Stops the CD PLAY Begins playing back from the present location PREVIOUS Returns to the previous song NEXT MASTER Fader Adjusts overall volume PHONES Knob Adjusts headphone volume Advances to the next song Button knob and fader response may be slow but this does not indicate any malfunction For example expect to wait about five seconds after pressing PLAY or NEXT before you hear sound Transport control buttons are used in controlling the CD control They are not controls for the VS 880EX s songs Furthermore the content of the CD currently listened to cannot be recorded by the VS 880EX When listening to discs that have not been finalized the
31. 33 Additionally the contents of a recorded performance can be lost because of unforeseen accidents or even if there is an accidental power failure or power outage Once lost the contents of a recorded performance cannot be restored to the previous conditions To avoid this from happening use the following proce dure to save your songs to the disk drive 2 Current Song Appendices p 123 When handling important song data or when using the VS 880EX for extended periods we strongly recommend ed you to execute the Song Store procedure frequently 32 Chapter 2 Basic Operation Hold down SHIFT and press STORE ZERO STORE OK appears in the display Press YES If the song is saved properly the initial display reappears If you wish to cancel the saving press NO The contents of any recorded performance will be lost if you simply turn the power off This may also result in damage to the hard disk To safely turn off the power and be sure that your recorded performances are saved always be sure to follow the shutdown pro cedure when you finish working with the VS 880EX 9 Shutdown Appendices p 124 1 While holding down SHIFT press SHUT EJECT STOP 2 SHUT EJECT appears in the display Press YES 3 STORE Current then appears in the display If you wish to save the current song press YES If you do not wish to save it if you want to undo the contents of recordi
32. 880EX it is recognized as an uninitialized disk When a Zip disk used by a VS 880EX is inserted in a Zip drive connected to the VS 840 it is recognized as an uninitialized disk If you wish to playback edit an VS 840 song on the VS 880EX you must first convert the VS 840 song data into VS 880 format and save it on a Zip disk the VS 840 s Song Convert function Then you must convert that song data into the VS 880EX format the VS 880EX s Song Import function However in this case only the performance data audio data and the data specifying the track on which each audio data is recorded will be converted If you wish to playback edit an VS 880EX song on the VS 840 you must first convert the VS 880EX song data into VS 880 format and save it on a Zip disk the VS 880EX s Song Export function Then you must convert that song data into the VS 840 format the VS 840 s Song Convert function However in this case only the performance data audio data and the data specify ing the track on which each audio data is recorded will be converted Song Data Compatibility You can convert songs created on a VS 880 or VS 840 for use with the VS 880EX and copy them as new songs to the current drive This is referred to as Song Import e All the data such as mixer setting including equaliz er and stereo link system setting including sync track and tempo map locators and markers and effect setting will be copied The samp
33. AUtOM Diada ads solt 142 C CD player wen tise iot onean sete reS EE E Ea estes 55 110 CD player fUNCtiON ccc cece eke teori eien 110 CDER backups sis nikeniatnahosniemranees 113 CD N diS ni iaa tot 107 INN e a E 115 Chameli tati aa a onas a a died baaa 22 Channel fade cuco 15 28 Channel Tidmk icono niiotascconnidinc tenida nid ida 43 149 A O 19 55 128 COMPU nati ii id 180 Control change Message cocnononononcnnannnncnnnnnnnrarannnnnnnroso 127 Current APINE AAA AA 21 Current SONG il ill 22 D DA Tina A A A vealed 63 128 DAT backup oonencncoconononononocannnnnnnnnrorannononananancrrararanonnnnnaro 129 DAT DAME aii tii 133 DA Ffecover pinga ibas 131 DAT Vid tado 134 DEC asada 128 Destructive diiniita iii iia 88 Digital disk recorder cccccceces cesses esesteneeeseseeneseseeeees 28 Digital in Connector nooccocononononennnnnnnnnnnnnnnncncnorarannanaa 19 55 Digital out COMMECCOL coconcoconononannnnrnnnannnnnnnnenrnaranannnnnnnaso 159 Direct ute iia lacas 160 Disk drive nikon dana ida 21 100 Drive Check eiiiai clic Richieste ences tal 160 Drive initializes senres e 100 Drive selectstr id 104 Drop fr me s acid 117 E EZ POULIN Gee ees E NA 74 EOS ED 31 66 Effect DUS 8 chen e 25 68 Equalizer neegrit eE aese eE EER aE EEEo de 57 Error levels cui A A 118 172 Event Goin OT 23 Exclusive Message onoonononoonononncnnrnrnnenncncnnnenenararannncnnnroso 171 External effects processor coonoocononcnnncncncncne
34. OK OK to initialize the disk drive is the ID number and parti tion number of the recover destination disk drive For example when recovering to partition 0 of the internal hard disk drive the display would indi cate IDE 0 9 If you wish to initialize the current drive and then recover press YES If at this point you press YES all songs saved on the internal hard disk will be lost If you decide not to initialize press NO Normally you should press NO 10 Execute the load When over multiple discs the disc is ejected Insert Disc indicates the number in the order of insertion appears in the display Insert the next disc and press YES 11 When the CD R recover procedure is finished return to Play condition It is impossible to write audio data to the CD R discs in which the song data is saved To write audio data to the finalized CD RW discs erase the existing data as follows 1 Place the CD RW disc which includes the data you wish to erase in the CD RW drive 2 Press SONG several times until CD R Backup appears in the display 3 Press YES and STORE Current appears Press YES to save the current song or NO if not If the current song is the demo song press NO CDR Bak appears in the display 5 Press YES and Finalized CD or Not Blank CD appears 6 Press ENTER Yes and CD RW Erase appears 7 Press Y
35. Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER e Use EFFECT2 appears in the display If you wish to use effect 2 press YES and make settings for effect 2 as described in steps 17 30 If you do not wish to use effect 2 press NO and proceed to step 33 IN AUX Snd appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to send the input to the AUX bus select either Pre or Pst and proceed to step 34 If you do not wish to send the input to the AUX bus select Off and proceed to step 31 CONDITION MARKER s 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt d IN SndLev appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send level 79 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings 36 Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd 37 IN SndPan appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send pan 38 Press PARAMETER B gt gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt a 39 Master Sel appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the bus MIX AUX FX1 FX2 REC that you wish to output from the MASTER jacks CONDITION MARKER TIME 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER
36. Sync Tempo appears in the display Press YES 3 Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS Sync Tr Cnv appears in the display Press YES Rotate the TIME VALUE dial CV Convert Here you can select how the sync track tempo map will be created For this example select CV4 CV1 Tap S Tr Create the sync track from mark points CV2 Tap T Map Create the tempo map from mark points CV3 S Tr T Map Create the tempo map from the sync track CV4 Time gt S Tr Automatically create the sync track 6 Press PARAMETER gt Start Time appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Start Time Specify the song start time 8 Press PARAMETER gt End Time appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial End Time Specify the song end time 10 Press PARAMETER gt Measure appears in the display 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Measure Specify the number of measures 1 999 within a spec ified time 12 Press PARAMETER gt Beat appears in the display 13 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Beat Specify the number of beat 1 1 8 1 1 2 8 2 1 4 8 4 1 8 8 8 in one measure 14 Press YES 15 A confirmation message asking if you want to save the changes to the sync track appears in the display If you want to save the changes press YES If you wish to cancel then press NO 16 When the sync track has be
37. TRK Track Move appears in the display Press YES Press CURSOR lt several times until TRK MoveTr gt appears in the display 5 Press SELECT CH EDIT for the channel con taining the move source track The SELECT indicator will light orange You can also use the TIME VALUE dial to select the move source track 6 Press STATUS for the move destination track The STATUS indicator will light red 7 Rotating the TIME VALUE dial allows you to specify the move destination V track For exam ple 1 1 indicates Track 1 V track 1 Move source track Move destination track 8 12345678 AB LR INPUT RACK AUX MASTER blinking 8 If you want to move multiple tracks simultane ously repeat Steps 5 7 Do not designate V tracks that have already been specified as move destinations for other Tracks 9 If there are any tracks which you decide not to move press that track s SELECT CH EDIT once again The SELECT indicator will blink orange Alternatively you can use PARAMETER lt lt gt to access the settings for that track and press CANCEL NO twice 10 Press PARAMETER B several times until TRK St appears in the display 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial St Start point Specifies the starting time of the move range 12 Press PARAMETER gt TRK Frm appears in the display 13 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial F
38. WARNING When using electric products basic precautions should always be followed including the following 1 Read all the instructions before using the product 8 The power supply cord of the product should be unplugged 2 Do not use this product near water for example near a from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time bathtub washbowl kitchen sink in a wet basement or near 9 Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids a swimming pool or the like are not spilled into the enclosure through openings 3 This product should be used only with a cart or stand that is 10 The product should be serviced by qualified service recommended by the manufacturer personnel when 4 This product either alone or in combination with an amplifier A The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged or and headphones or speakers may be capable of producing B Objects have fallen or liquid has been spilled into the sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do product or not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level C The product has been exposed to rain or or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any D The product does not appear to operate normally or hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should consult an exhibits a marked change in performance or audiologist E The product has been dropped or the enclosure 5 The product should be located so that its location or posit
39. When copying over multiple CD RW discs Insert Disc indicates the number in the order of insertion appears in the display Insert each of the discs once more in the proper order and press YES 10 When the CD R backup procedure is finished return to Play condition REMAjNING TIME ay 12345678 AB LR AUX MASTER Sample Rate Recording Mode 114 Chapter 8 Use with a CD RW Drive 1 Select the disk internal IDE hard disk containing the song you want to load as the current drive 2 Place the CD R disc to which the song data has been backed up in the CD RW drive 3 Press SONG several times until CD R Recover 2 appears in the display 4 Press YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 5 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO CDR Rev appears in the display 6 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the song only one song or all songs on the CD RW disc that you wish to load To recover all songs from the current drive select All Song Number Song Name NN345678 AB LR AUX MASTER Sample Rate Recording Mode Total number of songs backed up to CD R 3 songs 12345678 AB LR AUX MASTER INPUT TRACK Press YES If you selected All in step 6 the display will indicate INIT
40. an outlet or this unit Before moving the unit disconnect the power plug from the outlet and pull out all cords from external devices Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet p 33 e Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in Z your area pull the plug on the power cord out of gt the outlet e When installing the Hard disk drive unit HDP88 series remove only the specified screws Quick Start p 49 e If you use the optical connector be sure that the O connector cover you removed is placed out of the reach of children IMPORTANT NOTES In addition to the items listed under IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS and USING THE UNIT SAFELY on pages 2 4 please read and observe the following Power Supply O Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device that will generate line noise such as an electric motor or variable lighting system Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent mal functions and or damage to speakers or other devices Placement O Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of interference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use
41. appears in the display 8 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MMC MMC Mode This setting determines how the VS 880EX imple ments MMC Set this to SLAVE Off MMC is neither transmitted nor received MASTER MMC is transmitted The VS 880EX func tions as the master device for external MIDI equipment MMC is received The VS 880EX functions as a slave device for external MIDI equip ment SLAVE 9 Press PARAMETER several times until SYS MID CtrType appears in the display 10 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial CtrType Mixer Control Type This selects the type of MIDI messages that will be used when transmitting mixer settings to an external MIDI device or when MIDI messages from an exter nal MIDI device are used to control the mixer At this time set this to C C Off MIDI messages related to mixer operation are not transmitted or received C C The mixer is controlled using Control Change messages Excl The mixer is controlled using Exclusive mes sages 11 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display 12 Press YES SYS Syn Source appears in the display 13 Make sure that the Sync Source is set to INT Sync Source This determines how the VS 880EX is synchronized with other devices Here set this to INT INT The VS 880EX runs according to its own inter nal clock Select this setting when you are not synchronizing with other dev
42. disk drives such as a Zip disk drive or a CD R drive 4 MIDI Connectors IN OUT THRU External MIDI devices MIDI controllers MIDI sequencers etc can be connected here IN OUT THRU This connector receives MIDI mes sages Connect it to the MIDI OUT connector of the external MIDI device This connector can be used either as a MIDI OUT or as a MIDI THRU connector With the factory settings it will function as a MIDI OUT con nector which means it is set to transmit MIDI messages The VS 880EX features both coaxial and optical digital I O connectors conforming to S P DIF IN OUT This inputs a digital audio signal stereo You can select either the coaxial input connection or the opti cal connection This outputs a digital audio signal stereo Here you can use both the coaxial connector and the optical connector simultaneously and each can carry a different signal S P DIF Appendices p 124 To record a digital audio signal it is not sufficient to sim ply connect a digital audio device to the DIGITAL IN connector When inputting a digital audio signal refer to Recording Digital Signals p 55 It is not able to input or output analog audio signals 19 Preparations 67 8 11 gt Hu SWITCH R AC IN CHourrPur_ INPUT J scsi IDI DIGITAL 7 8 FOOT PHONES MASTER_ 6 5 4 3 2 1 IN N1 L AE O O V
43. last approximately 0 5 seconds of the song cannot be played back Finalizing makes this portion audible Listening not possible approx 0 5 sec gt lt Listening possible Before Finalizing v Listening possible After Finalizing 6 When you are finished listening to the material press STOP 7 Press CANCEL This returns you to the status at Step 2 Pressing SONG also returns you to Step 2 To the extent that any remaining free space allows you can add songs to CD R discs that have not yet been finalized Repeat the procedure described in Writing Songs to CD R Discs p 106 Here you can insert approximately two seconds of blank space between the new song and the song before it The track number is also recorded automatically Track Number v Previous Song Added Song Silent Portion approx 2 sec By sequencing a number of songs on one track you can arrange those songs and write them to a CD R disc In this case by presetting markers at the song boundaries to function as track numbers you can write track numbers like those used in ordinary audio CDs using the CD RW drive to write an audio CD If desired then carry out the following procedure 00h00m00s00 Song 1 Before Marker Setting Time 00h00m00s00 Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 y y y After Marker Setting Time 1 While listening to the song move the track num ber to the location in the song you wan
44. multiple tracks onto a number of other tracks Recall a preset routing bouncing which has been pre regis tered when the VS 880EX was shipped 1 Press EZ ROUTING several times until EZR Bouncing appears in the display 2 Press YES EZR Use Template do you wish to apply the tem plate appears in the display 3 Press YES 4 When the routing has been recalled Complete appears in the display and return to Play condi tion At this time the mixer settings will be as fol lows Recording Track TRACK 7 8 Input jack track effect assigned to the recording track INPUT 1 6 DIGITAL IN1 7 8 TRACK 1 6 FX1 Return FX2 Return 75 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings Display parameter name Input Track Mixer Mixer ATT current value current value Phase current value current value MIX Sw Off O TRd On MIX Level 100 100 TRd Ofs Level 100 MIX Pan 0 0 TR7 L63 TR8 R63 TRd Ofs Bal 0 V Track Currently selected V track EQ Switch On EQL Gain 0 dB EQL Frequency 300 Hz EQM Gain 0dB EQM Q 0 5 EQM Frequency 1 4 kHz EQH Gain 0 dB EQH Frequency 4 kHz FX1 Ins Off Off FX2 Ins Off Off AUX Sw Off Off Fader Link Off Off Channel Link Off Off EFFECT1 PstFade PstFade TRd Off EFFECT1 Send 100 100 EFFECT1 Pan 0 0 EFFECT2 PstFade PstFade TRd Off EFFECT2 Send 0 0 EFFECT2 Pan 0 0 Display parameter name Return Mixer StereoIn FX1 RTN Lev FX1
45. 0 127 sent to the effect Set the initial value to 100 4 Press PARAMETER MST FX1 SND Bal appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MST FX1 SND Bal Master Effect 1 Send Balance This adjusts the balance L63 0 R63 of the total signal sent to the effect Set the initial value to 0 center 6 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 7 You can adjust the send level in the same way for FX2 as well In this case access the MST FX2 SND Lev display in step 2 Master Block Settings 2 Return Level Adjustment Use the channel faders and pan knobs on the top panel to adjust the effect on volume return level 1 Press FADER EDIT several times until the FADER indicator lights red 2 Press the channel 7 EFFECT 1 CH EDIT The CH EDIT indicator lights 69 Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects 3 Press PARAMETER lt lt PP until RTN FX1 RTNLev appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial RTN FX1 RTN Lev Master Effect 1 Return Level Adjust the return level 0 127 of the effect sound Set the initial value to 100 5 Press PARAMETER gt gt gt RTN FX1Bal appears in the display 6 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial RTN FX1 RINBal Master Effect 1 Return Balance Adjust the left right balance L63 0 R63 of the effect sound Set the initial value to 0 center 7 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to
46. 1 5 4 8 specifying the locate point for the punch out time LOCATOR toc 1 B Loc2 8d Loc3 M Loc 4 8 CLEAR SCENE j f J O J CJ 1 3 4 5 TART END TO PREVIOUS Ha TAP LOOP AUTOPUNCH NUMERICS O CO CoH 6 8 9 X J GRADATION SNAP SHOT 45 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording Using Markers The space between two adjacent mark points can be used to define the segment for Punch In Recording 1 Preset Markers where you want to punch in and then punch out 2 Move to the mark point located at the desired punch in time 3 While holding down AUTO PUNCH press NEXT 4 Without releasing AUTO PUNCH press PRE VIOUS LOCATOR Loc1 B Loc2 H 0oc3 M roc 4 B CLEAR SCENE 1 2 3 4 5 START FROM END TO MARKER PREVIOUS NEXT Ha gt TAP LOOP AUTO PUNCH NUMERICS j 7J p O O Co f 9 3 Y SNAP SHOT Specifying the Points While the Song Plays Back 1 Press PLAY to begin playback of the song 2 When you reach the desired punch in location hold down AUTO PUNCH and press TAP 3 Continue holding down AUTO PUNCH wait for the desired punch out location and then press TAP once again 4 Press STOP LOCATOR Loc1 8 Loc2 Loc3 M Loc 4 8 CLEA
47. 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada 191 Concerning Copyright The la
48. Copy procedure on the VS 1680 cannot be restored archive extracted by the VS 880EX Song data that has been saved using the DAT Backup procedure on the VS 1680 cannot be restored DAT recovered by the VS 880EX 136 Chapter 11 Compatibility When internal hard disks that have been used by a VS 880EX are installed in the VS 1680 or when Zip disks that have been used by a VS 880EX are inserted into a Zip drive connected to the VS 1680 they are recog nized as the initialization disk In this case the VS 1680 can be used for playing back songs recorded with the VS 880EX and creating new songs as well However you cannot use the VS 1680 to edit songs that were recorded on the VS 880EX or save new versions of songs If you wish to edit playback a VS 880EX song on the VS 1680 you must first convert the VS 880EX song data into the VS 880 format and save it on a Zip disk etc the VS 880EX s Song Export function Then you must convert that song data into the VS 1680 format the VS 1680 s Song Import function Song data that has been saved using the Archive Copy procedure on the VS 880EX cannot be restored archive extracted by the VS 1680 Song data that has been saved using the DAT Backup procedure on the VS 880EX cannot be restored DAT recovered by the VS 1680 Zip disks used on the VS 840 and VS 880EX are not mutually compatible When a Zip disk used by a VS 840 is inserted in a Zip drive connected to the VS
49. DAT recorders that cannot record digital signals at 44 1 kHz If such instances change to an ana log connection and set the recorder to enable it to record analog signals 3 Press ZERO on the VS 880EX 4 Put the digital recorder in record mode 5 Press PLAY on the VS 880EX Playback of the song begins If you want to fade in or out use the VS 880EX s master fader for this 6 When you have finished recording stop the cas sette recorder Press STOP on the VS 880EX Listen to the recorded result Rewind the tape and play back the recording To Prohibit Digital Copying When mixing down from the VS 880EX to a DAT recorder or similar recorder via a digital connection you can prevent digital copying of the tape to which the mixdown has been recorded For example you are allowed to make only one copy of a regular audio CD onto a DAT tape Once the digi tal copy has been made to the DAT tape you cannot make further copies onto other digital devices using digital connections This function makes DAT tapes copied digitally from the VS 880EX behave as those copied digitally from CDs 63 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display 2 Press PARAMETER gt several times until D CpyProtect appears in the display 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Digital Copy Protect Digital Copy Protect Switch This setting determines wheth
50. For now set this to Out Out The connector transmits MIDI message such as metronome Note messages or MTC from the VS 880EX Thru MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN con nector are retransmitted from the connector without any changes 6 Press PARAMETER several times until SYS MID SysEx Tx appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial SysEx Tx System Exclusive Transmit Switch Exclusive messages are transmitted when this is set to On At this time set this to On 8 Press PARAMETER gt SYS MID MMC appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MMC MMC Mode This setting determines how the VS 880EX imple ments MMC Set this to MASTER Off MMC is neither transmitted nor received MASTER MMC is transmitted The VS 880EX func tions as the master device for external MIDI equipment SLAVE MMC is received The VS 880EX functions as a slave device for external MIDI equip ment 10 Press PARAMETER B several times until SYS MID CtrType appears in the display 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial CtrType Mixer Control Type This selects the type of MIDI messages that will be used when transmitting mixer settings to an external MIDI device or when MIDI messages from an exter nal MIDI device are used to control the mixer At this time set this to Off Off MIDI messages related to mixer operation are not transmitted or rece
51. Play condition 8 You can make master block settings in the same way for FX2 as well For step 2 in this case press channel 8 CH EDIT EFFECT 2 At this time the channel faders on the top panel will function as follows ST IN FX1 FX2 Balance Balance Balance AN PAN PAN PAN PAN c C INPUT CO TRACK O FX RTN SELECT cHEDIT grin FXLRTN FX2RTN 4 5 6 7 8 EQ Mid EQHi Aux Send EFFECT EFFECT 2 SOURCE REC PLAY COFF STATUS 4 5 6 7e AUX mxynec Aux murc aux ST IN FX1 FX2 Level Leve Leve Selecting Effects Patch An effect settings is referred to as a patch The VS 880EX provides 210 A00 A99 B00 B99 C00 C09 read only effects Preset Patches and 100 U00 U99 read and write effects User Patches Please take a moment to check these effects If used in combination with the Vari Pitch function p 152 delay times may change somewhat and for distor tion effects distortion overdrive etc there may be some change in the quality of the tone With some of the effects you may not want the direct sound output or other special setting may be required Please refer to Algorithm Lis
52. Press YES 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial CV Convert Here you can select how the sync track tempo map will be created For this example select CV2 CV1 Tap S Tr Create the sync track from mark points CV2 Tap T Map Create the tempo map from mark points CV3 S Tr T Map Create the tempo map from the sync track CV4 Time gt S Tr Automatically create the sync track 6 Press PARAMETER gt SYS CV Beat appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Beat Specify the number of beat 1 1 8 1 1 2 8 2 1 4 8 4 1 8 8 8 in one measure 8 Press PARAMETER gt SYS CV Tap Beat appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Tap Beat Specify the number of marks 1 8 in each measure 10 Press YES 11 A confirmation message asking if you want to save the changes to the tempo map appears in the display If you want to save the changes press YES If you wish to cancel then press NO 12 When the tempo map has been completed Complete appears in the display 13 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Creating a Tempo Map from a Sync Track You can create a tempo map from sync track stored in the VS 880EX This is convenient when you want to change a sync track s MIDI Clock with the VS 880EX 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt sever
53. Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt a 17 The effect patch will be displayed Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the effect patch that you wish to use 18 Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt d 78 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 IN FX1 Ins appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to insert effect 1 select either Ins InsL InsR or InsS and proceed to step 20 If you wish to use effect 1 in a send return configuration select Off and pro ceed to step 23 CONDITION MARKER TIME 2 pS e I 3 a a ea O sennen am aa rer 5 a AB LR AUX MASTER s 8 ls e 12345678 INPUT TRACK IN InsSnd appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the insert send level Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd IN InsRtn appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the insert return level Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd IN FX1Snd appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to send the input to the effect 1 bus select either Pre or Pst and proceed to step 25 If you
54. RTN Bal FX2 RTN Lev FX2 RTN Bal Display parameter name Off 100 0 100 0 Master Block Master Sel EQ Mode Direct Out Master FX1 Ins Master FX2 Ins MIX 3band Off Off Off Display parameter name Effect FX1 Sel A00 LargeHall FX2 Sel A22 Short Dly Select this when you want adjust the balance of each track or to record a MD recorder or similar input in two channel stereo Recall a preset routing mixdown which has been pre registered when the VS 880EX was shipped 1 Press EZ ROUTING several times until EZR Mix Down appears in the display 2 Press YES EZR Use Template do you wish to apply the tem plate appears in the display 3 Press YES 4 When the routing has been recalled Complete appears in the display and return to Play condi tion At this time the mixer settings will be as fol lows Playback Track TRACK 1 8 Input jack track effect assigned to the master out INPUT 1 6 DIGITAL IN1 7 8 TRACK 1 8 FX1 Return FX2 Return Display parameter name Input Track Mixer Mixer ATT current value current value Phase current value current value MIX Sw On On MIX Level 100 100 MIX Pan 0 IN7 L63 IN8 R63 0 V Track Currently selected V track EQ Switch On On EQL Gain 0 dB 0 dB EQL Frequency 300 Hz 300 Hz EQH Gain 0 dB 0 dB EQH Frequency 4 kHz 4 kHz FX1 Ins Off Off FX2 Ins Off Off AUX Sw AUX Switch Off Off Fader Link Off Off 76 Chapte
55. RecoverDriveTry appears in the display 9 3 The message You ll Lose Data will appears in the display Press YES The Recover operation is executed If you want to can cel the operation press CANCEL NO 9 4 When the recovery is finished the results are shown on the display screen Songs that have been partially altered are indicated by Adj deleted songs are indicated by Del Songs that have not been changed are not indicated Please check the display RecoverResult Recovery result InitSong001 InitSong003 Modified songs in actual operation the song name InitSong200 ClusterInfo Cluster information Total Number of clusters on the entire disk Defect Number of clusters marked as unusable memory Used Number of clusters currently being used Free Number of clusters currently unused 9 5 Press YES Return to Play condition 162 Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions This section describes the settings that affect the over all functioning of the VS 880EX Switching the Display Content In Play condition you can hold down SHIFT and press DISPLAY PLAY to switch the contents of the bar display In Edit condition the contents of the dis play will change depending on the selected parameter or operation The volume of each channel before passing through the channel faders will be displayed The AUX and MASTER fields indicate the respective
56. SS q99900000 ol Oper oo fRESaegaa z Sou PPepPE oa a j I me L a J gODOOOO ajo oO rre a f E o eo e ea a l a ST e e o Goooo ogi e A ooon goga 5S on Teama TS MASTER SLAVE In this example you can use the master s Stereo In function for the mix balance between the master and slave VS 880EXs p 152 First adjust the individual track balances on both machines Of course you can also send the output of the master and slave VS 880EXs to a separate mixer However the master and slave units can not be connected using digital connections 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS MIDI PRM appears in the dis play 2 Press YES SYS MID DeviceID appears in the display 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial DevicelD This sets the Device ID number 1 32 that is used when exchanging exclusive messages mixer parameters with an external MIDI device Exclusive messages can be transmitted and received between devices which have the same Device ID number setting Here set this to 17 170 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples 4 Press PARAMETER gt SYS MID MIDIThr appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIDIThr MIDI Thru Switch This switches the function of the MIDI OUT THRU connector
57. Song Numbers On the VS 880EX management of song data is accomplished by assigning a song number to every song that is saved Newly created songs are given the lowest currently available number For example if all numbers up to song number 5 are already assigned then the number 6 is taken by the new song Furthermore even if song numbers up to 5 are occupied if Song 3 is deleted then the new song is given that now lowest vacant num ber If song numbers up to 5 are occupied Disk Drive Disk Drive InitSong 001 nitSong 001 InitSong 002 itSong 002 InitSong 003 itSong 003 InitSong 004 itSong 004 InitSong 005 itSong 005 itSong 006 If Song 3 is deleted Disk Drive Disk Drive InitSong 001 Song 001 InitSong 002 Song 002 Song 003 InitSong 004 Song 004 InitSong 005 itSong 005 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording General Course of the Recording Process The procedure for recording with the VS 880EX is roughly as same as record process by multi track recorders as mentioned before This general process of recording a song is outlined below Please take a moment to read through the steps 1 Connect instruments and microphones to the VS 880EX 2 Record the basic part of the song drums and bass etc 3 Record other parts electric guitars synthesizers vocals etc while playing back the basic part 4 If there are any mistakes during the proc
58. The loop end time will be displayed If no loop end time has been specified the display will indi cate h m s f Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the time 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Recording Procedure 1 Hold down REC and press the STATUS button for the track you wish to re record 2 Press ZERO to return to the beginning of the song 3 Press PLAY to begin playback of the song At this point the performance that has already been recorded on the track or tracks that you want to re record is monitored 4 Press the STATUS buttons again The STATUS indicator alternately blinks red and orange Now confirm that you can hear source you want recorded to the track coming from the moni tors 5 During playback of the song each time the button is pressed the monitor switches between source and track Using the input sensitivity knob adjust the volume of the source so that it matches that of the prerecorded performance 6 Once you have adjusted the input sensitivity press STOP 7 Press LOOP The LOOP indicator lights and Auto Punch In Recording is enabled 8 Press AUTO PUNCH The AUTO PUNCH indicator lights You are now set to do Loop Recording 9 Press PLAY Playback of the song begins The song is played back until the end of the loop is reached playback will return to the loop start point and repeat 10 Press REC where you want to re record The
59. The number following each disk drive indicates the partition num ber For example select SCSI5 when selecting the Zip drive connection 6 Press PARAMETER gt PhysicalFmt appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Physical Format Select whether or not to use physical formatting For new disks or disks that have been used by another device select On For new hard disks or when for matting disks for Windows or Macintosh platforms select Off 8 Press PARAMETER gt Partition appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Partition Select the partition size 500 MB or 1000 MB In nor mal circumstances select 1000 MB 10 Press PARAMETER B gt Surface Scan appears in the display 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Surface Scan This confirms that the read and write functions in all of the disk drive s partitions are operating correctly when the drive is initialized In normal circumstances set this to Off When you particularly want to con duct a test of the read write functions the set this to On p 101 100 Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive 12 Press YES SYS Init OK appears in the display refers to the drive s SCSI ID number For example SC5 U indicates a Zip drive 13 Press YES SYS Init Sure Really initialize the disk appears in the display 14 Pr
60. Track 4 AUX A jack R 5 8 The sounds from Tracks 5 8 are output from the following jacks In this case the settings for the MASTER and AUX jacks are not in effect The sounds from Tracks 5 and 6 are output from the PHONES jack Additionally the sounds output from the DIGITAL OUT connec tors are specified in the Master Block p 159 Track 5 MASTER jack L Track 6 MASTER jack R Track 7 AUX A jack L Track 8 AUX A jack R 4 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Confirming That a Drive is Not Damaged Drive Check You can check the drive you are using to make sure it can be read correctly This is referred to as Drive Check This provides a way to determine whether a failure during Song Copy p 102 or DAT Backup p 129 is due to a problem in the song itself that was saved on disk whether the problem is with the connections or if there is a problem of some other kind If data cannot be read correctly the display will indi cate the song in which the error occurred 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Drive Check appears in the display 2 Press YES Select the drive that you wish to check Rotate the TIME VALUE dial CheckDrive Check drive Select the disk drive that you wish to check 4 When you have selected the drive you wish to check press YES 5 A confirmation message ask you that you want to proceed with the Drive Check appears in the dis play P
61. Undo Level 3 l Time If after executing the Undo operation you decide to return to the condition of step 5 execute the Redo operation Redo A Recording 5 Recording4 i Recording 3 YA 7 Recording 2 y Time 146 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions However if you once again record step 3 after returning to the condition of recording number 2 the recordings 3 5 that were canceled by the Undo opera tion will be lost This means that if after step 3 you use the Undo operation to return to the previous step you will return to the condition of step 2 Recording 3 Undo J Recording2 i 2 Time Recording or editing operations performed after creat ing a song are recorded together with the song data as its operation history and the data itself is also pre served without being erased For example suppose that you perform 10 recording operations on song 1 and then create song 2 The operation history of song 2 is newly recorded from the time when song 2 was cre ated If you subsequently select song 1 again the his tory of the 10 previous recording operations will still be there The Undo function refers to the operation history of the currently selected song and restores the song to the condition in which it was the specified number of operations ago In the case of song 1 in this example you will be able to cancel the 10 recording operations that were performed A maximum
62. VALUE dial to select the routing number for the desired save destination Press PARAMETER BP Use CURSOR lt gt gt to move the cursor Use the TIME VALUE dial to assign a name to the user routing 7 Press PARAMETER 4 4 The cursor will move to the routing number 8 9 10 2 Press YES If you are overwriting a previously saved user routing a message will ask for confirmation Press YES When the user routing has been saved t Complete appears in the display and return to Play condition Press EZ ROUTING several times until User Routing appears in the display Press YES The number and name of the user routing will be dis played 3 gt 2 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the routing number that you wish to recall If not even one user routing has been saved EZR No User Routing appears in the display and return to step 1 Press YES When the user routing has been recalled Complete appears in the display and return to Play condition Press EZ ROUTING several times until DelUserRouting appears in the display Press YES The number and name of the user routing will be dis played 3 4 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the routing number that you wish to delete If not even one user routing has been saved EZR No User Routing appears in the display and return to step 1 Press YES A confir
63. VS 880EX will then automatically go into record mode at the point where the punch in is set Start the song or performance then 11 When you reach the point where the punch in is set the VS 880EX automatically returns to play back mode Playback continues until the end of the loop and the loop repeats from the start point once again 12 With the next playback of the loop listen to what you recorded to check the result If the recording hasn t turned out as you intended repeat Steps 10 and 11 13 Press STOP to stop the song 14 Listen to the results of the recording once more Press LOOP The LOOP indicator goes off 15 Press AUTO PUNCH The AUTO PUNCH indicator goes off 16 Return to the beginning of the song and press PLAY 48 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording Recording to Other Tracks Overdubbing In multi track recording the normal process is to record new tracks while listening to the performance on previously recorded tracks played back This is referred to as overdubbing 1 Select the tracks you want to play back While holding down STOP press the STATUS buttons for the tracks you want to play back i e that you want to hear while overdubbing The STATUS indicators light green 2 Select the tracks to which you want to record While holding down REC press the STATUS buttons for the tracks to which you want to record The STATUS indicators blink red 3 Select the sour
64. When you create a song it will automatically be given a name like InitSong001 However this makes it dif ficult to remember what song it is We recommend that you assign a unique name to your song so that data management will be easier 1 Make the song whose name you want to change the current song 2 Press SONG several times until SNG Song Name Prtct appears in the display 3 Press YES The name of the song Song Name appears in the dis play 4 Move the cursor so that the character that you wish to modify will blink Use CURSOR gt 5 Modify the character Rotate the TIME VALUE dial By holding down SHIFT as you rotate the TIME VALUE dial you can make the characters change more rapidly 6 When you have finished writing the song name or comments hold down SHIFT and press STORE ZERO STORE OK appears in the display 7 Press YES The song is saved 8 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Adjusting the Levels for Each Track You can adjust the volume level of each input and track channel without using the channel faders You can raise the volume when playing back tracks that were recorded at low levels avoid distorted sound that may occur when adjusting the channel equalizers and be able to operate with the channel faders near 0 dB Use the following procedure 1 Press CH EDIT SELECT for the channels whose volume levels you wish to adjust
65. actual value will change at the instant that the fader is moved Null No change is made unless the fader or pan knob is moved to its current actual value 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition You can hold the display of maximum values peaks while the level meter appears in the graphic display Peak display 8l s 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS PeakHoldSw appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER B several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial 164 Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions PeakHoldSw Peak Hold Switch With this set to On the level meter in the graphic display holds the display of peak levels 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Now the peak display is reset cleared each time PLAY DISPLAY is pressed The amount of free disk space available for recording the current song is displayed as REMAINING TIME field in the display You can select the type of display for this CONDITION MARKER TIME s 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER Remaining amount in the example 294 minutes 40 seconds 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display Press YES 3 Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS RemainDsp appears i
66. all tracks Displayed blinking Track forcompress or expand CONDITION MARKER 8 mS 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 6 If you want to compress or expand multiple tracks simultaneously repeat Steps 4 and 5 7 If there are any tracks which you decide not to compress or expand press that track s STATUS once again The STATUS indicator will blink green Alternatively you can use PARAMETER lt lt a gt gt to access the settings for that track and press CANCEL NO 8 Press PARAMETER gt TRK St appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial St Start point This specifies when compression or expansion of the playback time starts 10 Press PARAMETER gt TRK End appears in the display 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial End End point This specifies when compression or expansion of the playback time ends 12 Press PARAMETER B TRK To appears in the display 13 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial To To point This specifies the ending time location that will result from the compression or expansion 14 Press PARAMETER B TRK Pitch Mode appears in the display 15 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Pitch Mode If you want the playback pitch to change as a result of the compression or expansion set this to Variable if not set this to Fixed 16 Press PARAMETER B TRK Type appears in the displa
67. an MMC support ing MIDI sequencer etc operations such as song playback stop and fast for ward can be performed by operating only the master device 9 MMC Appendices p 124 Some MIDI devices are not compatible with the MMC used by the VS 880EX If you are using such a device the VS 880EX cannot be operated in the manner described in this Owner s Manual For more detailed information about MMC functions for the VS 880EX please refer to MIDI Implementation Appendices p 74 Here we will see an example of synchronizing the VS 880EX with the Cakewalk Pro Audio software application Cakewalk Pro Audio is a computer based sequencer program compatible with MMC and MTC for Windows 95 Make the connections as shown below referring to the Cakewalk owner s manual as you go along MIDI Cable Computer MIDI Cable Cakewalk MIDI IN MIDI OUT Serial Port A f E O10 Y H MIDI IN IDI OUT OOO SO PO m O Don Serial MIDI mo gt e G00 a oJojojo ojolo o o N Driver Dover lp 2 A JODO oog f i or oa m AAA MIDI Interface k Hi 1 R N E c 1 ae i So oO d 7 boooooas 2 DB00000000 gt L T ean ao pee Roland Computer Cable COMPUTER
68. appears in the display 13 Press YES This executes Track Cut If you wish to cancel press NO 14 When the cut is completed correctly Complete appears in the display and return to Play condi tion An Easy Way to Specify the Time Settings Times for the St and End can be specified directly without having to display the Track Cut page In Play condition use the following proce dure 1 Move to the beginning of the area that you wish to cut St Hold down TRACK and press LOC1 5 Move to the end of the area that you wish to cut End 4 Hold down TRACK and press LOC3 7 If you now access the Track Cut page the times that were specified in steps 14 will be input as the time settings for the respective points This operation erases playback data from the specified area If this operation is used to erase playback data even if playback data exists after the area that was erased it will not be moved forward To use the analo gy of a tape recorder this operation is like recording silence over an unwanted section of the tape Start End Time Do not leave sound within 0 5 seconds before or after the area to be erased Any sound which was within 0 5 sec onds of the erased data will not playback While it may seem that the performance data has disap peared the data itself is not deleted from the hard disk Thus even when you carry out the Track Erase proce
69. appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial 6l p 7 PR a a s 8 mm e a n 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER EFFECT Effect 1 Send Select Switch This sets how the signal is sent to the EFFECT 1 bus Here select PstFade post fader to apply reverb to the sound after the output of the channel fader Off The signal is not sent PreFade The signal before passing through the channel fader is sent PstFade The signal after passing through the channel fader is sent If the effect has been inserted into another channel the effect cannot be used But the signal from the channel will be sent to EFFECT bus 10 Press PARAMETER gt EFFECT1 Send appears in the display 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial EFFECT1 Send Effect 1 Send Level This adjusts the level 0 127 of the signal sent to the EFFECT 1 bus Set the initial value to 100 12 Press PARAMETER e EFFECT1 Pan appears in the display 13 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial EFFECT1 Pan Effect 1 Send Pan This adjusts the stereo placement of the signal L63 0 R63 sent to the EFFECT 1 bus 50 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording 14 Now reverb will be applied The signal flow will be as follows MIX bus a EJ 2band 3band F Fader Pan 1 MASTER OUT L R EJ Ea nd Ret Level Pan a Hj peal N 15 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Playb
70. as Realtime This is convenient when for example you want to freely adjust the volume levels of individual tracks 1 Move to the time location at which you wish to record in Realtime Confirm that Auto Mix mode is on Select the channels which you want to record using Auto Mix While pressing AUTOMIX so that the button indicators to blink press the each channel SELECT button or EZ ROUTING Master Block 4 Hold down AUTOMIX and press REC The AUTOMIX indicator blinks indicating that Auto Mix Realtime recording is ready 5 Press FADER to select the faders that will be in effect with the input mixer or track mixer 6 Adjust the top panel channel faders master fader and PAN knobs to the desired positions When the Fader Match p 164 in the System parameters is set to Null and the current fader positions of do not match the actual volume levels if you don t first move the channel faders to their actual values you will be unable to record the data using Auto Mix 144 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions 7 Press PLAY to begin playback 8 Operate the channel faders master fader and PAN knobs on the top panel Auto mix data will be recorded only for those chan nels that are modified 9 When the mix is finished press STOP markers will be automatically created in the area which was played back If you wish to re do realtime repeat steps 3 8 You can specify that the set
71. by the button indicator SOURCE orange The input source or track assigned to the channel is being output REC blinking red Recording is selected for the track assigned to the channel During playback the track data is normal ly output REC blinking red and orange Recording is selected for the track assigned to the channel During playback you will be able to listen to the source PLAY green The track assigned to the channel will playback OFF off The channel is muted silent When pressed in combination with the SELECT CH EDIT button this selects the source or track to be assigned to a track for recording 6 Channel Faders Use these faders to adjust the volume level of each channel or track 7 PHONES Knob This knob adjusts the volume of the headphones 8 AUX SEND knob This knob adjusts the output level of the AUX SEND jacks 9 EZ ROUTING SOLO Button This button opens the EZ Routing screen In conjunction with SHIFT this switches the Solo function on off 10 FADER EDIT Button Pressing this button alternately assigns each channel s input mixer track mixer and effect return mixer to the fader for that channel The button indicator shows the current status INPUT orange Input Mixer TRACK green Track Mixer RETURN red In conjunction with SHIFT this accesses the Master Block setting page Effect Return Mixer 11 Master Fader Use this fader to adjust th
72. device that receives the MTC or MIDI Clock signals from the controlling device is called the slave When using MTC you can choose whether to have the MIDI sequencer be the master that controls the VS 880EX or to have the VS 880EX be the master that con trols the MIDI sequencer In contrast when you use MIDI Clock whereas you can synchronize a MIDI sequencer from the VS 880EX VS 880EX as master it will not be possible to synchronize the VS 880EX from the sequencer VS 880EX as slave This section explains how the VS 880EX can be syn chronized with a MIDI sequencer that implements MTC MIDI Time Code When using MTC you can choose to have the VS 880EX be the master that con trols the MIDI sequencer or to have the MIDI sequencer be the master that controls the VS 880EX MTC Type The VS 880EX can work with the following types of MTC Check the specifications of the MIDI devices that you are using and select the appro priate type of MTC on the VS 880EX 30 30 frames per second non drop format This is used by audio devices such as analog tape recorders and for NTSC format black and white video 29N 29 97 frames per second non drop format This is used for NTSC format color video 29D 29 97 frames per second drop format This is used for NTSC format broadcast color video 25 25 frames per second This is used for SECAM or PAL format video audio equip ment and film 24 24 frames per second This is used
73. display Press YES Press CURSOR a several times until TRK Cut Tr appears in the display 4 Press STATUS for the track on which you want to carry out Track Cut The STATUS indicator will light red 94 Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance Track Editing 5 You can use the TIME VALUE dial to specify the V track that you wish to delete For example 1 1 means V track 1 of track 1 1 means all V tracks of track 1 and means all V tracks of all tracks Displayed blinking Track for cut CONDITION MARKER TIME O 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER 6 If you want to cut multiple tracks simultaneously repeat Steps 4 and 5 7 If there are any tracks which you decide not to cut press that track s STATUS once again The STATUS indicator will blink green Alternatively you can use PARAMETER lt lt gt gt to access the settings for that track and press CANCEL NO 8 Press PARAMETER gt several times until TRK St appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial St Start point Specifies the starting time of the segment to be cut 10 Press PARAMETER B gt TRK End appears in the display 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial End End point Specifies the ending time of the segment to be cut 12 Press PARAMETER gt TRK Track Cut OK
74. do not wish to send the input to the effect 1 bus select Off and proceed to step 31 CONDITION MARKER TIME 11 2 roles 3 a PA En ra aeaa sI s8l 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER Press PARAMETER gt A You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd IN SndLev appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send level If in step 19 you selected either Ins InsL InsR or InsS the sound already processed by the effect will be sent to the effect bus It will not be re input to effect 1 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt d IN SndPan appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send pan Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt d REC FX1 appears in the display If you wish to record the effect which you are using in a send return configuration press the STATUS button for the recording destination track However if in step 19 you selected either Ins InsL InsR or InsS this display will not appear The sound with the inserted effect will be recorded CONDITION MARKER MEASURE BEAT SYNC MODE SCENE s8 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER
75. for each channel independently use the following procedure 1 Press CH EDIT SELECT for the channels whose pan settings you wish to adjust 2 Press PARAMETER a gt gt so that MIX Sw appears in the display 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIX Sw Mix Switch This selects the bus to which the source or track out put will be assigned For this example select On On The source or track will be sent to the mix bus Set this to On when for example you simply want to mix the inputs without recording the source However the sources that are assigned to the RECORDING bus are disabled Off The source or track will not be assigned to the mix bus If it is not assigned to a recording bus either then that source track will not be output anywhere 4 Press PARAMETER B gt gt so that MIX Bal appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Mix Balance In the example L63 8 s 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER MIX Bal Mix Balance Adjust the pan L63 0 R63 of the signal that is output to the mix bus or the recording bus 6 Press CH EDIT SELECT for the other channel 7 Repeat steps 2 5 to make the same settings for the other channel 150 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions 8 Press PARAMETER a a Ofs Bal appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Ofs Bal Offset Balance Adjust the overall lef
76. for video audio devices and film in the US 116 Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices Drop Frame and Non Drop Frame There are two types of time code used by NTSC format video cassette recorders drop in which When you are having the VS 880EX act to control the the time code is not continuous and non drop which features continuous time code In drop which is used for NTSC color video format the 1 Connect the VS 880EX and the MIDI sequencer as first two frames of every minute are dropped shown below except for those at ten minute intervals MIDI sequencer use the following procedure 00m59s 01m00s scsi MDO DIGITAL 7 8 OUT THRU IN IN 1 25 26 27 28 29 00 01 02 03 04 O05f CE Qun225 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RUL INTERFERENCE AND 2 THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT Ar INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIR Drop Frame 29D 00m59s 01m00s 25 26 27 28 29 02 03 04 05 06 O7f In most video and audio production since for mats with continuous frames are easier to deal with non drop is generally used In contrast in situations such as in broadcast where the time code must match actual clock time drop is used MIDI IN MIDI Sequencer 9 Frame Appendices p 123 piemens MI 9 NTSC Format Appendices p 124 2 SECAM Format PAL Format Appendices p 124 2 Press SYSTEM several times unt
77. gt and the TIME VALUE dial to make the setting EQL Equalizer Low This adjusts the gain 12 12 dB and the center fre quency 40 Hz 1 5 kHz of the low range shelving equalizer Gain Frequency CONDITION MARKER H TIME MEASURE BEAT v SYNC MODE SCENE 3 RET 12345678 INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER EQL gain 12 12 dB Gain Frequency EQL frequency 40 Hz 1 5 kHz 8 Hold down SHIFT and press the channel 4 EQ Mid SELECT 58 If the Display Indicates Not 3band EQ If Not 3band EQ is displayed the EQ Mode equalizer mode is set to 2 band EQ In this case it will not be possible to adjust the mid range equalizer 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial EQM Equalizer Mid This adjusts the gain 12 12 dB of the mid range peaking equalizer Gain s8 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER EQM gain 12 12 dB Gain Frequency lt gt EQM frequency 200 Hz 8 kHz 10 Press PARAMETER gt 11 Use CURSOR l gt and the TIME VALUE dial to make the setting Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording EQM Equalizer Mid This adjusts the center frequency 200 Hz 8 kHz and Q definition 0 5 16 of the mid range peaking equalizer Frequency Q definition CONDITION MARKER i TIME 8 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER Gain Frequency
78. if in UNDO condition UNDOJ indicator is lit Events served for REDO will be released But please note that you cannot can cel REDO the last UNDO if you once execute STORE Execute Song Optimize p 156 Please execute Song Optimize if you have done a lot of Punch In recording Events served for unnecessary audio data will be released But please note that you can only do single level UNDO Erase AutoMix data p 146 If you have recorded AutoMix data erase unnecessary data Events served for unnecessary AutoMix data will be released 23 Chapter 1 Before You Start VS 880EX Terminology Mixer Section lt a INPUT to house from water line 24 The digital mixer specifies input or output status of the recorder section The VS 880EX contains an Input Mixer located before the recorder section a Track Mixer located after the recorder section an Effect Return Mixer which controls the effect return and Stereo In p 152 and a Master Block which determines the output jacks from which the signal of each mixer will be output For more detailed information about the mixer section please refer to the Mixer Section Block Diagram Appendices p 120 On the VS 880EX signals flow through buses buses are shared lines through which multiple signals can be routed efficiently to multiple tracks or chan nels It may be easier to understand this if we use the analogy of water pipes For example the water
79. in Loop Recording or for marking points in Punch In Recording An interval of at least 0 1 seconds must left between markers It will not be possible to add a new markers if a markers already exists at a location less than 0 1 seconds away Marking a Time Location Press TAP and a marker will be added to the current location This can be done during recording or play back of the song as well as when the song is stopped P TAP J 00h00m00s00 Time About Marker Numbers Each marker is assigned a number 000 999 in the order of its time location This means that if you add a new marker at a location earlier than an existing marker the numbers of the subsequent markers will be incremented TAP After setting a Marker Moving the Location of Markers To move to the Marker immediately preceding the current playback time press PREVIOUS You move ahead one marker at a time in the order they are placed each time the button is pressed To move to the Marker immediately following the current playback time press NEXT Displaying Markers The Marker number at any playback location is indicated in the display If there is no Marker number in the current location then the closest preceding Marker number is displayed If there are no markers in the song is indicated If is shown in the display it indicates that although there are markers placed in
80. it can be used by the VS 880EX When a disk is initialized the entire contents are irretrievably lost Check any such disk you plan to initialize to make sure that it does not contain anything that you don t want deleted Additionally disks used with the VS 880EX cannot be used on other devices such as personal computers If you accidentally delete data that you need that data cannot be restored to its previous condition Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data If you are using a drive or disk that has been parti tioned please note that you will not be able to choose a particular partition that you wish to ini tialize When you carry out a drive initialization the whole drive and all its partitions will be initialized at once Here is an example how to initialize new Zip disks 1 Confirm that power of the Zip drive and the VS 880EX is turned on Insert a disk into the Zip drive Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Drivelnitialize appears in the display 4 Press YES Init Drive appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Drive for initialize in the example a Zip drive MEASURE BEAT SYNC MODE SCENE I 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER Init Drive Initialize Drive Select the disk drive IDE SCSIO SCSI7 The inter nal hard disk will be shown as IDE and external disk drives will be shown as SCO SC7
81. master tracks V track write sources to be written to the CD R disc when writing is to be carried out 108 Chapter 8 Use with a CD RW Drive Range The two tracks designated by the VS 880EX for writ ing to the CD R disc are written from the beginning of the tracks normally 00h00m00s00 to the end song end Thus any blank space on the tracks before or after the actual performance results in wasted space on the CD R disc To avoid this use Track Cut to remove any unused portions on the tracks 00h00m00s00 3 Blank Space Performance Data Before Track Cutting Y fo Performance Data A Es After Track Cutting Time Place a blank CD R disc in the CD RW drive Press SONG several times until SNG CD R Write appears in the display Press YES Scanning CD R appears in the display The VS 880EX is checking the SCSI ID of the connected CD RW drive and displays the next ID number for a set time 4 Drive model number Hardware Manufacturer SCSI ID in the example ID 2 CONDITION MARKER A TM AB LR AUX MASTER m8 12345678 INPUT TRACK SNG Write Finalize appears in the display Press PARAMETER gt Write w o Fin Write without finalize appears in the display 5 6 Press YES Press SEL CH EDIT for the tracks to be written to the CD R L track Press CURSOR b gt
82. metronome sounds only during recording Rec amp Play The metronome sounds during both recording and playback 14 Press PARAMETER b gt MetroCh appears in the display 15 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MetroCh Metronome Channel This sets the MIDI channel 1 16 for transmitting Metronome sound Note Messages 155 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions 16 Press PARAMETER gt Acc Note appears in the display 17 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Acc Note Accent Note This sets note numbers C0 G9 for the downbeat When the Drum set is playing this selects specific per cussion sounds 18 Press PARAMETER b gt Nrm Note appears in the display 19 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Nrm Note Normal Note This sets note numbers CO G9 for the upbeats When the Drum set is playing this selects specific percussion sounds 20 Press PARAMETER gt Acc Velo appears in the display 21 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Acc Velo Accent Velocity This sets the velocity 1 127 for the downbeat 22 Press PARAMETER gt Nrm Velo appears in the display 23 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Normal Velocity This sets the velocity 1 127 for the upbeats 24 This completes the settings for sounding the metronome with an external MIDI device Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition When the Disk Has Little Remaining Space When operations such as
83. of the MIDI song data to which you want to synchronize must first be recorded onto the sync track Then transmit the recorded MIDI clock data to the MIDI sequencer to synchronize the MIDI song data This is a convenient method to use when the MIDI song data has been cre ated earlier than the VS 880EX song In particular when synchronizing to MIDI song data in which the tempo gradually increases or decreases using the tempo map allows more precise following of tempo changes compared to the tempo map in which tempo is set for each measure Recording MIDI Clock Messages 1 Connect the VS 880EX and the MIDI sequencer as shown below SCSI lo GE CE Qn225 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES OPERATION IS SL TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS 1 THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HA INTERFERENCE AND 2 THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RE INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION __ __MID I DIGITAL 7 8 OUT THRU IN1 MIDI OUT MIDI Sequencer 2 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display 3 Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS SYN Sync Tr Rec appears in the display 5 Press YES Wait for Start appears in the display and the sync track is ready for record MIDI clock data 6 Start p
84. pan knobs on the top panel When Channel Link is on adjust the Offset Balance of the sources tracks p 151 CONDITION MARKER MEASURE BEAT SYNC M SCENE 8 s 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 11 Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt a 81 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings 12 TR Level appears in the display Adjust the 21 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the level of the playback track Press the SELECT CH previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt d EDIT button for the playback track whose level you wish to adjust and use the TIME VALUE dial You can also adjust the level using the chan nel faders on the top panel 22 TR FX1 Snd appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to send the play back track to the effect 1 bus select either Pre or Pst and proceed to step 23 If you do not wish When Channel Link is on adjust the Offset Level of the to send the playback track to the effect 1 bus tracks p 150 select Off and proceed to step 29 58 oo oo an DI 12345678 AB LR 12345678 AB_ LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 13 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the 23 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt a previous screen by pressing PARAMETE
85. performance being played back to match the pitch of the instrument you want to record This is referred to as the Vari Pitch function Vari Pitch can be used not only to compensate for pitch differences but can also be used when you want to purposely produce special effects To use the Vari Pitch function use the following pro cedure 1 Hold down SHIFT and press VARI PITCH AUTOMIX The current sample rate appears in the display Sample Rate In the example 44 1 kHz CONDITION MARKER 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER Press PLAY to begin playback of the song Rotate the TIME VALUE dial to change the pitch of the playback Check the playback to see how the pitch actually sounds 4 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Now Vari Pitch turns on and off each time SHIFT VARI PITCH is pressed If vari pitch is on the VARI PITCH indicator will light when you continue holding SHIFT 152 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions When vari pitch is on the number of tracks which can be simultaneously recorded played back may be lim ited depending on the range of pitch change Directly Inputting Numeric Characters When modifying the time locations of a locator or punch in point you can use the LOCATOR buttons as numeric keys to input numbers directly Not only can you use the normal process of rotating the TIME VALUE dial to enter text but you can also us
86. procedure to connect the CD RW drive to the VS 880EX To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections Once the connections have been completed turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunc tion and or damage to speakers and other devices Always make sure to have the volume level turned down before switching on power Even with the volume all the way down you may still hear some sound when the power is switched on but this is normal and does not indicate a malfunction To Power Outlet 107 g 1a1deyo Chapter 8 Use with a CD RW Drive Turn on the power of the CD RW drive Turn on the power of the VS 880EX Turn on the power of connected audio equipment ee N oe Raise the volume of the audio devices to appro priate levels For details on connecting a CD RW drive and on the required settings refer to About SCSI appendices p 5 Creating an Audio CD You can create your own audio CD by writing sound data that from two specified tracks on the VS 880EX to a CD R disc The VS 880EX first creates a CD R image data file on its internal IDE hard disk then writes that image data to the CD R disc Thus an internal IDE hard d
87. recording which has been pre registered when the VS 880EX was shipped 1 Press EZ ROUTING several times until EZR Recording appears in the display 2 Press YES EZR Use Template do you wish to apply the tem plate appears in the display 3 Press YES 4 When the routing has been recalled Complete appears in the display and return to Play condi tion At this time the mixer settings will be as fol lows INPUT Jack Recording Track INPUT 1 1 INPUT 2 2 INPUT 3 3 INPUT 4 4 INPUT 5 5 INPUT 6 6 DIGITAL IN1 7 7 DIGITAL IN1 8 8 Display parameter name Input Track Mixer Mixer ATT current value current value Phase current value current value MIX Sw Off On MIX Level 100 100 MIX Pan 0 IN7 InsertL IN8 InsertR 0 V Track 7 currently selected V track EQ Switch On EQL Gain 0 dB EQL Frequency 300 Hz EQM Gain 0 dB EQM Q 0 5 EQM Frequency 1 4 kHz EQH Gain 0 dB EQH Frequency 4 kHz FX1 Ins Off IN3 InsertL IN4 InsertR Off FX2 Ins Off Off AUX Sw Off Off Display parameter name Input Track Mixer Mixer Fader Link Off Off Channel Link Off Off EFFECT1 Off Off EFFECT2 Off Off Display parameter name Master Block Master Sel MIX EQ Mode 3band Direct Out Off Master FX1 Ins Master FX2 Ins Display parameter name Effect FX1 Sel A96 DualComp Lim FX2 Sel A96 DualComp Lim Select this when recording the performance data from
88. recording and editing so please read and understand this chapter Before You Begin To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections Once the connections have been completed Quick Start p 3 turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to speakers and other devices Always make sure to have the volume level turned down before switching on power Even with the volume all the way down you may still hear some sound when the power is switched on but this is normal and does not indicate a malfunction 1 Turn on the power with the POWER switch on the rear panel of the VS 880EX When the VS 880EX starts up properly the following display will appear CONDITION MARKER ED Po MEASURE BEAT 3 3 H H sde se SYNC MODE SCENE TREPET O of hid ce REMAINING TIME 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER When you turn on the power of the VS 880EX the disk drive must be recognized and certain required data must be loaded Thus it takes a short while for the unit to start up Turn on the power of connected audio equipment Raise the volume of the audio devices to appro priate levels 4 If the display screen is difficult to read hold down PLAY DISPLAY and rotate the TIME VALU
89. recording or playback from the current time REC Press this button to record a song 5 TIME VALUE Dial In normal playback status this dial adjusts the time of playback This is used to change the settings values for each parameter when settings are changed 6 PLAY DISPLAY Button Press this button to return to the screen that appears when the VS 880EX is turned on normal playback sta tus In conjunction with SHIFT this switches the item shown in the bar display 7 PARAMETER Buttons Use these buttons to switch the parameter display 8 SHIFT Button This button is pressed in conjunction with other but tons to access additional functions of those buttons 9 CURSOR Buttons Normally i e in Play Condition this dial is used to move the current time When making settings i e in Edit Condition this dial is used to modify parameter values When a YES NO response is required during an oper ation use these button to reply NO CANCEL This is pressed to cancel the cur rent operation or exit the cur rent screen YES ENTER This is pressed to execute the current operation or select the current screen 10 AUTOMIX VARI PITCH Button This button switches the Auto Mix function on and off The button indicator lights when Auto Mix is on In conjunction with SHIFT this switches the Vari pitch function on off 11 MIDI DISK Indicator This indicator lights green when MIDI me
90. recover operation is used the data for all songs which were saved together by the backup operation are loaded In contrast with the Name procedure only the song data that you spec ify is loaded 1 Connect the DAT recorder to the VS 880EX as fol lowing Optical OUTPUT DIGITAL 7 8 FOOT PHONES MASTER__ IN1 SWITCH R L 980 B A AUX SEND DAT Recorder Coaxial OUTPUT DIGITAL 7 8 FOOT PHONES MASTER IN1 SWITCH R L DIGITAL 7 8 B A AUX SEND O Y X a Digital Out Oooo epoca AO OOE OD DAT Recorder 2 Insert the tape which contains the song data into the DAT recorder If the song data is backed up on two or more tapes insert the first tape 3 Prepare the tape for playback from the beginning of the song data 4 Press SONG several times until SNG DAT Recover appears in the display 5 Press YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 6 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 7 D IN Sel appe
91. shorter than the length of tape on which you are recording When using tapes with different record ing times set this to the recording time of the shortest tape 129 Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder DAT Backup 9 Press PARAMETER gt Backup Wait appears in the display 10 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Backup Wait When this is set to On the data transmission speed will be slower Turn this on when using a disk drive such as a Zip drive whose data read write speed is slower When this is set to On although it takes longer for the backup to finish problems arising from the data transfer such as data loss are minimized Normally this is set to Off 11 Press PARAMETER gt Sample Rate appears in the display 12 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Sample Rate This sets the sample rate 48 kHz 44 1 kHz during DAT backup This sample rate has no relation to the sample rate of the song data Normally this is set to 48 kHz 13 The approximate time it will take and the number of tapes needed to back up the data are indicated in the display Please prepare the necessary num ber of tapes Required time 47 minutes 34 seconds Sample Rate CONDITION MARKER TIME Js 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER Required number of tapes 1 tape 14 Press PARAMETER gt D Out Sel appears in the display 15 Rotate the TIME VALUE
92. song data or when using the VS 880EX for extended periods we recommended that you to perform this procedure frequently Hold down SHIFT and press STORE ZERO 2 STORE OK appears in the display If you are satisfied with the results of your recording press YES If you wish to cancel the save press NO The contents of the demo songs are protected from being changed or overwritten Song Protect p 64 You can not save operation with the demo songs This means if you press YES at Step 2 when a demo song is selected the message Song Protected will appear and the procedure cannot be continued 43 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording Recording Over a Portion of a Performance Punch In Punch Out Sometimes when listening to a recorded performance even if you don t find it necessary to discard the entire song there may be sections containing mistakes or lyrics that are hard to hear In such instances you will find the following procedure convenient for rerecord ing only selected parts of a recording The switching from playback to recording status is called punch in and the switch back from recording to playback is referred to as punch out Use Transport Control Buttons to punch in and out Start Punch in Punch out Stop Time PLAY REC REC STOP kel C RESTART AUTOMIX REC C AUTOMIX REC SHUT EJECT
93. the display will indicate Off and the signal will not be assigned it will not be recorded The symbols displayed in indicate the following signals IN1I IN8 INPUT Jack 1 INPUT Jack 8 DIGITAL IN TR1 TR8 Track 1 Track 8 Track Bouncing FX1 Effect 1 Return FX2 Effect 2 Return Stin Stereo In For example a display of TR1 Assign IN7 On indi cates that the source from INPUT jack 7 has been assigned to track 1 for recording Press SELECT CH EDIT on Channel 2 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial to let TR2 Assign IN8 appears in the display 8 Press YES 9 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 10 As described in Recording to the Tracks p 42 record and check the contents Adjusting the Tone Equalizer A two band low high or three band low mid high parametric equalizer is provided for each channel First make equalizer adjustments separately for each channel If you have recorded any stereo pairs be sure that the same settings are made for both tracks Then while paying attention to the overall balance make final adjustments for equalizer pan and volume level for each channel If you adjust the equalizer while listening to the sound you may notice a clicking noise This is not a malfunction If the noise is objectionable make adjustments while the sound is not playing Hold down SHIFT and press EDIT FADER 2 Press PARAMETER
94. the MIDI sequencer in Record mode and begin playback with the VS 880EX 3 When playback begins immediately hold down SHIFT and press SCENE The mixer s initial condition is transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector 4 As you listen to the song make adjustments to the faders and other controls as needed 5 When playback of the song is finished stop the MIDI sequencer and the VS 880EX This completes the recording with Compu Mix Save the MIDI song data to a floppy disk or other storage media When you go back to the beginning of the MIDI song data and the VS 880EX song and then begin playback on the VS 880EX the mixer is con trolled according to the Compu Mix while the song is played back When playing back songs using Compu Mix may be you want the actual volume levels to remain unchanged even when the faders on the top panel are moved In such instances use the following proce dure 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS MIDI PRM appears in the display Press YES 3 Press PARAMETER gt gt several times until MID CtrLocal appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial CtrLocal Control Local Switch When this is set to Off actual volume levels remain unchanged even when the faders on the top panel are moved fader movements have no effect Normally this is set to On At this time set the Control Local switch to Off 4 Press PLAY DISPLAY R
95. the content as described in Recording to the Tracks p 42 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording Recording Digital Signals With the VS 880EX you can record the digital signals output by CD players DAT and MD recorders Roland VS 1680 and other digital audio devices as is The VS 880EX s digital interface conforms to S P DIF When recording digital signals be sure to digital audio devices conforming to the same standards 9 S P DIF Appendices p 124 e VS 880EX 1 e CD player DAT and MD recorder or other digital audio device or devices e Digital connector cable coaxial or optical Connect the digital output connector of your audio device with the VS 880EX s DIGITAL IN connector DIGITAL IN1 is a coaxial connector DIGITAL IN2 an optical connector Use the appropriate connector for your audio device DIGITAL IN1 coaxial and DIGITAL IN2 optical cannot be used simultaneously Select one of the con nectors for use It can record the digital signals when the sample rate of the song is set to match the sample rate of the input source The song created when a disk drive is initialized will have a sample rate of 44 1 kHz If the sample rate of the input source is other than 44 1 kHz create a new song with that sample rate p 40 Then if you wish to create original audio CDs select that sample rate for 44 1 kHz p 40 In Order to Make a Digital Connection with Your CD Player At the time of pu
96. the disc you plan to use Sample rate and recording mode Only songs with a sample rate of 44 1 kHz can be written to CD R discs Songs with sample rates other than this cannot be written to CD R discs While any recording mode may be used for the higher quality original CDs either MTP Multi Track Pro MAS Mastering or MT1 Multi Track 1 is recommended p 40 Mixing The content of adjustments made to mixer settings during playback are not recorded to the CD R disc For example in a normal performance even if you control fade ins and fade outs with the master fader this is not reflected in what is written to CD R disc rather it ends up sounding as if the song is cutting in and out Adjust equalizer level pan and other set tings during track bouncing Setting up Auto Mix beforehand can make the track bouncing operation simpler p 142 Effects Effects that are operating during playback are not recorded on CD R discs For example in a normal per formance even if you have reverb or delay applied to the output of each track this is not reflected in what is written to CD R disc rather it ends up sounding as if no effect has been applied Add effects during track bouncing p 61 Track bouncing Two V tracks one as the left track and one as the right can be written to a CD R disc Bounce the tracks of song data that has not been mixed down to two chan nel stereo tracks p 60 Designate these tracks as the
97. this device in the vicinity of such receivers O Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to tempera ture extremes Excessive heat can deform or discol or the unit Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a cloth impreg nated with a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Repairs and Data Please be aware that all data contained in the unit s memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs Important data should always be backed up on a storage device e g hard disk or Zip disk or DAT recorder or written down on paper when possible During repairs due care is taken to avoid the loss of data However in certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Additional Precautions Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing
98. time will be shown 3 TIME The current time of the song is displayed as SMPTE time code 9 SMPTE Time Code Appendices p 124 CONDITION MARKER TIME 3 aB MEASURE BEAT v 1 0 2 SYNC MODE SCENE 31 G REMAINING TIME 24 8 48 INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER This shows the current measure of the song 5 BEAT This shows the current beat of the song 6 SYNC MODE This indicates the current sync mode method of syn chronization 7 SCENE This shows the currently used scene number mixer setting An asterisk shown at the beginning of the scene number indicates that the current mixer settings have been modified since the scene was recalled 8 REMAINING TIME This shows the remaining length of time available for recording 9 Bar display In normal condition the item selected by DISPLAY PLAY are shown graphically While you are making a setting data for the setting being made is displayed graphically 18 Preparations Rear Panel 1 E A OUTPUT INPUT En OUT THRU E parma siviron PHONES ae 6 5 4 3 2 i OUT2 IN2 2 1 POWER Switch 5 DIGITAL Connectors This switch turns power of the VS 880EX on and off 2 AC IN AC Inlet Connect the included power cable here 3 SCSI Connector This is a DB 25 type SCSI connector for connecting
99. to be applied without using any equipment other than the VS 880EX itself This chapter explains how to use these internal effects Composition of the Effects The VS 880EX has two effect units which allow two types of effect to be applied simultaneously FX1 and FX2 For each channel of the mixer you can specify the effect which will be used EFFECTS Connecting the Effects The effect is directly added either between each channel s equalizer and fader or before the master fader Connect the effect in this way if you want to use effects applied to change the output of the sound itself such as when using distortion or overdrive effects When inserting an effect into one of the channels or into the Master Block that effect cannot be used in send return EQ 2band 3band MIX bus or REC bus MIX bus or REC bus AUX bus Depending on the effects used when mixing with different effects inserted into each channel or mixing channels having effects inserted with other channels having no effects timing shifts may occur or you may not be able to achieve the effect you desire 66 Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects 1 Press CH EDIT SELECT for the channel to which you want to apply the effect The CH EDIT indicator lights 2 Press PARAMETER lt lt gt gt until FX1 Ins appears in the display Now you can make settings for effect 1 3 Select how the effect will be conn
100. to begin playback of the song 3 Play back the song until you reach the point you are looking for Press STOP to stop playback 4 Alternately press TO and FROM The song before and after the current time is played back Determine whether the beginning of the sound is earlier or later than the current time 5 Next rotate the TIME VALUE dial to move the current time until you can hear a bit of the begin ning of the sound when you press TO 6 Finally rotate the TIME VALUE dial to move the current time until the sound begins precisely when you press FROM 7 Now you can easily find the precise location where the sound begins Place a mark point at the current time or store the current time in a locate point so that you will be able to easily find it later Adjusting the Preview Length 1 Hold down SHIFT and press TO or FROM 2 The PreviewLen is displayed Rotate the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the time Press TO or FROM to check the actual playback time Preview Length 1 0 sec CONDITION MARKER TIME L Fs 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER Preview Len Preview Length It sets a length of playback time in the preview func tion 3 After you have finished making the settings press PLAY DISPLAY The initial display reappears 140 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions This function is used to repeat playback of the song before and after a designated p
101. track bouncing Thus we recommend that you to use a recording mode featuring higher quality sound such as MAS or MT1 177 Recording to Cakewalk 1 Make the connections as shown below Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples Computer Cakewalk A A Sound Card Y v MIDI Interface b MIDI 15 E g o pma Driver lt oQ es En DIGITAL il MIDI IN IDI OUT IN i coaxial or optical DIGITAL OUT l MIDI OUT MIDI IN ololololololojo o NU 1 C DOODOO SobbosS oo I E TE E Ta E 7c T J ele f LAO ET coo a 63 Ce Sere HE oooo o VS 880EX 2 Follow the procedure as described in Settings for the VS 880EX p 195 and Settings for Cakewalk Pro Audio p 196 set up the system so that the VS 880EX and Cakewalk are synchronized 3 Make the settings to Cakewalk as shown below For more detailed informa tion please refer to your Cakewalk owner s manual Settings Audio Options Advanced SMPTE MTC Sync High Quality If your computer does not feature adequate performance even with the above set tings you may not be ab
102. use MIDI Clock to synchronize with an external MIDI sequencer or other device even without recording using the metronome In such instances to synchronize with the tempo of the recorded song first set a Marker You can then create a sync track or tempo map beginning at that Marker Setting Markers Along with the Tempo Press ZERO Press PLAY to begin playback of the song 3 While listening to the song press TAP at the downbeat at the each beat 4 When you have finished setting the Markers press STOP To correctly place Markers on the downbeats of other song we recommend using the Preview and Scrub func tions Creating a Sync Track from the Marker A sync track can be generated from markers that were assigned according to the tempo of a previously recorded performance This is convenient when you have already recorded a performance of an acoustic instrument such as guitar or vocal and now you wish to synchronize a MIDI sequencer etc to the recording 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display 2 Press YES 3 Press PARAMETER B gt several times until SYS MIDI PRM appears in the display Press YES 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial CV Convert Here you can select how the sync track tempo map will be created For this example select CV1 CV1 Tap S Tr Create the sync track from mark points CV2 Tap T Map Create the tempo map fr
103. volume levels of the signal after passing through the AUX knob and the master fader CONDITION MARKER 12345678 AB INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER The volume of each channel after passing through the channel faders will be displayed The AUX and MAS TER fields indicate the respective volume levels of the signal after passing through the AUX knob and the master fader CONDITION MARKER SR w a e EY Sh 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER The way in which sound is recorded in the various tracks before and after the current time will be dis played e aa 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER The settings of the master fader and the PAN knob and fader of each channel will be displayed If the dis played location of the PAN knobs or faders is different than the actual location as when the mixer mode has been switched the current location of the PAN knob or fader will blink HH H HH 8 AB LR AUX MASTER INPUT TRACK 163 Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions Checking the Size of a Recorded Performance You can see the Song Name Song Number Sample Rate Recording Mode and the actual used capacity of the current song by the following operation 1 Stop the song playback When the song is per formed press STOP 2 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 3 Hold down SHIFT and press SONG The displa
104. when switching disks in drives such as the Zip drive con nected to the VS 880EX s SCSI connector Use the fol lowing procedure 1 Perform the shutdown procedure as described in Turning Off the Power p 33 2 Confirm that PowerOFF RESTART appears in the display 3 Hold down SHIFT and press RESTART PLAY This restarts the VS 880EX 33 Chapter 2 Basic Operation Basic Operations on the VS 880EX The VS 880EX features a wide variety of abilities functions and settings parameters These are orga nized by type function operation and so on The major organizational grouping within the song is referred to as a condition A list of the different condi tions described below Play Condition Here you can perform normal playback recording The VS 880EX is put in Play condition whenever the power is turned on Channel Condition This is the condition in which input mixer track mixer or effect return mixer related settings are made Master Block Condition This is where you make settings for the mixer s Master Block Song Condition Executes the operations related to each of the songs Locator Condition This is where you make settings for the locator or marker Track Condition Executes the operations related to each of the tracks Effect Condition In this status you can make effects settings System Condition Here you can make settings that affect the entire en
105. 1 A 1 indicates V track 1 of track 1 in V track bank A Exchange Exchange source track destination track CONDITION MARKER a TIME 12345678 INPUT TRASK AB LR AUX MASTER blinking 8 If you want to exchange multiple tracks simulta neously repeat Steps 5 7 Do not designate V tracks that have already been specified as exchange destinations for other Tracks 9 If there are any tracks which you decide not to exchange press that track s SELECT CH EDIT once again The SELECT indicator will blink orange Alternatively you can use PARAMETER dk gt gt to access the settings for that track and press CANCEL NO twice 10 Press PARAMETER B gt TRK TrackExchangeOK appears in the display 11 Press YES This executes Track Exchange If you wish to cancel press NO 12 When the exchange is completed correctly Complete appears in the display and return to Play condition This operation inserts blank space at the specified location PEI Se lt gt Time Length Do not leave sound within 0 5 seconds before or after the area into which the data will be inserted Any sound which was within 0 5 seconds of the inserted data will not playback 1 Press TRACK several times until TRK Track Insert appears in the display Press YES Press CURSOR a several times until TRK Insert Tr appears in the display
106. 12 Hold down SHIFT and press the channel 5 EQ Hi SELECT 13 Use CURSOR gt gt and the TIME VALUE dial to make the setting EQH Equalizer High This adjusts the gain 12 12 dB and the center fre quency 500 Hz 18 kHz of the high range shelving equalizer Gain Frequency wO CONDITION MARKER E TME s8 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER EQH gain 12 12 dB Gain Frequency EQH frequency 500 Hz 18 kHz 14 Repeat Steps 1 12 if you wish to make adjust ments to other equalizers 15 When you are finished making the adjustments press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition If necessary save the song p 43 The 3 band low mid high equalizer can be used on channel faders in only one mixer mode either the Track mixer or Input mixer at a time You cannot use the equalizer in both mixers simultaneously on the same channel For example if you are using the 3 band equaliz er on Track 1 then you cannot use it on Input 1 59 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording Combining the Contents of Tracks Track Bouncing You can mix the performances recorded on two or more tracks and rerecord them onto a different empty track This operation is known as track bouncing It is a convenient technique to use when you have run out of free tracks In this section we will mix the performances recorded on tracks 1 4 and rerecord the
107. 40 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd 41 EQ Sel appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial CONDITION MARKER TIME 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 42 Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER 43 Direct Out appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you do not wish to use Direct OUT select Off If you wish to output tracks 1 4 select 1 4 If you wish to output tracks 5 8 select 5 8 CONDITION MARKER TIME MEASURE BEAT SYNC MODE SCENE 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 44 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd 45 FX1 MstIns appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to insert effect 1 into the master out select On If not select Off If effect 1 has been inserted in another channel the display will indicate and this item cannot be set 58 mm n a a a a a a 12345678 AB LR AUX MASTER INPUT TRACK 46 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt 47 FX2 MstIns appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to insert effect 2 into the master out select On If not select Off If effect 2 has bee
108. 60 BELGIUM HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Benelux N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Langebrogade 6 Post Box 1937 DK 1023 Copenhagen K DENMARK TEL 32 95 3111 FRANCE Roland France SA 4 Rue Paul Henri SPAAK Parc de l Esplanade F 77 462 St Thibault Lagny Cedex FRANCE TEL 01 600 73 500 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Lauttasaarentie 54 B Fin 00201 Helsinki FINLAND TEL 9 682 4020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente Handelsgesellschaft mbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE V Dimitriadis amp Co Ltd 20 Alexandras St amp Bouboulinas 54 St 106 82 Athens GREECE TEL 01 8227 775 HUNGARY Intermusica Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland Audio House Belmont Court Donnybrook Dublin 4 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 2603501 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 273 0074 POLAND P P H Brzostowicz UL Gibraltarska 4 PL 03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Tecnologias Musica e Audio Roland Portugal S A RUA SANTA CATARINA 131 4000 Porto PORTUGAL TEL 02 208 44 56 ROMANIA FBS
109. 8 About Editing Operations vissiin snika aiaa akiai ideana 88 Track Editos reae O eiae 88 About the Bar Displays issides iseiti ret anar eers Ka oa e Easan oree S ias iaaa SEE Iaa 88 Repeating Performance Data Track Copy eocncccccocononenonnncnnnnncnrnrnnnnncanannrnanarnnnnancnrnranos 89 Moving Performance Data Track Move eocccncciononononiconananinononanananonononononononononononanonononos 91 Exchanging Performance Data Between Tracks Track Exchange oconoconconininonnononannos 92 Inserting a Blank Space Into Performance Data Track Insert 0 93 Deleting Performance Data Track Cut cocoonccccicinacacacinanannononinonananononononanonononononananonononos 94 Erasing Performance Data Track Erase oononicininoninnnnonaninonononanananonononononanonononononanonononos 95 Modifying the Playback Time of the Performance Data Time Compression Expansion 96 Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive cooconccccnnccconnnonncocnonannononcrnanonos 99 Before You Use a Zip Drive coooonccccnininnccnnncononnonnnc nn 99 Handling the Zip Drive cmccencncoconononenninnnnnnnnnnnrarnnnecnnananannnnorannnnnnn na rnnnrnnnananannrnnraranannn nana ani 99 Handling Zip DISKS speissi aiii e er dador E cie Senan da denise 99 Connecting the Zip Drive ooococccnnnncconnnccnoncccnnonccnnnnnnnnano conan nana n caracas 99 Initializing the Disk Drive Initialize ooonnnnininnnnicnccnnnnnccoconnnnocannnanonnarrnn rra nn 100 Checking Disk Reliability onooiocnnmiocnommmmrm
110. 80EX using the tempo map What is a Tempo Map A tempo map is a song s measure beat and tempo information Transmitting this information to MIDI sequencers and other devices it can be used in syn chronizing operations with external MIDI devices The tempo map sets tempo changes for each measure so you can record information specifying changes in rhythm and tempo to be played from any designated measure With the VS 880EX tempo maps are num bered sequentially from the beginning of the song with Tempo Map 1 first followed by Tempo Map 2 Tempo Map 3 and so on Tempo Map 1 is already specified at the beginning of the song and determines the initial tempo of the song To change the tempo at a subsequent measure create a new tempo map at each location where you want the tempo to change Up to 50 tempo maps can be created Example 1 Song with no tempo changes Tempo Map 1 120 BPM Example 2 Song with tempo changes occurring during the song Tempo Map 1 120 BPM Tempo Map 2 117 BPM Tempo Map 3 108 PBM cel Time Creating a Tempo Map 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display 2 Press YES 3 Press PARAMETER B gt gt several times until SYS Syn Tmap1 appears in the display 121 Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices 4 Tempo Map 1 the song s initial tempo is dis played The measure appearing in the display and its beat metronom
111. AUX A B FX2 L R DIGITAL OUT 1 REC bus DIGITAL OUT 2 Recorder Section Unlike DAT recorders which use tape digital disk recorders record perfor mances sounds on a disk as do MD recorders Music that is recorded on disk can be recalled and played back immediately no matter where it is located on the disk This is also obvious from the difference in speed at which you can move to the beginning of a song on a DAT recorder and on an MD recorder The ability to freely move to data regardless of the time or sequence at which it was recorded is known as random access In contrast having to move to data in the order of the time or sequence at which it was recorded is known as sequential access random access sequential access 28 Chapter 1 Before You Start VS 880EX Terminology With cassette tape recorders the amount of time you can record on a tape is pre determined by the length of that tape Moreover any unused portion of the tape is wasted available recording time le at Trackt gt i fa fa AH m Track RA Taks it 00h00m00s00 on30m00s00 Time In Case of Tape Recording using 30 minute tape In contrast with disk recording although available recording time is determined by the amount of disk space only the disk space used in recording is taken and beyond that has no affect on the disk s remaining free space Thus depending on how you use tracks and phrases the amoun
112. DE GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN AND YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol Qor coloured GREEN or GREEN AND YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED The product which is equipped with a THREE WIRE GROUNDING TYPE LINE PLUG must be grounded USING THE UNIT SAFELY USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About WARNING and Z CAUTION Notices About the Symbols Used for instructions intended to alert The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions the user to the risk of death or severe or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is Z WARNING injury should the unit be used determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly The s
113. E dial If you are unfamiliar with what is displayed on a screen or find you are having difficulty understanding a certain procedure press PLAY DISPLAY This allows you to return immediately to the screen that appears when the power is turned on Try whatever procedure you were working on from the beginning once more EDIT CONDITION PLAY SONG LOCATOR TRACK EFFECT SYSTEM DISPLAY Track Copy EFFECT1 tem Move 2 M Optimize Import Export CD Write CD Player CD DAT Backup e If an operation has been performed incorrectly or cannot be executed correctly an error message appears in the display When this occurs please refer to Error Messages Appendices p 9 and perform the specified measure e If even after you perform an operation using the pre scribed procedure the result differs from that stated in Quick Start or in the Owner s Manual please refer to Troubleshooting Appendices p 6 e If the above steps do not resolve your problem con tact t a nearby Roland Service Center or authorised Roland distributor Before You Finish Operations Song data that you recorded or edited will be lost if you simply turn the power off Thus you must exe cute the Shutdown procedure before turning the power off When you switch songs or change disks a message will ask you to confirm whether the song should be saved STORE Current p
114. ES and CD RW Erasing appears and the contents in the CD RW disc is erased 8 Continue appears and press NO 115 Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices This chapter describes the MIDI messages that can be handled by the VS 880EX and the operations that the VS 880EX can perform using MIDI messages For more detailed information about MIDI please refer to About MIDI Appendices p 4 Synchronizing with MIDI Sequencers The VS 880EX can be operated in synchronization with a MIDI sequencer Refer to the owner s manual for your sequencer in conjunction with this manual There are two main ways to accomplish synchroniza tion one is method using MTC MIDI time code and the other one is method using MIDI Clock with MIDI Clock further divided into two types Sync Track and Tempo Map either if which can be selected Use the method that is appropriate for your situation 2 MTC Appendices p 124 Using MTC MIDI time code p 116 Using the sync track p 119 Using the tempo map p 121 VS 880EX 1 Internal IDE hard disk HDP88 series Audio equipment to be connected to the MASTER jack or stereo headphones External MIDI sequencer or computer sequencer software such as Cakewalk Pro Audio MIDI cables When synchronizing the VS 880EX with a MIDI sequencer the device that sends or transmits MTC or MIDI Clock and acts as the reference device is referred to as the master Conversely the
115. ETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd 30 TR SndPan appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send pan 31 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd 32 Master Sel appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the bus MIX AUX FX1 FX2 REC that you wish to output from the MASTER jacks CONDITION MARKER TIME MEASURE BE 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 33 Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd 34 EQ Sel appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial CONDITION MARKER 8 s 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 35 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER e 36 Direct Out appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you do not wish to use Direct OUT select Off If you wish to output tracks 1 4 select 1 4 If you wish to output tracks 5 8 select 5 8 I 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 37 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt d 38 FX1 MstIns appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to insert effect 1 into the master out select On If not select Off If effe
116. Hold down SHIFT and press SONG END FF E Ee A C Ht mH Song Top Song End AON Oa fF WONM Storing a Time Location With the VS 880EX there are two ways you can mark and easily recall sections of a song that you want to record over or listen to repeatedly One is called the Locator function and the other one is referred to as the Marker function Use each method according to its intended function Locator Store locator or time locations to the LOCATOR 1 5 4 8 buttons on the top panel of the VS 880EX In conjunction with SHIFT you can register up to eight time locations and move immediately to a registered location simply by pressing a button There are four banks for each button providing you with up to 32 8 x 4 locators Marker Up to 1000 locate points 000 999 can be set in rapid succession in each song You can also store Auto Mix data p 143 and there is a sync track provided as well p 123 36 Chapter 2 Basic Operation Time locations are stored with the LOC buttons 01 5 4 8 on the top panel of the VS 880EX In con junction with SHIFT you can register up to eight time locations and move immediately to a registered location simply by pressing a button There are four banks for each button providing you with up to 32 8 x 4 locators The locators are also a useful and conve nient way to define sections of a song to be repeated in Loop Recording or for marking poin
117. ID CtrLocal appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial CtrLocal Control Local Switch When this is set to Off actual volume levels remain unchanged even when the faders on the top panel are moved fader movements have no effect Normally this is set to On At this time set the Control Local switch to On 8 Press PARAMETER gt SYS MID CtrType appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial CtrType Mixer Control Type This selects the type of MIDI messages that will be used when transmitting mixer settings to an external MIDI device or when MIDI messages from an exter nal MIDI device are used to control the mixer At this time set this to C C Off MIDI messages related to mixer operation are not transmitted or received C C The mixer is controlled using Control Change messages Excl The mixer is controlled using Exclusive mes sages 10 Follow the procedure as described in Synchronizing with MIDI Sequencers p 116 make the necessary settings in both the VS 880EX and the MIDI sequencer to synchronize the two machines In addition make sure to set the MIDI sequencer so that MIDI messages received at the MIDI In connector are not output from the MIDI OUT connector 182 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples 1 Prepare the VS 880EX s mixer settings faders pan etc and ready for playback the song 2 Put
118. IME VALUE dial TimeDispFmt Time Display Format Select one of the reference times REL ABS that appear in the display For now choose ABS REL The starting time of the song is displayed as 00h00m00s00f00 ABS The time displayed includes the addition of the offset time 5 Press PARAMETER gt J 6 Ofs appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Ofs Offset When the VS 880EX is running under the control of the MTC from an external MIDI device you can syn chronize the song s playback time and the MTC time The offset settings range varies depending on the MTC type selected for the current song 7 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition If your MIDI sequencer supports Song Position Pointer messages you can use the MIDI Clock to syn chronize operations There are two methods of syn chronization using the MIDI Clock one is using the sync track and the other one is using the tempo map Here is an explanation of how to control the MIDI sequencer from the VS 880EX using the sync track 119 Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices What is the Sync Track In addition to the tracks for recording audio signals the VS 880EX has a separate track for recording MIDI Clock signals This is called the syne track Unlike conventional multi track recorders it is not necessary to reserve one of the audio tracks for recording the sync signal To use the sync track first the MIDI clock
119. KER field blink If you wish to directly recall the time location of a specific measure make the MEASURE field blink Press NUMERICS The LOCATOR buttons will function as numeric keys to directly input a numerical value p 153 Input the desired value blinking Cursor MEASURE BEAT SYNC MODE SCENE 8 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER 5 Press ENTER YES The designated time location is recalled and you are returned to Play condition Recording Mixer Settings Auto Mix With the VS 880EX you can record the present status or condition of the mixer as a Scene Unlike with Scenes you can alternatively store information at spe cific times during playback to markers Referred to as Auto Mix this includes the mixer settings time based channel fader movements and other settings When during playback you reach a point where a marker is set the mixer settings automatically switch to those stored at the marker This is convenient when mixing with complicated settings that are difficult to repro duce manually The following mixer settings can be recorded in Auto Mix Items printed in bold are those that can be adjusted direct ly with the faders on the top panel You can record the time based movements of the faders by moving the faders during playback of the song INPUT TRACK Fader Pan FX1 Lev Effect 1 Send Level FX1 Pan Effect 1 Send Pan FX2 Lev Effect 2 Send Le
120. LINES Plata Libertatii 1 RO 4200 Cheorgheni TEL 066 164 609 RUSSIA Slami Music Company Sadojava Triumfalnaja st 16 103006 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 209 2193 SPAIN Roland Electronics de Espa a S A Calle Bolivia 239 08020 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 308 1000 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 08 702 0020 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Musitronic AG Gerberstrasse 5 CH 4410 Liestal SWITZERLAND TEL 061 921 1615 UKRAINE TIC TAC Mira Str 19 108 P O Box 180 295400 Munkachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 700139 MIDDLE EAST BAHRAIN Moon Stores Bab Al Bahrain Road P O Box 20077 State of BAHRAIN TEL 211 005 CYPRUS Radex Sound Equipment Ltd 17 Diagorou St P O Box 2046 Nicosia CYPRUS TEL 02 453 426 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Fa aliya Hashnya St Tel Aviv Yaho ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN AMMAN Trading Agency Prince Mohammed St P O Box 825 Amman 11118 JORDAN TEL 06 4641200 KUWAIT Easa Husain Al Yousifi P O Box 126 Safat 13002 KUWAIT TEL 5719499 LEBANON A Chahine amp Fils P O Box 16 5857 Gergi Zeidan St Chahine Building Achrafieh Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 335799 OMAN OHI Electronics amp Trading C
121. MID MIDIThr appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIDI Thru MIDI Thru Switch This selects the function of the MIDI OUT THRU con nector For now select Out Out The connector transmits MIDI messages from the VS 880EX Select this when you want to transmit metronome Note messages or mixer parameter settings control change messages or exclusive messages Thru MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN con nector will be retransmitted from the connector without change 6 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS Gen appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Gen Generator This selects the type of synchronization signal that will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector At this point select MIDICIk Off Synchronization signals are not transmitted MTC MIDI Time Code is transmitted MIDICIk MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map is transmitted SyncTr MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track is transmitted 10 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 11 Set your MIDI sequencer so that it can operate according to the MIDI Clock messages received from external devices and set it so that it can play back MIDI song data When playback begins on the VS 880EX the MIDI sequencer begins play back as well There may be times when you want to
122. OFF is dis played as 11 3 Use CURSOR gt to move the cursor to the effect block that you wish to turn on off 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If an effect block is turned off parameters related to that effect cannot be set 5 Use PARAMETER lt lt gt gt to access the parameter that you wish to adjust Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Check the effect Repeat the Steps 5 6 to create new effects sounds Press PARAMETER gt gt gt several times until FX1 Nam appears in the display 9 Assign a patch name Use CURSOR fl gt so that the character you wish to change is blink ing Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the desired character A name of up to 12 characters can be assigned 10 Save the effect If you wish to keep the effect set tings that you have modified you must save the settings either as a User Patch or as mixer settings in a Scene If you wish to use the effect settings in another song save them as a User Patch If you wish to use the effect settings in the currently selected song save them as a Scene Convenient Operations e You can hold down SHIFT and press EFFECT to alternate between the Effect Select page Effect Name page and Effect On Off page e In the Effect On Off page you can move direct ly to the setting page for the effect that is blink ing by pressing PARAMETER gt e In the Effect Setting page you can display the
123. OL f S e DIGITAL 7 8 GE Hoo HoT TRING COLD SLEEVE GND o KO B A AUX SEND OUT 2 IN2 i 910 6 FOOT SWITCH Jack An optional foot switch such as the DP 2 or the BOSS FS 5U can be connected here when you want to con trol recorder operations mark point settings and punch in out operations and so on with a foot switch With the factory settings a foot switch is set to start and stop the recorder 7 PHONES Jack An optional set of headphones can be connected here The PHONES jack outputs the same sound as the MONITOR jack 8 MASTER Jacks L R 9 AUX SEND Jack A 10 AUX SEND Jack B These are output jacks for analog audio signals RCA phono type With the factory settings all signals are output from the MASTER OUT jacks and there is no output from the AUX A and B SEND jacks The output is deter mined by the block settings of the mixer s master sec tion and the settings of each channel 11 INPUT Jacks 1 6 These are input jacks for analog audio signals These are balanced phone jacks the input sensitivity of each jack is adjusted by the INPUT knobs on the top panel 20 Chapter 1 Before You Start VS 880EX Terminology This chapter explains basic concepts internal struc ture and basic operation that you will need to know in order to operate the VS 880EX Please read this
124. Output The VS 880EX features four analog output jacks MAS TER jacks L R AUX jacksL R and two digital con nectors DIGITAL OUT1 DIGITAL OUT2 each of which can have various signals assigned to it Set the output for each output jacks or connectors using the following procedure Hold down SHIFT and press EDIT FADER 2 Press PARAMETER a a gt gt to let Master Sel appears in the display 3 Determine what is to be output from the MASTER jacks by rotate the TIME VALUE dial Master Select In the example MIX CONDITION MARKER TIME ey 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER Master Sel Master Select This selects what sounds are heard through the MAS TER jacks MIX The sounds assigned to the MIX bus AUX The sounds assigned to the AUX bus FX1 The sounds assigned to the FX1 EFFECT bus FX2 The sounds assigned to the FX2 EFFECT bus REC All sounds assigned to the RECORDING bus 4 Press PARAMETER gt 158 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions 5 MasterLevel appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the volume of the sound that is output from the MASTER jacks This value is linked with master fader on the top panel Press PARAMETER BP Master Bal appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the left right balance of the sound that is output from the MASTER jacks 8 Press PLAY DISPLAY R
125. PARAMETER 4H 6 TR Link is the displayed track appears in the display Specify the tracks for which you will turn Channel Link ON Press the STATUS button of the tracks for which you wish to turn Channel Link ON and rotate the TIME VALUE dial CONDITION MARKER MEASURE BEAT SYNC Mi SCENE a AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 7 Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER a 77 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings 8 IN Link is the displayed input appears 12 IN Pan appears in the display Adjust the in the display Specify the inputs for which you pan of the source Press the SELECT CH EDIT will turn Channel Link ON Press the SELECT button for the input whose pan you wish to CH EDIT button of the inputs for which you adjust and use the TIME VALUE dial You can wish to turn Channel Link ON and rotate the also use the pan knobs on the top panel to adjust TIME VALUE dial the pan When Channel Link is on adjust the Offset Balance of the sources p 151 61 71 3 ps 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 9 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the wie gel previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt a INPUTTRACK AL MASTER 10 IN to appears in the display Specify which source is to be recorded on each track First press 13 Press PARAMETER B You can
126. Partition 2 100MB Each partition on the VS 880EX s disk drive is treated as an independent drive with each partition automati cally given a partition number 0 3 When a single hard disk has multiple partitions you can specify which partition of which drive will be used This disk drive partition currently used is referred to as the cur rent drive 21 Chapter 1 Before You Start VS 880EX Terminology Specify the Disk Which will be Used for Recording Playback Drive Select 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Drive Select appears in the display 2 Press YES 3 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the desired disk drive The internal hard disk is shown as IDE and external disk drives are shown as SC0 SC7 the number is the SCSI ID number The number following each disk drive name is the partition number For example if you wish to select internal hard disk partition 1 you would select IDE 1 4 Press YES A confirmation message appears on the screen 5 Press YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 6 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 7 After you have switched the current drive return to Play condition If you wish to use hard disks or song data on both the VS 880EX and the VS 880 840 1680 because of factors such as differ
127. Press YES Scanning CD R appears in the display The VS 880EX is checking the SCSI ID of the connected CD RW drive and displays the next ID number for a set time SNG Write Finalize then appears in the dis play 4 Press YES 5 Store the song to the CD R disc by following pro cedure as described in Writing Songs to CD R Discs p 109 Saving Songs to CD RW Discs CD R Backup You can save song data stored on the VS 880EX s hard disk to CD RW discs This procedure is called backup Conversely the process of loading backed up song data onto the internal hard disk is referred to as recover Besides all V track performance data backed up data also includes Locator Marker and Scene set tings made in the songs In CD R backup the song data is converted into a data format specifically for saving This means that it will not be possible to directly play back the song data If you wish to play back song data copied in archive for mat you will need to reload the backed up data into the current drive using the appropriate procedure Furthermore when copying a song that does not fit on a single disc it is copied onto multiple discs according to the free space on the discs e It is impossible to save any additional song data to the CD RW discs or the CD R discs that already have songs backed up on them When you back up onto the CD RW discs existing contents should be totally erased before the new c
128. R e 14 Use EFFECT1 appears in the display If you 24 TR SndLev appears in the display Use the wish to use effect 1 press YES and proceed to TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send level If in step 15 If you do not wish to use effect 1 press step 17 you selected either Ins InsL InsR NO and proceed to step 29 or InsS the sound already processed by the effect will be sent to the effect bus It will not be 15 The effect patch will be displayed Use the P A Lees re input to effect 1 TIME VALUE dial to select the effect patch that you wish to use 25 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the 16 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the promious sereen by Presse PARAMETER paia previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd 26 TR SndPan appears in the display Use the 17 TR FX1 Ins appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send pan TIME VALUE dial If you wish to insert effect 1 27 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the select either Ins InsL InsR or InsS and previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt d proceed to step 18 If you wish to use effect 1 ina send return configuration select Off and pro ceed to step 21 28 REC FX1 appears in the display If you wish to record the effect which you are using in a send return configuration press the STATUS button for the recor
129. R SCENE 3 1 2 4 5 START FROM END TO MARKE PREVIOUS NEXT i D TAP LOOP AUTO PUNCH NUMERICS LJ gJ Lol HO Y i GRADAT P SHOT 6 Making Fine Adjustments to the Punch In Segment 1 Press LOCATOR several times until LOC APin appears in the display CONDITION MARKER TIME 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 2 The punch in time will be displayed If no punch in time has been specified the display will indi cate h m s f Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the time 3 Press PARAMETER P LOC APOt appears in the display 4 The punch out time will be displayed If no punch out time has been specified the display will indicate h m s f Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the time 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Recording Procedure 1 Hold down REC and press the STATUS button for the track you wish to re record 2 Press ZERO to return to the beginning of the song 3 Press PLAY to begin playback of the song At this point the performance that has already been recorded on the track or tracks that you want to re record is monitored 4 Press the STATUS buttons again The STATUS indicator alternately blinks red and orange Now confirm that you can hear source you want recorded to the track com
130. R TAP lt a 0 1 2 3 4 Yy v M v v i a Time Before deleting a Marker 0 1 2 3 y y y y Time After deleting a Marker To Delete All Markers Simultaneously 1 Hold down SHIFT and CLEAR and TAP at the same time 2 Clear ALLMarker appears in the display If you want to delete the markers press YES If you want to cancel the procedure the press NO SHIFT CLEAR TAP Before deleting a Marker IIS p Time After deleting a Marker 39 Chapter 3 Mult Track Recording This chapter explains the operations necessary for recording with the VS 880EX Try out each operation as you read these instructions Recording e VS 880EX 1 e Internal IDE hard disk e Audio equipment for the Master Out signal or stereo headphones e Recording source electric guitar synthesizer CD player etc or microphone Recording cannot take place while a demo song is selected This is because the contents of the demo songs are protected from being changed or over written p 64 Use the following procedure to prepare a new song This process is analogous to exchanging cassettes on a multi track tape recorder 1 Press SONG several times until SNG Song New appears in the display Press YES SNG SampleRate appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to select a sample rate Sample Rate
131. Roland WS B8g8oEx DIGITAL STUDIO WORKSTATION OWNER S MANUAL oumu scsi POWER INPUT PHONES 8 00090 a 0 gt y pS SELECTA Pm EZ EDIT CONDITION Ga ROUTING SONG JLOCATOR TRACK EFFECT SYSTEM DISPLAY AAN pe TTET oloooooo oo me Cee 6 6d Ce ee E E Ea FADER STATUS con lt ul m 0 O m X ej Z m A UN gt Z gt re LOCATOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MASTER a is me e z Loc 3 oc CLEAR SCENE Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled IMPOR TANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS p 2 USING THE UNIT SAFELY p 3 4 and IMPORTANT NOTES p 5 These sections provide i
132. Rotate the TIME VALUE dial FX1 InsSend Effect 1Insert Send Level This adjusts the level of the signal 0 127 sent to the Insert effect 12 Press PARAMETER FX1 InsRtn appears in the display 13 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial FX1 InsRin Effect 1 Insert Return Level This adjusts the level of the signal 0 127 returned from the Insert effect 14 Press PARAMETER A d several times until MIX Pan appears in the display 15 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIX Pan This adjusts the pan setting L63 0 R63 of the signal sent to the MIX bus and the RECORDING bus For now select L63 16 Press the channel 2 CH EDIT SELECT 17 Repeat the Steps 7 15 to make the settings for Channel 2 as same as those for Channel 1 However select InsertR and R63 for Steps 9 and 15 respectively 53 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording 54 18 Now the setup is completed In this case the signal flow will be as the fol lows EQ 2band 3band Channel 1 Channel 2 EQ 2band 3band MIX bus STATUS MASTER L R TRACK ANOAARWN 1 1 tz 1 1 1 1 1 Track 1 2 19 Hold down REC and press the Track 1 and 2 STATUS buttons The STATUS indicator blinks red 20 Hold down the Track 1 STATUS button and channel 1 SELECT buttons 21 Hold down the Track 2 STATUS button and channel 2 SELECT buttons 22 Record and check
133. Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Gen Generator This selects the MIDI Clock on which the Metronome will be based Select MIDIclk if you wish to use the Tempo Map and SyncTr if you are going to use Sync Track Off The MIDI Clock is not transmitted MTC MIDI Time Code is transmitted the metronome does not sound MIDIclk The Tempo Map MIDI Clock is transmitted SyncTr The Sync Track MIDI Clock is transmitted 5 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS MetroOUT appears in the display 8 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MetroOUT Metronome Out This selects how the metronome is output For now select INT Selecting Off prevents you from making any set tings related to the Metronome Off The metronome sound is not output INT The metronome sound is output from the MONITOR jacks MIDI The metronome signal is transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector 9 Press PARAMETER PB MetroLevel appears in the display 10 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MetroLevel Metronome Level This adjusts the volume level 0 127 of the metronome sound 11 Press PARAMETER gt gt MetroMd appears in the display 12 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MetroMd Metronome Mode This is for selecting when the metronome sound is played Rec Only The metronome sounds only during recordi
134. Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Select the copy destination disk drive The internal hard disk will be shown as IDE and external disk drives will be shown as SCO SC7 The number following each disk drive indicates the partition number For example if you wish to copy to a Zip disk select SC5 0 9 Press YES A message asking if you want to continue appears in the display 10 If ALL is specified as the target in step 6 a con firmation message will ask you whether you want to initialize the copy destination disk drive If you wish to initialize the copy destination disk drive and copy the song data press YES In this case all song data that had been saved on the copy des tination disk drive will be lost If you wish to copy without initializing press NO 11 Press YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 12 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 13 When the Playable Copy procedure is finished return to Play condition If Disk Memory Full Appears in the Display This indicates that the destination disk has insuffi cient free space or that the number of songs on the disk has exceeded the maximum number 200 songs that can be stored on the disk and that the copy procedure was canceled However you can still use the song data copied up to that point
135. S 880EX restarts automatically 101 Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive Saving Performance Data to a Zip Drive Song Copy You can save song data created on the VS 880EX to an external disk This is a convenient way to have song data backed up in the event of possible disk drive problems or to save data when there is little free disk space Furthermore since Zip disks are easy to handle and manage you can use them when sharing song data with friends or when you have a VS 880EX both in the studio and at home We recommend keeping copies of important song data on multiple disks Incorrectly conducting the Song Copy procedure may result in loss of data Roland Corporation assumes no lia bility concerning such loss of data Furthermore Roland does not warrant any copied data regardless of the perfor mance or condition of the Zip Drive Backing Up Song Data with a CD R Drive or DAT Recorder You can use a CD R drive or DAT recorder to back up song data from the VS 880EX Song data backed up onto a CD R disc cannot be overwrit ten Thus this method is appropriate for backing up completely finished songs or other such data Song data backed up on DAT tapes can be over written any number of times but considering the time required for saving data and because of reli ability issues it is more convenient to back up data using a Zip drive Roland recommends back ing up data Song Copy with a Zip drive
136. SOUNGE ad 22 Status A a A AS 35 126 Step COLE eenean sa aa iaeaea E esiosa pak seaconatarselaveageee dados bas 74 A arae ne AE e la ai 152 SUD frame nean anigi ANS 36 SULfaCe SCAN princi 101 SINO SOULCE tino 174 176 Syne ta tirada 119 154 1 TOG ein Pie ata cele aah hut eee 112 Tap marker function ccconoconononnnnnnnnnnncnnnennrararannananoso 36 38 Templates seis iia a a aa anaaaasnts 74 Tempo Map nes Sere e a aa 121 154 A EEE E AE 22 Track bOUNCINY isese 60 108 Track COPY iii Maines 89 LAA de thas A a is 94 PACK AA A 95 Track exchange niiet eead EE 92 Trackinsert css Sras s eer Matec ees cea 93 188 Index MEMO Information When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below AFRICA EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office P O Box 2904 El Horrieh Heliopolos Cairo EGYPT TEL 02 4185531 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules MermanZL Chaudron BP79 97491 Ste Clotilde REUNION TEL 28 29 16 SOUTH AFRICA That Other Music Shop PTY Ltd 11 Melle Street Cnr Melle and Juta Street Braamfontein 2001 Republic of SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 403 4105 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd 17 Werdmuller Centre Claremont 7700 Republic of SOUTH AFRICA P O Box 23032 Claremont Cape Town SOUTH AFRICA 7735 TEL 021 64 4030 ASIA CHINA Beijing Xinghai Musical Instruments Co Ltd 6 Huangmuchang Chao Yang Distri
137. Select a sample rate 32 kHz 44 1 kHz or 48 0 kHz When you want to use a digital connection to a digital audio device much the sample rate to that of the con nected device Furthermore when making an origi nal audio CD select 44 1 kHz You cannot change the sample rate after the song is recorded In addition you cannot mix different sample rates in the same song 4 Press PARAMETER 4 4 5 Record Mode appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to select a recording mode Record Mode Recording Mode Select the sound s quality and time based on the recorded contents Once a song is recorded these set tings cannot be changed MAS Mastering With this setting you can get the high quality sounds compatible to that s quality of CD player or DAT recorder However a song for which this mode is selected will function as a 6 track recorder 1 6 This mode is appropriate when recording edited two chan nel stereo songs MT1 Multi Track 1 While maintaining high quality sound recording time is approximately twice that available in Mastering mode This mode is good when doing a lot of track bouncing MT2 Multi Track 2 While maintaining high quality sound recording time is longer than that available in Multi Track 1 mode This mode is good for normal operations LIV Live Recording time is longer than with Multi Track 2 mode This mode is appropriate when your hard disk lacks muc
138. SongList Location where the saved songs are managed InitSong001 Each song in actual use the song name is displayed InitSong002 InitSong 200 ClusterInfo Cluster information Total Number of clusters on the entire disk Defect Number of clusters tagged as unusable memory Used Number of clusters currently being used Free Number of clusters currently not being used X LinkErr Number of cross linked clusters LooseArea Number of clusters whose links are lost lllegalDIR Number of directories with incorrect content ReadError Number of read errors detected by this operation Clusters These are the smallest unit of memory that the VS 880EX uses to manage data on a disk drive The smallest physical units on a disk drive are called either sectors or blocks and depending on the device the size that is handled can be selected For example the VS 880EX is designed to use disks with 512 bytes sector When the VS 880EX manages song data it handles 64 sectors as a sin gle unit cluster This means that 512 bytes x 64 sectors 32768 bytes 32 kilobytes is one cluster Cross Link This is an error in which a cluster is detected as being included in two or more songs In such a case a completely different song may be heard in the middle of a song Such an error condition is referred to as a cross link 161 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions Loose Areas An erro
139. T TRACK AUX MASTER When System Condition is Selected In some cases when System condition is selected the parameters themselves will be displayed directly rather than the System menu This allows you to immediately select the parameter which was last modified If you wish to view the System menu press SYSTEM once again 34 Chapter 2 Basic Operation Use PARAMETER 4H gt gt to access the setting parameter that you wish to modify If two or more settings are displayed simultaneously use CURSOR lt gt to move the cursor Cursor location display blinking CONDITION MARKER TIME EN s8l 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER Use the TIME VALUE dial for this operation Rotating the dial counterclockwise decreases the val ues rotating clockwise increases them Although usu ally increases and decreases in values are in single unit steps by holding down SHIFT while rotating the TIME VALUE dial depending on the parameter you can make values increase or decrease ten times or one tenth the normal rate TIME VALUE decrease increase After changing the value to create the new song select the different song or otherwise set or execute the specified task or operation press YES A confir mation message will appear in the display When the message appears press YES If you want to cancel the operation then press NO Switching
140. To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections Once the connections have been completed turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunc tion and or damage to speakers and other devices Always make sure to have the volume level turned down before switching on power Even with the volume all the way down you may still hear some sound when the power is switched on but this is normal and does not indicate a malfunction SCSI THE FCC RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT J THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL T ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED JSE UNDESIRED OPERATION 99 4 13 dey9 Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive Turn on the power of the Zip drive Turn on the power of the VS 880EX with the POWER switch on the rear panel 3 Turn on the power of connected audio equip ments 4 Raise the volume of the audio devices to appro priate levels For more detailed information regarding Zip drive con nections including the necessary settings please refer to About SCSI Appendices p 5 Initializing the Disk Drive Initialize A new disk just purchased at computer store or a disk that was used by another device cannot be used on the VS 880EX as is You must initialize the disk so that
141. Track Conditions The condition for each track switches each time the STATUS button is pressed You can check the condi tion by looking at the button indicators SOURCE orange Allows you to monitor the input source or track assigned to each channel REC blinking red Specifies what is recorded to each track In playback tracks are monitored You can directly specify what is to be recorded by pressing the STATUS button while holding down REC REC blinking red and orange Specifies what is recorded to each track In playback sources are monitored During playback once again press the STATUS button whose STATUS indicator is blinking red PLAY green Plays back each track You can directly specify what is to be played back by pressing the STATUS button while holding down STOP OFF darkness The track is muted silent The VS 880EX can record up to eight tracks simultane ously 35 Chapter 2 Basic Operation Changing the Current Time The current playback time in the display is shown in SMPTE time code The current measure beat and Marker number are also displayed Use the following procedure to change the current playback time 9 SMPTE Time Code Appendices p 124 e To move in one frame units rotate the TIME VALUE dial e To move in ten frame units hold down SHIFT and rotate the TIME VALUE dial e To move in units of approximately 1 10 frame first press CURSOR W un
142. Understanding Displays or Operations enccoccoconinononnnnrnrnnninnnnnnnos 32 Before You Finish Operations c ccccccceeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeesaeeeseaeeeseeeeesnaeetsaes 32 Saving the Performance to Disk Song Store ocococononenonoononcncnncnrnrnennncanannrnanararnnnnnnrnranos 32 Turning Off the Power ccccccesessssesesessesseseececesescsesnanssesesesnesesescecesssessseananeieseseeeseseeeeeeney 33 ROS tar tit 2 50554 2c E coach opio oxiaIipiDdnonido E Mio sonece clans T he Sate Sous cade 33 Basic Operations on the VS 880EX cccccceceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeesaaeeseaeeeseueeeetaeeteaes 34 Display Each of the Condition Menus ccccccccsesessesesesseseneseececesescsneneneneseseeneeneseeeenes 34 Selecting Pages Contained in Functions and Settings o cncncncnconononicinaninanananinananononononos 34 Select the Setting You Want to Change eococeccncncncnnnnonennnnoconnnnncnnarnnnnnnnanananonnanararannnnnrarans 35 Change the Settings Val esinn iesene nt i oen ap reee E E EEEE o e E ors E GAEE 35 Execute the Operations treet rs enis ses aiseee deck vascraseabacnets adhe saabesacaeteantshacecuevaeats 35 Switching Track Conditions cceccceeeeceeceee cesses conocio nnnnn anno cnn rca ranma 35 AER TO 36 Moving in Frame Units ooocococodononononononononononrncnnncnnanarncanncnn anar cnnncnn aran cn nn cnn anar cananea 36 Moving in Measure Beat Units ooooncncncncononononocananonononononanonononononononononon anar ono
143. VALUE dial MeasureDsp Use this to select whether or not the measure and beat appear in the graphic display Always The measure and beat are constantly dis played Auto The measure and beat are not displayed when the metronome is not in use 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 166 Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions On the VS 880EX function of STATUS button differs by it is hit and released quickly or it is held for longer seconds You can specify the length of this time that the STATUS button must be held down in order to change it s function Function When Pressed Changes the track status Function When Held Down Confirms the channel ass igned to the track 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYSTEM PRM appears in the display Press YES 3 Press PARAMETER several times until SwitchTime appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial SwitchTime Switching Time This designates the time the buttons must be held down 0 3 2 0 seconds in order to change functions 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition When connecting SCSI devices with the VS 880EX the SCSI ID number of each device must be set so that none of the devices have the same ID number The VS 880EX s SCSI ID number is set to 7 at the factory When connecting the VS 880EX to other SCSI devices for example Zip drives or CD R drives be sure t
144. VS 880EX s MASTER jacks to the input jacks of your cassette recorder 2 Adjust the recording levels for the cassette recorder Adjust the output volume with the VS 880EX s master fader making it as high as possi ble without causing any input overload on the recorder Set the recording levels on the cassette recorder as high as possible before causing distor tion with the level meter moving a lot 3 Press ZERO on the VS 880EX Put the cassette recorder in record mode 5 Press PLAY on the VS 880EX to begin playback of the song If you want to fade in or out use the VS 880EX s mas ter fader for this 6 When you have finished recording stop the cas sette recorder Press STOP on the VS 880EX Listen to the recorded result Rewind the tape and play back the recording The VS 880EX features two types of digital out con nectors coaxial and optical either of which is ready to use At the factory settings these connectors are set to output the same sound as the MASTER jacks 1 Connect the digital input connector of your digital recorder with the VS 880EX s DIGITAL OUT con nector 2 Set your digital recorder to enable it to record dig ital signals Match the recorder s sample rate to that of song recorded on the VS 880EX normally at 44 1 kHz Many digital recorders can deter mine the sample rate automatically Match the rates manually only when special settings are nec essary There are some
145. X Bus Signals assigned to the MIX bus are sent to the MASTER jacks for monitoring It has two channels L and R and can take output signals from the input mixer track mixer and effects Return Signals assigned to the MIX bus cannot be rout ed to the RECORDING bus EFFECT Bus Signals assigned to the EFFECT bus are sent to the effect to apply effects added to them It has two channels FX1 FX2 and can process signals from the input mixer and the track mixer Signals assigned to the RECORDING bus as well as the MIX bus can also be routed to the EFFECT bus AUX Bus Signals assigned to the AUX bus are routed to the AUX SEND jacks to allow addition mixes for monitoring This bus features two channels AUX A AUX B and can take signals from the input mixer and the track mixer Signals assigned to the RECORDING bus as well as the MIX bus can also be routed to the AUX bus This is convenient if for example you want to connect an external effects device or when you want an addition output separate from that of the MASTER Out jacks individual out 25 Chapter 1 Before You Start VS 880EX Terminology Input mixer is placed before the recorder section and correspond to the external input sources INPUT 1 6 DIGITAL IN L R Input Mixer Channel 1 6 DIGITAL L R h INPUT 1 EQ1 Pant FAM MIX L R MASTER nurs A o REC 2 Recorder pura REC 3 Recorder nurs p gt nc neure a mu REC 6 Recorder Dam
146. X and Cakewalk are synchronized Make the settings to Cakewalk as shown below For more detailed informa tion please refer to your Cakewalk owner s manual Settings Audio Options Advanced SMPTE MTC Sync High Quality If your computer does not feature adequate performance even with the above set tings you may not be able to get stable digital audio output meaning the sound will suffer when digital connections are used Additionally Cakewalk Pro Audio 5 0 and Cakewalk Professional 5 0 do not feature the above mentioned settings We recom mend upgrading to Version 6 0 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the dis play 5 Press YES 6 Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS MasterClk appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial 179 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples Master Clock This is used to select the reference clock for the VS 880EX operations Here set this to DIGIN1 or DIGIN2 DIGIN1 Based on the digital signal received at the DIGITAL IN connector coaxial INT Based on the VS 880EX s internal clock DIGIN2 Based on the digital signal received at the DIGITAL IN connector optical 8 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 9 Make the settings for the VS 880EX by following the procedure as described in Recording Digital Signals p 55 Under thi
147. YES Repeat Steps 10 14 Press NO to return to the condi tion at Step 2 You cannot playback CD RW discs or CD R discs that have just had written songs to them with regular com mercial CD players To listen to songs that have been just written to a disc in order to check them carry out the following operation Other commercially available CD software can also be played using the CD player function You can listen to the contents of the disc through the VS 880EX s MONITOR jacks or the PHONES jack You cannot output the contents through the CD R drive s PHONES jack or AUDIO OUT jacks 1 Insert the CD R disc or commercial CD software onto the CD RW drive 2 Press SONG until SNG CD Player appears in the display 3 Press YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 4 If you want to store the current song press YES if not press NO Scanning CD RW appears in the display The VS 880EX scans for the SCSI ID of the connected CD RW drive When it finds it the ID number is displayed for a few moments The CD R disc information is then displayed Total number of songs on the disc 9 Number of currently playing song 1 Play time REMAINING TIME 6 m s 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER Disc type In the example CD R disc If Please Insert Disc Appears in the Display There is no disc in the CD RW drive Insert a com
148. ach other and will be confusing unless their differences are clarified Source A signal which is input to the mixer sec tion or recorded in the recorder section On the VS 880EX this term refers in par ticular to the signals of the analog input jacks 1 6 and the digital in connector Track A signal that is being input to or output from the recorder section It also refers to the location of a signal that is being recorded onto or played back from the hard disk Channel A signal that is being input to or output from the mixer section This term refers in particular to the faders and buttons of the mixer section on the top panel Chapter 1 Before You Start VS 880EX Terminology The smallest unit of memory used by the VS 880EX to store recorded results on disk is called an event A newly created song is provided approximately 12 800 events For each track one recording pass uses two events Operations such as punch in out or track copy also use up events The number of events that are used up will fluctuate in a complex way For example auto mix p 142 uses up 5 events for each Marker Even when your disk has ample free space one song can use up all the available events in which case no more data could be recorded to the song Remaining number of Events can be saved with the following procedures Please try the most appropriate one with your situation O Execute Song Store p 32 Please Execute Song Store
149. ack the song and verify that the effect is being applied Now we will see how to add affects to the source at the INPUT 1 jack and then record the direct sound and the sound with effects to Track 1 This is convenient when you want to record vocals with reverb Select an Effect 1 Press EFFECT several times until EFFECT 1 PRM appears in the dis play 2 Press YES The number and name of the currently selected effect will be displayed and you can select the desired effect Effect Number Effect Name 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 3 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the effect you wish to use Here select A00 RV LargeHall 4 After selecting the effect press YES 51 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording Specify the Input to Which the Effect is to be Applied 5 Press FADER EDIT several times to let the FADER indicator light orange Press the channel 1 CH EDIT SELECT 7 Hold down SHIFT and press the channel 7 EFFECT 1 CH EDIT EFFECT1 appears in the display 8 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial EFFECT1 Effect 1 Send Select Switch This sets how the signal is sent to the EFFECT 1 bus Here select PstFade post fader to apply reverb to the sound after the output of the channel fader Off The signal is not sent PreFade The signal before passing through the channel fader is sent PstFade The signalafter passing through the chan
150. al 0 127 returned from the Insert effect Set the initial value to 100 8 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 9 You can insert FX2 in the same way In this case perform step 1 so that MST FX2 INS Sw is displayed When adding the sound with effect to the direct sound such as is done with reverb or delay use the EFFECT bus With some effects while you can have output of both the direct sound and effect sound it s usually better to have the effect sound output separately The direct sound and effect sound are adjusted with each channel fader The present signal flow is shown below 2band 3band MIX bus or REC bus MIX bus or REC bus MIX bus or REC bus AUX bus 68 Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects Settings for Each Channel 1 Press CH EDIT SELECT for the channel to which you want to apply the effect The CH EDIT indicator lights 2 Hold down SHIFT and press the channel 7 EFFECT 1 CH EDIT The upper line of the display will indicate EFFECT 1 and you can make settings for effect 1 3 Select how the effect will be connected Rotate the TIME VALUE dial CONDITION MARKER 3 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER EFFECT 1 Effect 1 Send Select Switch This selects the how the signal is sent to the EFFECT 1 bus send Off The signal is not sent PreFade The sound before passing through the channel fader is sent
151. al when you compress or expand the play back time the pitch changes in proportion to the amount of compression or expansion For example if the playback time is shortened the pitch of the sound played back then rises On the VS 880EX you can select whether the playback pitch changes in accor dance with the ratio of compression or expansion or whether the original playback pitch is preserved Time Compression Expansion creates new performance data with a different playback time For this reason it cannot be executed if there is not sufficient space on the current drive It is not possible to make Track Compression Expansion settings when the elapsed time from the Start Point to the End Point or from the Start Point to the To Point is less than 0 5 seconds Do not compress data to a period of 0 5 seconds or shorter If it is compressed to 0 5 seconds or less the sound will not be played 1 Press TRACK several times until TRK Time Comp Exp appears in the display 2 Press YES Press CURSOR e several times until TRK CompExpTr appears in the display 4 Press STATUS for the track on which you want to compress or expand The STATUS indicator will light red 5 You can use the TIME VALUE dial to specify the V track that you wish to compress or expand For example 1 1 means V track 1 of track 1 1 means all V tracks of track 1 and means all V tracks of
152. al times until YS Sync Tr Cnv appears in the display Press YES 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial 124 Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices CV Convert Here you can select how the sync track tempo map will be created For this example select CV3 CV1 Tap S Tr Create the sync track from mark points CV2 Tap T Map Create the tempo map from mark points CV3 S Tr T Map Create the tempo map from the sync track CV4 Time gt S Tr Automatically create the sync track 6 Press PARAMETER gt Sync Trk Beat appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Sync Trk Beat Sync Track Beat Specify the number of beats 1 1 8 1 1 2 8 2 1 4 8 4 1 8 8 8 per measure in the MIDI clock that is recorded in the sync track 8 Press YES 9 A confirmation message asking if you want to save the changes to the tempo map appears in the display If you want to save the changes press YES If you wish to cancel then press NO 10 When the tempo map has been completed Complete appears in the display 11 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Creating a Sync Track Automatically You can automatically create a sync track by specify ing the start and end times of the song and the num ber of measures that it contains This is convenient when you already know the length of the song such as with commercials 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS
153. am Change messages sent by the external MIDI controller During Playback of a Song Scenes cannot be switched during playback of a song Because of this the VS 880EX stops momen tarily if it receives a program change message during playback instructing it to change scenes While it is stopped the scene is switched and then playback resumes Furthermore during recording only effect pro gram change messages can be received Scenes cannot be switched during recording 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS MIDI PRM appears in the display Press YES 3 Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS MID P C Scne appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial P C Scene Program Change Scene With this set to On the scene is changed when pro gram change messages are received For now select On 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Use MIDI channel 15 for switching scenes The rela tionship between the program change number received by the VS 880EX and the Scene Number it switches to is shown below Program Number Scene Number 1 8 1 8 For more detailed information please refer to MIDI Implementation Appendices p 74 You can use MIDI control change messages transmit ted from an external MIDI controller to switch effects 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS MIDI PRM appears in the display Press YES 3 P
154. an ual Seiting Clock MTC receives MTC Setting MIDI Out Check Transmit MMC sends MMC Setting Time Format MTC from the VS 880EX here set 30 30 Frame Drop in Cakewalk corresponds to 29D on the VS 880EX Under this condition when playback is begun with Cakewalk MMC is transmitted to the VS 880EX and upon receiving the MMC the VS 880EX also begins playback During playback MTC is sent from the VS 880EX to Cakewalk thus synchroniz ing operations 175 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples Digital Connections Cannot Be Used When Sync Source is set to EXT the VS 880EX operates according to the Clock signal MTC transmitted by the connected MIDI device At such times if you also set the master Clock to DIGIN1 or DIGIN2 the VS 880EX then also attempts to operate according to the Clock digital signal from the exter nal digital device This means the internal clock becomes mismatched Thus in the present example the slave VS 880EX B cannot record the digital signals transmitted by the master VS 880EX A J DIGITAL OUT 0000002 0 AN JO00OC O l o o o e o o elo a a gt ololololo o uy ce Os a DY ems oka GAG I ODoboooonoole e EA DOOCDO0OODOU Soe eo Ap an
155. an rn nana carac cnn ran rana 70 Creating New Effects SOUNS c oonccccnoccconoccccnoccnononcnconcccnnnnnnn nan cn ran rn nan nn cnn ranan ranma 71 When Saving to User Patches ooonconicincncnnonenenenncnnnnennnrnronnnnnnnnnnnenrnoraranannnnn coronar no TREE 72 When Storing to a SCeme inasi ina aire case ladaeseuee ekeen EEEn EEEa Saeba neie 72 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings coooccoccnocnnoconennncnnacnnannnas 73 Recording the Current Condition of the Mixer Scene mcciccnccconnnonicinananonanicinaninononononos 73 Making Mixer Settings Automatically EZ Routing cooonnccinnncnnnccconncconanacccnarnnnnnacanonno 74 Recalling Recording Settings Recording Template coconicincococononcninnonnnannnrnrnnenianaranos 75 Recalling Track Bouncing Settings Bouncing Template occococonincnnnncnonennnnrnnnenicnrnnnos 75 Recalling Mixdown Settings Mixdown Template cococccicincoconononennncnnanenernrarenicnrnnanos 76 Storing Recording Settings Recording Step Edit cooncocininincncnnonenennnnnannonanernrannenicnnananos 77 Storing Track Bouncing Settings Bouncing Step Edit oc cee e eens 81 Storing Mixdown Settings Mixdown Step Edit cocccncococininannnnnnonncnncannonennarnnnnnnnnrnranos 84 Saving the Current Routing User Routing 0 0 ce ceneneseseseeneneeseeeeeeseseenenenes 87 Recalling User Routing siare eneon oaa e Eo A AE AEE A EEEE EEAS 87 Deleting User ROUDES iio 87 CONTENTS Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance Track Editing 8
156. ananarnanararanannnraranas 166 Adjusting the Button Sensitivity eoccnocininoncononnnnconcnenennecarannnnnnnrorornnnnnananarnenoraranannnnnraros 167 Changing the VS 880EX s SCSI ID Number eoccococinoninnnnininnaninincncanananononononnnocnnananininnanos 167 When There Is No Hard Disk Installed o onooniconicnncnnnnonnnnnnnnonnoconnnnncnnrncnonncnnnncnnon 167 Changing at the Level at Which the Peak Indicator Lights ocoononnmomnmmmmmm 168 Overall Settings for Playback and Recording ooccccnicccnnnnicinncconocnnnnnoncccnnccan narnia 168 Constantly Monitoring the Input Source cocccincncnconenenennnnnnnnnnnnnroronnnnncannnarnnrorarnnannnnnraras 168 Stopping Automatically ocurran rita ride 168 If Noise Between Segments is Obtrusive comcoccncncnconenenennnnnnnnnnnnrnronnonncnnanannrrararanannnnnraras 169 Resetting Mixer and System Settings to Their Original State ooonncinnncnnnnnnnnncccn 169 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples 170 Synchronizing the Operations of Two VS 880EX Units oooconcccnnnnicnnncccccoccnnncnncnancnns 170 Settings for the Master VS 880EX ccccccsceescsssnenseseseenesesescecesesesssnanenesesesneneneeeeeeees 170 Settings for the Slave VS 880EX orero ear a e e EE EEEE e 172 Synchronizing with Cakewalk Pro Audio MMC oococcccnnnnccinnccccicninnnnccccncrnanann cnn 173 Settings for the ViS BBOEX arrie neea E EE P EEEE EREE ANES 174 Settings for Cakewalk Pro Audio cocconocinoncnncncnnnnco
157. anannn nana rorannnnananananoos 109 Auditioning Test Listening Songs Written to CDs CD Player Function 110 Writing Additional Songs to the DISC mococococincncononenenenncnnnncnonnnnenennoranannananarnrannnnnnnrannnnos 111 Arranging and Writing Multiple Songs to Disc eoomeneccococonononanncnrnnenanncnrnererarnnncnannraros 111 Writing the Song Data Finalize ococininonononininnnonennencneccnrnnenernrnarnnnnrn coronan nnnanar anos 112 Arranging and Writing Songs and Song Data mocconecencococonononnnrnrnnenncnnnarnrnorannnnnnnnararas 113 Saving Songs to CD RW Discs CD R Backup ooconccccnnocinnnccccnnccnnnnnaccnnnrncn anna 113 Items Necessary for CD R Backup oooconoconcnncncncnononncncnnnonanannnnnnnnnrorannnnonananannanorarnnannnraraas 114 Saving Songs to CD RW DISCS psen e e Ee i E E E EEE 114 Loading Songs From CD RW Discs cooconocconcncnnncncnnnnnenonocarnnnnnnnnrorannnnnnananarnanararnnannnrararas 115 How to Erase the Data in the CD RW DISC ooconiccncncncnconononononononanononononanononononononanonononos 115 Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices seeeeeeeeeeeeees 116 Synchronizing with MIDI Sequencers cccceeeeeceeeee eect eeeeneeceaeeesaaaeseeeeeessaaeeneneees 116 Items Necessary for Synchronization coceccnconcnoncncnnnnonennnnnanannnnnnnrorannnnnnnnnnarnrnararanannnnnraos 116 Masterand olaver cota Tinto dal Ai alo ad 116 PR on don Whales seam AEs htt athe ee es et iat e sa aa eaea eide 116 Synchronization wi
158. annnass 127 O OS 44 Punch Uta Ad 44 Index eee R Track MOVER iaa aae aa Sesvoree lo e ta aaa 91 E IE A T eesti tleeEi aatasaietet ncatciestlemuecteansel 28 Track Mum Det iniciadas 111 Realtime sitesi O 144 A On Exp ar slOUe er nirdtng ae Recording Dusa ipite e eer at Eaa iaa SE E 25 U Recording AAA 40 Undo sisne Ae 146 S User routing ses r e e E A EE RSi 87 S P DIE ti A ra 19 55 A A EE 6 v SE tec ft acc O A P te 99 oo Bs 4 SMPTE time COC ceccceccccecccccceccccceccececeececececeecesesceceecseseees 36 Vari piteh iii id 152 SAM ple TAE At dae 40 108 a E EAT ANTAA 73 127 Z EU EE E E TE 141 ZETO TO UID cucnaccnnacaonaconacioncnnocorronorincnnicrn cono cara cacon crono cracar s 17 Send Return ococoocnncncnonononononononnnonocnnonnnncccnnnnnnncnncnon 31 68 Zip AAA A E 99 Sequential OR 28 Zip ATIVE da Matin de 99 Shelving type Equalizer ocooncocononononnoncncnenrnrnrnnonnrnrass 58 A A edie ii aE AE A EA genres 33 Slave sare RENE eter a E E S een doves 118 172 MAPS Otitis 143 Solo FUNCTION a en e a a 148 SONG EESE AATE EA T 22 Song copy Archives extract 106 136 Song copy Archives store ocococcnincncnnonenenenararnanannnnoaso 105 Song copy Playable ccccccccceeeeetetetesesesneneseseees 103 E 157 Song EXPO incitar iodo cra 138 S ng IP bat is 137 Song Name diia cia 157 SONS DEW ak tei RN eae rtea Paa nds 40 Song OPt MIZE neironi n e ae a a a aT 156 SONG protetta e iieo eae Ease oR tetera see 64
159. ant o REC 7 Recorder DIGITAL IN R 8 EQ8 REC 8 Recorder The output of each channel is assigned to tracks to be recorded Channels not assigned to tracks are output directly from the MASTER jacks Additionally the status of tracks with signals assigned to them when not in record standby STA TUS indicator blinking red also are output from the MASTER jacks At this time the following signals are assigned to the channel faders Channels 1 6 INPUT jacks 1 6 Channels 7 8 DIGITAL IN connector L R 26 REC 1 REC 2 P o REC 3 gt REC 4 REC 5 REC 6 REC 7 S o REC 8 BE Chapter 1 Before You Start VS 880EX Terminology Track mixer is placed after the recorder section and correspond to the tracks 1 8 Recorder Koo E Track Mixer Track 1 8 Fader1 Pani MIX L R MASTER gt Track2 Q2 Fader2 Pan2 ba H Tracks EQ3 Fader3 co EQ4 Fader4 P Tracks EQ5 Fader5 gt Track6 Q pe rear Tracks EQ8 Fader8 NS Pan3 si REC 1 Recorder e REC 2 Recorder Pan4 A REC 3 Recorder Pan5 7 REC 4 Recorder REC 5 Recorder Fader6 Pan6 ES REC 6 Recorder EQ7 Fader Pan7 Ta REC 7 Recorder Pans F REC 8 Recorder All of the tracks are output from the MASTER jacks Additionally tracks can also be routed ba
160. ant to remove the protect function 2 Press SONG several times until SNG Song Name Prtct appears in the display 3 Press YES Song name appears in the display 4 Press PARAMETER SNG ChangePrtct gt Off appears in the display 5 Press YES If you wish to cancel press NO 6 Song protect will be disabled SNG Complete appears in the display and return to Play condition Selecting a Song Song Select If the VS 1680 contains multiple songs use the follow ing procedure to select a song 1 Press SYSTEM several times until Song Select appears in the display Press YES Use the TIME VALUE dial to appear the song name that you wish to select An asterisk will be displayed at the beginning of the current song Different types of songs for the VS 880 and VS 880EX are distinguished CONDITION MARKER E 12345678 INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 12345678 INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 4 Press YES Select Song Sure Are you sure that you want to select this song will be dis played 5 Press YES again STORE Current Store the current song will be displayed If you wish to save the current song press YES If not press NO 7 The song will be selected and you will return to the Play Condition 65 Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects The VS 880EX contains effects allowing up to two stereo effects
161. appears in the display and return to Play condition 98 Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive A Zip drive can be connected to the SCSI connector of the VS 880EX Be sure to read the owner s manual for your Zip drive as well This chapter will explain the procedures for saving songs to Zip disks and for returning songs saved to Zip disks back to the internal hard disk Before You Use a Zip Drive Install the unit on a solid level surface in an area free from vibration If the unit is tilted excessively the Zip drive may malfunction or require service Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly different than its former location Rapid changes in the environment can cause condensation to form inside the Zip drive which will adversely affect the operation of the Zip drive and or damage Zip disks When the unit has been moved allow it to become accustomed to the new environment allow a few hours before operating it To insert a Zip disk push it gently but firmly into the Zip drive it will click into place To remove a Zip disk press the EJECT button firmly Do not use excessive force to remove a Zip disk which is lodged in the Zip drive Never attempt to remove a Zip disk from the Zip drive while the Zip drive is operating the indicator is lit damage could result to both the Zip disk and the Zip drive O Remove any Zip disk from the Zip dr
162. ars in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial D IN Sel Digital In Select Select either DIGIN1 coaxial or DIGIN2 optical if you are going to recover data using the VS 880EX s DIGITAL IN connector 8 Press PARAMETER gt twice Name Ready appears in the display 9 Press YES Please Play DAT appears in the display 10 Put the DAT recorder in play mode This executes the loading of the song name 133 Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder DAT Backup 11 When the load procedure is finished Please Stop DAT appears in the display Stop the DAT recorder then press YES The DAT Name screen appears in the display If data for two or more songs was saved together you can rotate the TIME VALUE dial to view the song names Song Number Song Name AB LR AUX MASTER Sample Rate Recording Mode Total number of songs backed up to DAT 3 songs 12345678 AB LR AUX MASTER INPUT TRACK 12 If you wish to end the operation after merely checking the press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 13 If you wish to recover only the data for a specific song use the TIME VALUE dial to display the name of the song that you wish to recover 14 Press ENTER YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 15 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you
163. ase refer to Recording the Current Condition of the Mixer Scene p 73 1 Press SCENE The SCENE indicator lights 2 Press the LOC buttons 1 5 4 8 whose indi cators are not blinked For example if you want to store the settings to Scene 1 then press 1 5 If you wish to store the settings in Scene 5 hold down SHIFT and press 1 5 3 Hold down SHIFT and press STORE ZERO STORE OK appears in the display 4 Press YES 5 Press SCENE once more The SCENE indicator will go dark If you wish to halt the registration procedure press SCENE before step 2 6 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 72 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings With the VS 880EX there are two functions to recall mixer settings easily One is refered to as the Scene and the other one is referred to as the EZ Routing According to the circumstances please use each func tion Scene A Scene stores the current mixer settings include that setting values in a song For example during mix down you can create a number of mixes with different settings for volume pan equalizer etc and compare those mixes each one with all of its settings preserved This is a very convenient feature EZ Routing The VS 880EX can store settings related to its mixer connections These include settings for routing of inputs to tracks for recording for determining where signals are output and for determi
164. ata to be copied must be greater than 0 5 seconds If data shorter than 0 5 seconds is copied the sound will not playback 1 You can use Track Copy with the tracks that are currently audible Select the V track that contains the copy source playback data and prepare that data for playback 2 Press TRACK several times until TRK Track Copy appears in the display 3 Press YES Press CURSOR el several times until TRK CopyTr gt appears in the display 5 Press SELECT CH EDIT for the copy source track The SELECT indicator will light orange You can also use the TIME VALUE dial to select the copy source track 6 Press STATUS for the copy destination track The STATUS indicator will light red 7 Rotating the TIME VALUE dial allows you to specify the copy destination V track For example 1 1 indicates Track 1 V track 1 Copy source track Copy destination track a CONDITION MARKER AT li eskbeze AB LR INPUTX RACK AUX MASTER blinking 8 If you want to copy multiple tracks simultaneous ly repeat Steps 5 7 Do not designate V tracks that have already been specified as copy destinations for other Tracks 9 If there are any tracks which you decide not to copy press that track s SELECT CH EDIT once again The SELECT indicator will blink orange Alternatively you can use PARAMETER lt lt a gt gt to access the settings for t
165. atches your MIDI sequencer 12 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 13 Set your MIDI sequencer so that it can operate according to the MIDI Clock messages received from external devices and set it so that it can play back MIDI song data When playback begins on the VS 880EX the MIDI sequencer begins play back as well When the MIDI sequencer is used as the basis to con trol the VS 880EX use the following procedure When using MIDI sequencer software for personal computers When using MIDI sequencer software for person al computers then depending on the hardware specifications and the playing conditions the MTC signal sent to the VS 880EX may be unstable As much as possible try to synchronize using the VS 880EX as the master 1 Connect the VS 880EX and the MIDI sequencer as shown below CE Quna225 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES OPERATION IS SL TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS 1 THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HA INTERFERENCE AND 2 THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RE INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION MIDI OUT MIDI Sequencer implements MTC 2 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display 3 Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial ErrLevel Error Level
166. be able to hear the automix status of each channel while you con tinue pressing AUTOMIX 4 To turn off the Solo function hold down SHIFT and press the SOLO EZ ROUTING once again Return to Play condition 1 Hold down SOLO EZ ROUTING This turns the Mute function on the SELECT button indicators are all blink In the present status all chan nels are monitored 2 While holding down SOLO EZ ROUTING press the SELECT button for the channel you wish to mute The button indicator goes off and only that channel is now muted You can also mute two or more channels N 1 2 6 7 CI O ll O 9 L Assan r f 1 LH Mese N EFFECT 3 Monitor and Mute alternate each time you press SOLO EZ ROUTING and SELECT button The muted state will remain valid even if you take your hand off SOLO EZ ROUTING or the SELECT button If you wish to switch the input track effect return press FADER EDIT 4 If you wish to monitor all channels hold down SOLO EZ ROUTING and press CLEAR 148 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions Simultaneously Adjusting a Stereo Source Channel Link When recording or playing back a stereo source nor mal mixer operations require you to control the left and right channels separately which can make it inconvenient to adjust equalizer effects and other set tings In such cases you can have the settings for a pair of channels with the exceptio
167. been moved to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly different than its former location Rapid changes in the environment can cause condensation to form inside the drive which will adversely affect the operation of the drive and or damage remov able disks When the unit has been moved allow it to become accustomed to the new environment allow a few hours before operating it Concerning Copyright The law prohibits the unauthorized recording public performance broadcast sale or distribution etc of a work CD recording video recording broadcast etc whose copyright is owned by a third party Roland will take no responsibility for any infringe ment of copyright that you may commit in using the VS 880EX About SCMS The VS 880EX does not implement SCMS This design decision was made with the intent that SCMS should not restrict the creation of original compositions which do not violate copyright law Do not use this device in a way which would infringe on copyrights held by another 9 SCMS Appendices p 124 Disclaimer of Liability Roland will take no responsibility for any direct dam ages consequential damages or any other damages which may result from your use of the VS 880EX These damages may include but are not limited to the following events which can occur when using the VS 880EX 0 Any loss of profit that may occur to you Permanent loss of your music or data O Inability to continue us
168. canararnnnnnnnnaso 185 F Fader math vscsis ie eneuts eteveit ennn 144 164 Finalize scarica ein trato three Erica 112 Footswitch oi en ee 44 165 Brame REE PEATA 117 G GPL AEE iaa EE AE bie 45 165 Ss sarosar sesioan an Ea E La ea iiias 144 H Headphones irre aseo oa citada 20 132 I DE ari 13 Initialize Mixer System ocoonconnconnnioninncnincninoncncncncnnona 169 Input chalco cdas endo 42 Isern aaa 52 66 L Docta arn Dean hRa eines 36 37 Locator baka IS 37 Loop recording issii london incas tios nani 47 M MD ati a he are Sey 63 128 MID is ld 116 MIDI clock anes hoger eles Sa eta 119 MM gaa aai aa A Aaa 170 MIDI time code MTC oocccccccccnnccononcnonncnnnncnncncnncncnncnnnos 116 Marker cia tin Gk eit a 36 38 Mask fader io E sei Sewanee 145 MESA ns erriei i iie eee ere 63 Metronome errate TNT 154 MIX DUS til lethal tien ao 25 Mix lO Weird OR rada aia 63 Muteni iodo idas 148 N Non destructive dit coooncncicnnononnnnnonnnnornnrcnonacnnnncnncnnnos 88 NAAA 117 Numeric keyso ps erie A ERE aiae 153 0 Optical ici dnd its 19 55 128 Over dubbing eccococonononannnnnnnnonncnnnonennorananonnanarnrarnannnnnanss 49 P PATA A A A ASERRE 21 A RS 70 Peaking type Equalizer oonoocococononinocnononcnennrnrnnneninnrannnnos 58 Playlisten len e ii tea sit EA E iE 163 Postal ii 163 Pretere lone EE inca Ral AAR 163 DTO Wind i dia ot 140 Program change Message cononcoconononononncnnnrnnenarnnannnn
169. cccnnnnoccconnnnenccccnnncnccnnn nn cccn nn rra 157 When Using Balanced INputS sacanear ee e EE E RE e 158 Determining Output oonocnccnncccnnoninnnncccnnnnnnn ano cn conca rra 158 MASTER Jacks a o tai 158 BUS a ed 159 DIGITAL OUT Comiect lS mirarnos va sai 159 DIRECTOU Turia a ei dadas 160 Confirming That a Drive is Not Damaged Drive Check ooconccconninnnnicicnoccccnncnnnnncnos 160 Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions 163 Switching the Display Content oonccccnnnccnnnncccnonccnnnonncnnc conan cc cnn rra 163 Bre evel ai AA A AAA Es 163 Post Level nit d 163 E AA A A eigen dane 163 TAEA sg A A AA 163 Checking the Size of a Recorded Performance ccccceeesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeseneees 164 System Settings for Each Song eccceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeesecaeeeseaaeseeeeeessaeeseaeees 164 Having the Volume Change as Soon as the Faders are Moved oococccccncnnonocananinonononos 164 Holding Level M ter Peaks comodas Sani a AE AEE anteater s 164 Checking the Remaining Disk Space ccccccccscsscsestsseseseeseteescecesescsesnaneneseseseeeneseeeeees 165 When Using the Foot Switches rins eei a e EAE Ei 165 Overall Settings for the VS 880EX eecccceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeseaaeseeeeeeseaaeeseneees 166 Holding the function of SHIFT Shift Lock ocociconininnonananinononocananononononananononononos 166 Displaying Measures and Beats cececnenininonnonsnnonncnnerncarnnnnncnrornnnnnnc
170. cedure of converting a VS 880EX song for use by the VS 880 and saving it in playable format to a Zip disk 1 Make settings as shown below SCSI MID OUT THRU IN 2 Select the song you want to convert as the current song 3 Inserta disk into the Zip drive 138 Chapter 11 Compatibility 4 Press SONG several times until Song Export appears in the display 5 Press YES 6 Dest Drv the save destination drive appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the drive on which you wish to save the converted song data For example if you wish to save the data to the Zip drive select SC5 0 Write destination drive in the example a Zip drive CONDITION MARKER 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 7 Press YES A confirmation message appears in the display 8 Press YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 9 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 10 After Song Export is completed return to Play condition 139 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions Previewing Techniques Preview When editing a song you will likely want to find pre cise points in the song for example the point where sound begins or where the climax begins when using Auto Punch In Recording and in oth
171. ceeeecseeeeecseeseecseeaecaeeaeenees 22 About EVENTS vrai lada it A A aL eatin AA Sad a 23 MIXER SOCIO a atada oct da 24 Signal Elow BUSES A A A bove daddetesne devas alors EGES 24 Input Mixet case secstaksnostsenakseg ste chiasectencehdbnen dees codanckandasdensssnsnSbenehangesasesaatgrinantesassahaadsbsabedahde 26 TACK MINE 20 A TETAS TA oth ERA A TA ADS 27 Effect Return Mixer 25 04 catevce diri rnisi n cogi naad atte a isa REIRME dde e Coba ghsvaite 27 Switching the Fader Functions cocecococoncnononnnnnnnnnncnnanannnnnnornnnnannnrarnnnnnnnananannnnnnoranannnnarnrans 28 Master BlOG ARA E NN 28 Recorder Secon 0 A inL eel aaa nan wien his 28 Differences with a Tape Type MTR cccccccscsscsesesteteseecseenescesenenesesesesneneseseeceseseessananes 28 Track Minutes and Recording Time cccccsccccsescseseeteeeceeeseseeeeneesesesesneneseecesesesssssnanenes 29 Auxiliary Tracks for Each Track ccccccsessssssesesssteeseececesesesceenesesescsnenesescecenesesssnaanenens 30 A ai eaded eis caa DAN d ie IA aad Sirsa Kec A E E wa cates eae ta Nese 31 About the Effect Expansion Board c ccsccscssesesseseseescecesesescsnenesesesesnenesescesenesesssnananenens 31 Connecting Effects srr deen A rs ip iaae ner Seer i RE rere ay 31 Chapter 2 Basic Operation sssssssssssnnsnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 32 B efore You Begin 24 0 ieee MA ae ee ee A E AEAT 32 Turning Oni the POWEL sipeer eeaeee nE dat e ERS A A E A E REA 32 If You Have Trouble
172. ces to record to the tracks While holding down the STATUS buttons for the tracks you want to record to press the SELECT buttons for the input channels whose sources you want assigned to the tracks The SELECT indicators blink 4 Now you are ready for overdubbing Follow the Steps of Recording to the Tracks p 42 to record and then check the content The VS 880EX features 8 tracks each of which contains 8 auxiliary tracks These subsidiary tracks are referred to as V tracks Each song can have two sets A and B of these 64 V tracks 8 tracks x 8 V tracks and each such set is referred to as a V track bank By using all of these tracks to their full potential you can create recordings of up to 128 64 V track x 2 V track bank tracks Switching V Tracks 1 Press CH EDIT SELECT for the track whose V track you wish to switch 2 Hold down SHIFT and press the channel 2 V Track CH EDIT 3 V Track appears in the display Using the TIME VALUE dial to select the V track V Track Bank Tracks on which sound is recorded V Track REM ING TIME 8 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 4 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 5 As described in Recording to the Tracks p 42 record and check the contents Switching V Track Bank 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt
173. ch that you wish to use Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt a FX1 Ins appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to insert effect 1 select either Ins InsL InsR or InsS and proceed to step 15 If you wish to use effect 1 in a send return configuration select Off and pro ceed to step 18 CONDITION MARKER 58 mm a n al maas 12345678 AB CR AUX MASTER INPUT TRACK InsSnd appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the insert send level Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 InsRtn appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the insert return level Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt d FX1 Snd appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to send the track source to the effect 1 bus select either Pre or Pst and proceed to step 20 If you do not wish to send the track source to the effect 1 bus select Off and proceed to step 24 s S to a a a a a 12345678 AB LR AUX MASTER INPUT TRACK Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER SndLev
174. chap ter thoroughly to gain a better understanding of the VS 880EX Saving and Managing Data The VS 880EX saves all of the data such as perfor mance data mixing data system data etc on the disk drive Thus it cannot operate without either hav ing an internal disk or being connected to a Zip drive with a SCSI connector Furthermore the hard disk or Zip drive used by the VS 880EX cannot be used by another device The VS 880EX is able to manage which 500 MB or 1000 MB of disk space at once If you use a disk drive with a capacity that is larger than this you will need to divide it into two or more Each of these area is refered as the partition Up to 4 partitions can be created in one disk drive For creat ing songs in a enough space we recommend you to set the partitions to 1000 MB Ex 1 When the disk drive is 810 MB and the parti tion size is 1000 MB Disk Drive 810MB Partition 810MB Ex 2 When the disk drive is 1 4 GB and the parti tion size is 1000 MB Disk Drive 1 4GB Partition 1 400MB Partition 0 1000MB Ex 3 When the disk drive is 2 1 GB and the parti tion size is 500 MB Disk Drive 2 1GB Partition 1 500MB Partition 3 500MB Partition O 500MB Partition 2 500MB unusable 100MB Ex 4 When the disk drive is 2 1 GB and the parti tion size is 1000 MB Disk Drive 2 1GB Partition O 1000MB Partition 1 1000MB
175. cifies the ending time of the segment to be erased 12 Press PARAMETER gt TRK Track Erase OK appears in the display 13 Press YES This executes Track Erase If you wish to cancel press NO 14 When the erase is completed correctly Complete appears in the display and return to Play condition An Easy Way to Specify the Time Settings Times for the St and End can be specified directly without having to display the Track Erase page In Play condition use the following proce dure 1 Move to the beginning of the area that you wish to erase St Hold down TRACK and press LOC1 5 Move to the end of the area that you wish to erase End 4 Hold down TRACK and press LOC3 7 If you now access the Track Erase page the times that were specified in steps 14 will be input as the time settings for the respective points This operation allows you to expand or compress the playback time of a song to a specified length of time You can specify the amount of compression or expan sion in a range of 75 125 but the more extreme the settings the more adverse the effect will be on the sound quality We recommend that you normally keep compression and expansion within a range of 93 107 Example 1 Compression Start To End Time 1 Example 2 Expansion Start End To Time 96 Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance Track Editing In gener
176. ck to the RECORDING bus for overdubbing or re rerecording In this status the channel faders 1 8 correspond respectively to Tracks 1 8 This mixer adjusts the return level balance from effects connected in send return fashion and the level balance of the stereo input FX Return Mixer Channel 6 8 Stereo In FI Faders Balance6 MIX L R MASTER REC 1 Recorder REC 2 Recorder FX1 Return Fade7 REC 3 Recorder REC 4 Recorder REC 5 Recorder FX2 Retuen TF Faders Balance8 REC 6 Recorder REC 7 Recorder REC 8 Recorder Each channel is output from the MASTER jacks It is also possible to assign them to the recording bus for recording In this case the channel faders correspond to the following signals Channel 6 The INPUT jack assigned to Stereo In Channel 7 FX1 return Channel 8 FX2 return 27 Chapter 1 Before You Start VS 880EX Terminology On the VS 880EX it is able to adjust Input mixer or Track mixer by switching the function of the channel faders on the top panel Pressing FADER on the top panel toggles between the input mixer and the track mixer The FADER indica tor indicates which mixer is currently selected lighting orange Input Mixer lighting green Track Mixer lighting red Effect Return Mixer This selects the jacks or connectors connected to external equipment to which the output of each mixer is sent Masterblock MIX L R MASTER L R AUX A B PHONES L R FX1 UR
177. ct Beijing CHINA TEL 010 6774 7491 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 409 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 498 3079 INDONESIA PT Galestra Inti Kompleks Perkantoran Duta Merlin Blok E No 6 7 Jl Gajah Mada No 3 5 Jakarta 10130 INDONESIA TEL 021 6335416 KOREA Cosmos Corporation Service Station 261 2nd Floor Nak Won Arcade Jong Ro ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 742 8844 MALAYSIA Bentley Music SDN BHD 140 amp 142 Jalan Bukit Bintang 55100 Kuala Lumpur MALAYSIA TEL 03 2443333 PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 190 SINGAPORE Swee Lee Company 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 748 1669 CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD Blk 3014 Bedok Industrial Park E 02 2148 SINGAPORE 489980 TEL 243 9555 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN ROC TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Verng NakornKasem Soi 2 Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 2248821 VIETNAM Saigon Music 138 Tran Quang Khai St District 1 Ho chi minh City VIETNAM TEL 8 844 4068 AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND AUSTRALIA Roland Corpora
178. ct 1 has been inserted in another channel the display will indicate and this item cannot be set mmm 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 39 Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt a 86 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings 40 41 42 3 EX2 MstIns appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to insert effect 2 into the master out select On If not select Off If effect 2 has been inserted in another channel the display will indicate and this item cannot be set MEASURE BEAT SYNC MODE SCENE 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd Change Routing appears in the display Press YES When the routing has been finalized Complete appears in the display and you will return to Play condition If you decide to discard the routing that was set press NO Use Template or Step Edit to finalize the routing that you wish to save Press EZ ROUTING several times until SaveCurRouting appears in the display Press YES The number and name of the user routing will be dis played Routing Number Routing Name CONDITION MARKER MEASURE BEAT SYNC MODE SCENE ats 81 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER Use the TIME
179. ction as NEXT Moves to the beginning or end of the fol lowing phrase each time the foot switch is pressed Previous Performs the same function as PREVI OUS Moves to the beginning or end of the previous phrase each time the foot switch is pressed GPI Controls playback and recording of the song depending on the GPI trigger signal received from the FOOT SWITCH jack 9 GPI Appendices p 123 4 Select Record with the TIME VALUE dial 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Now you can switch the setting of the FOOT SWITCH jack between Punch In and Punch Out by the foot switch Carry out Manual Punch In as described in Using the RECORD Button Manual Punch In 1 p 44 However use the foot switch instead of the REC button to perform the operation You can automatically punch in and punch out at pre viously specified locations This function is called Auto Punch In This is convenient when you need to punch in or out at a precise time Before you begin recording set the times for punch in punch out There are three ways to set these times as described below Use the method appropriate for your situation Using Locators 1 Preset locate points where you want to punch in punch out 2 While holding down AUTO PUNCH press the LOC button 1 5 4 8 specifying the locate point for the time at which you want to punch in 3 Then without releasing AUTO PUNCH press the LOC button
180. ctric guitar to the INPUT 1 jack add a stereo effect using the Guitar Multi effect and record it to Tracks land 2 Select an Effect 1 Connect your electric guitar to the INPUT 1 jack 2 Press EFFECT several times until EFFECT 1 PRM appears in the display 3 Press YES The number and name of the currently selected effect will be displayed and you can select the desired effect Effect Number Effect Name APS Ss 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 4 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the effect you wish to use Here select A41 GT Rock Lead 5 After selecting the effect press YES 52 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording Specify the Input Channel to Which the Effect is to be Applied 6 Press FADER EDIT several times to let the FADER indicator light orange Press the channel 1 CH EDIT SELECT Press PARAMETER lt gt gt until FX1 Ins appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial FX1 Ins Effect 1 Insert Switch This sets how the Insert functions In this case select InsertL Off There is no Insert Insert Inserts in both channels of the stereo effect InsertL Inserts in the left channel of the stereo effect InsertR Inserts in the right channel of the stereo effect InsertS Inserts in the left and right channels of the stereo effect in series 10 Press PARAMETER gt FX1 InsSend appears in the display 11
181. d On will be output 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER 7 Pan appears in the display Adjust the pan of the track source Press the SELECT CH EDIT button for the track source whose pan you wish to adjust and use the TIME VALUE dial You can also adjust the pan using the pan knobs on the top panel When Channel Link is on adjust the Offset Balance of the sources tracks p 151 AB LR AUX MASTER 8 s 12345678 INPUT TRACK 84 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd Level appears in the display Adjust the level of the track source Press the SELECT CH EDIT button for the track source whose level you wish to adjust and use the TIME VALUE dial You can also adjust the level using the channel faders on the top panel When Channel Link is on adjust the Offset Level of the sources tracks p 150 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 12345678 AB LR AUX MASTER INPUT TRACK Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt a Use EFFECT1 appears in the display If you wish to use effect 1 press YES and proceed to step 12 If you do not wish to use effect 1 press NO and proceed to step 24 The effect patch will be displayed Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the effect pat
182. d value is the approximate standard value 10 Press PARAMETER b gt SNG CD R Write Sure appears in the display 109 Chapter 8 Use with a CD RW Drive 11 Press YES SNG CD Track No OK is displayed 12 Press YES Obey Copyrights is displayed 13 Carefully read the License Agreement detailed on the back cover of this manual if you agree to the terms press YES Writing to the CD R disc begins If you do not agree to the terms press NO The VS 880EX just returns to the condition at Step 2 If Not 44 1k Song Appears in the Display The sample rate is not 44 1 kHz so the song can not be written to the CD R disc Press ENTER YES to return to Step 1 Please refer to Creating a New Song p 40 If Please Insert Disc Appears in the Display This indicates that the CD RW drive s loading tray is open that there is no disc loaded or that the CD RW drive is in some other way not ready for use Insert a CD R disc and press YES CONDITION MARKER TIME m m m m a E AEE _ 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER CONDITION MARKER 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER 14 After the write procedure has been carried out normally Write Another appears in the dis play When you want to write the same song information to another CD R disc insert another disc in the CD RW drive and press
183. dB 6 4 0 4 1 2 3 Ca mxrec a AUX mxyrec aux 1 PEAK Indicators These indicators allow you to confirm the sound level input at the input jacks 1 6 They help you to deter mine the correct input level when adjusting the INPUT knobs You will need to specify the level at which the indicators light beforehand p 61 The indi cators are set at the factory to 6 dB 2 INPUT Knobs These knobs adjust the sensitivity of the input jacks 1 6 Turn a knob fully to the right for mic level 50 dBu and fully to the left for line level 4 dBu 3 PAN Knobs These knobs adjust the pan location in the stereo out put of each channel 4 SELECT CH EDIT Select Channel Edit buttons Use these buttons when you wish to make settings for a mixer channel The names of the parameter groups that can be set for each channel are printed below CH EDIT To directly specify a particular group you can hold down SHIFT and press the button for that group name When editing a song use these buttons to select tracks for editing 14 Preparations 5 STATUS Buttons These buttons switch the status of each track The cur rent status is shown
184. dial D OUT Sel Digital Out Select Select either DIGOUT1 coaxial or DIGOUT2 optical if you are going to back up data using the DIGITAL OUT connector 16 Press YES A confirmation message appears in the display 17 Press YES Please Rec DAT appears in the display 18 Put the DAT recorder in record standby and press YES once more Backup will begin If you wish to cancel the backup then press CANCEL NO This cancels the process even if done during the backup itself However the song data recorded up to that point cannot be loaded into the VS 880EX 19 If you cannot back up everything on one tape the operation is carried out for the length of time des ignated in Tape Len Insert the next tape into the DAT recorder and again put it in record standby then press YES The backup procedure continues in this fashion At this time we recommend that you write the tape num bers on the labels in the order they are backed up 20 When the backup procedure is finished Please Stop DAT appears in the display Stop the DAT recorded and press YES 21 Press PLAY DISPLA Y Return to Play condition To check whether or not a backup has been performed cor rectly we recommend that you carry out the Verify proce dure p 134 Disk Capacity Needed for Backup One 60 minutes tape can back up approximately 330 MB of song data For example you need four 60 minutes o
185. ding Auto Punch In 004 45 Repeatedly Recording Over the Same Area Loop Recording ecccocoononooncnnnnncnnanos 47 Recording to Other Tracks Overdubbing c cceeeceeceeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaaeeeeeeeeesaeeneneees 49 Recording on V Trach 2 secede na a TE cates e aaa SE ea SEE ETa 49 Using EEC 4 ea dd ae e tag 50 Applying Effects to the Playback sine oiea oa Ee Ae E EE SAE rE EEEE EE SEES 50 Applying Effects While Recording Send Return s ses ssssssssessssssesrssssersrssssersessssestes 51 Applying Effects While Recording Insert ccsccseccscescseeneneesesesneneeececenesesesnenanes 52 Recording Digital Signals ssia eranen raaa aia 55 Items Necessary for Digital Recording coccoecooninconononennccnnncnrnrnnonanananarnararnranancnrarnns 55 Make the Digital Connections nee ense minn e ke n a DEE E 55 Match the Sample Rates ninne oaeee oe AE e eE e a TEE E EES 55 Select the Master Clock iii ida aiis a ae 56 Select an Input Source msi dics nabe GAEE EEA E EEE aAA OAR RERE PARERES 56 Adjusting the Tone EqualliZer cccecccccceceseccceeeeeeeceeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeceseeseseceeeeenseeaeenenties 57 Using the 3 Band Equalizer ccccccssscesescecesesssesneneneseseeneesescecenesessseansneseseseeneneseeeeeeney 57 Adjusting the Equalizers posne ey cr Nie done entitats 57 Combining the Contents of Tracks Track BOUNCING 0 ccceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeetaeeeteneeess 60 Applying Reverb While Track Bouncing ocneciconcnco
186. ding destination track However if in step 17 you selected either Ins InsL InsR or InsS this display will not appear The sound with the inserted effect will be recorded CONDITION MARKER SYNC MODE SCENE a 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 18 TR InsSnd appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the insert send level 19 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the PU abaya ts bi previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt INEQTAIBAGS ADE MASTER 20 TR InsRtn appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the insert return level 82 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings 29 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd 30 Use EFFECT2 appears in the display If you wish to use effect 2 press YES and make settings for effect 2 as described in steps 15 28 If you do not wish to use effect 2 press NO and proceed to step 31 31 TR AUX Snd appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to send the play back track to the AUX bus select either Pre or Pst and proceed to step 32 If you do not wish to send the playback track to the AUX bus select Off and proceed to step 36 CONDITION MARKER MEASURE BEAT 4 4 11 SYN SCENE REMAINING TIME AB LR AUX MASTER INPUT TRACK 32 Pres
187. down SHIFT and press PLAY DIS PLAY To return to the previous display once again hold down SHIFT and press PLAY DISPLAY CONDITION MARKER TIME sE A A 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 88 Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance Track Editing If you have selected an item which specifies a time a play list will appear in the bar display In this case if you wish to view an amplitude profile or the track selection status in the bar display hold down SHIFT and press PLAY DISPLAY The amplitude profile allows you to view the sound recorded in the selected track as a waveform Use SELECT CH EDIT to select the track which will be viewed as an amplitude profile Waveform display Playback time CONDITION MARKS os 8 m 12345678 AB LR AUX MASTER INPUT TRACK This operation copies the playback data of a specified area to another location For example this is conve nient when you play the same chorus both at the beginning and end of a song If playback data exists at the copy destination that data will be overwritten Example1 Copying twice to the same track Playback data of a track for which Channel Link is ON cannot be copied to a track whose channel has a Channel Link setting of OFF In the same way playback data of a track for which Channel Link is OFF cannot be copied to a track whose channel has a Channel Link setting of ON The length of the d
188. drive 2 Insert a disk that was copied by Archives Store into the Zip drive 3 Press SONG several times until SNG Song Copy appears in the display 4 Press YES SNG CpyMode appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Here select Archives CpyMode Select how the song will be copied Playable Playable type Archives Archives type 6 Press PARAMETER PF SNG ArcTarget appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to copy the current song select 1 Song To copy all songs from the current drive select All 8 Press PARAMETER gt SNG Arc Drive appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial select the disk drive from which the data will be loaded For this operation you will be able to select only remov able disk drives which are connected to the SCSI connector It is not possible to select the current drive the internal hard disk as the copy destina tion drive For example if you wish to copy from a Zip disk select SC5 0 10 Press PARAMETER gt SNG Arc Func appears in the display 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Here select Extract Arc Func Archives Function Select the Archive Type copy method Store Saving to Zip Disks Extract Loading from Zip Disks 12 Press YES A message asking if you want to continue appears in the display 13 Press YES In step 7 select
189. e perform step 2 so that EX2 Ins is displayed Steps 4 7 can be adjusted only when the effect is being used as an insertion effect This inserts the effect into the MASTER Out After the mix for each channel is completed the entire song is put through the compressor which is convenient at such times as when you listen to the total volume while mixing down 1 Hold down SHIFT and press EDIT FADER 2 Press PARAMETER lt lt gt gt until MST FX1 INS Sw appears in the display If FX1 has been inserted into another channel the dis play will indicate MST FX1 INS Sw the setting cannot be made 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial 67 Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects MST FX1 INS Sw Master Effect 1 Insert Switch This sets how the effects are connected Off There is no Insert On Inserts in both channels of the stereo effect CONDITION MARKER ei 5 6 as 7 sl 12345678 INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 4 Press PARAMETER MST FX1 Ins Send appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MST FX1 Ins Send Master Effect 1 Insert Send Level This adjusts the level of the signal 0 127 sent to the Insert effect Set the initial value to 100 6 Press PARAMETER PF MST FX1 Ins Rtn appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MST FX1 Ins Rtn Master Effect 1 Insert Return Level This adjusts the level of the sign
190. e begin and end times for the loop There are three ways to specify the loop times Use the method appropriate for your situa tion To specify the area re recording the punch in point and punch out point refer to the previous section Auto Punch In Make settings so that the loop completely includes the area to be rerecorded i e from the punch in point to the punch out point If the area to be rerecorded is not com pletely within the loop recording may not start at the specified location or may be interrupted in the middle of the area for recording Using Locators 1 First store locate points where you want to begin and end the loop 2 While holding down LOOP press the LOCA TOR button for the locate point where you want the loop to begin 3 Without releasing LOOP press the LOCATOR button which specified the end of the loop LOCATOR Loc 1 6 Loc2 8 Loc3 M Loc 4 8 CLEAR SCENE 390 wl CO 1 3 4 5 START END TO PREVIOUS Ha TAP LOOP AUTO PUNCH NUMERICS LJ O LA COW 6 3 gt o GRADATION SNAP SHOT Y To Use Markers Adjacent mark points can be used to set the beginning and end of the loop 1 First set mark points where you want to punch in and punch out 2 Move to the mark point at the beginning of the loop While holding down LOOP press NEXT Without releasin
191. e other channels This is called the Solo function To use the Solo function use the following procedure If in contrast to the Solo function you wish to mute only specific channels this is called the Mute function 1 Hold down SHIFT and press SOLO EZ ROUT ING in the master section The display will briefly indicate SOLO Mode ON indicating that the Solo function is on The display in the CONDITION field will alternate between the name of the current condition and sol also indicat ing that the Solo function is on At the same time the SELECT indicators for each channels are blink In the present status all channels are monitored EZ EDIT CONDITION PLAY ROUTING TSONG LOCATOR TRACK EFFECT SYSTEM Lo FECT FADER EDIT MASTER 2 Press the SELECT button for the channel you wish to monitor The SELECT indicator stays blink and only that chan nel is now monitored At this time you can make adjustments to fader balance equalizer effects and other settings 3 Monitor and Mute alternate each time you press SELECT button Furthermore you can monitor two or more channels However channels which were muted before the Solo function was turned on cannot be monitored even when their SELECT buttons are pressed Additionally when you are monitoring just one channel pressing the SELECT button of that channel allows you to then monitor all channels At this time you will
192. e overall output level 15 Preparations Recorder Section 1_ 2 1 TIME VALUE 3 5 J 6 PLAY 4 AA PARAMETER P EDIT CONDITION MsonG LOCATOR TRACK EFFECT M SYSTEM Song Select Track Copy EFFECT 1 System Pre Level Ne Move E MIDI Post Level inset E Te gt 14 inse el C SHIFT AA EF Time Gone Exp Ne initialize NO YES CD Wr Check CD Player Es 9 CD DAT Backup CANCEL ENTER LOCATOR AUTOMIX A UNUU MIDI Loc1 6 toc2 Loc3 M 0c 4 8 CLEAR SCENE VARI PITCH REDO DISK CLIC O O O OIOI q 1 STAT rot END 70 PREVIEW a 1 2 PREVIOUS NEXT TO FROM H TAP LOOP AUTO PUNCH NUMERICS SCRUB gt gt Li 3 IHOOOCEL J Ea GRADATION SNAP SHOT A THRU AA ZERO REW FF STOP PLAY REC 4 lt lt lt lt fo fa fe e STORE C SONG TOP SONG END C SHUT EJECT RESTART AUTOMIX REC EDIT CONDITION Buttons LOOP This button turns Loop Recording on The functions and parameters of the VS 880EX are organized within these buttons To use a desired oper ation press the appropriate button
193. e sound and MIDI Clock trans mitted from the VS 880EX follow the tempo map settings The following example indicates that a tempo map with time signature of 4 4 and quar ter note 120 begins at measure 1 Begining Measure Tempo Map Number Beat Tempo MEASURE 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 5 Press CURSOR b gt The cursor will move to the tempo display 6 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Tempo Sets the tempo map tempo 25 0 250 0 7 Press CURSOR b gt The cursor will move to the measure display MEA SURE field 8 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Measure Measure Selects the beginning measure 1 999 for each tempo map Tempo Map 1 is the song s initial tempo You cannot be changed or deleted the beginning measure setting of 1 9 Press CURSOR gt The cursor will move to the time signature display BEAT field 10 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Beat This sets the tempo map time signature 1 1 8 1 1 2 8 2 1 4 8 4 1 8 8 8 11 If you wish to change the tempo during the song press CURSOR b gt The cursor will move to the tempo map number dis play 12 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial clockwise lt New gt appears in the display 13 Press YES 14 Repeat steps 4 13 to specify the tempo map By rotating the TIME VALUE dial counterclockwise in step 12 you can modify a previously specified tempo starting measure time signature
194. e step 3 Recalling a Scene 1 Press Stop You cannot select a Scene during recording or playback 2 Press SCENE The SCENE indicator lights 3 At this point the LOC button 1 5 4 8 act to store or recall scene Indicators light for any LOC buttons 1 5 4 8 storing scene 4 Press a LOC button 1 5 4 8 whose button indicator lights For example if you want to recall the Scene 1 then press 1 5 If you wish to recall Scene 5 hold down SHIFT and press 1 5 5 Press SCENE once more The SCENE indicator will go dark If you wish to halt the recall procedure press SCENE before step 4 Recalling a Scene Without Affecting the Current Fader Values When a Scene is recalled the fader values will change to the recalled settings However the positions of the top panel s faders themselves do not change This means that the locations of the faders will not match their actual values If you want just the fader values to remain unchanged when you recall a Scene make the following settings 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Scene Auto Mix appears in the display 2 Press YES SYS Scene Mode appears in the display 3 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select KeepF 73 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings SYS Scene Mode This setting determines the fader settings when a Scene is recalled All This changes the mixer settings to those of the Scene being recal
195. e the buttons on the top panel like an ASCII key board for example when editing markers or locators using numerals 1 Press NUMERICS The NUMERICS indicator lights 2 Press the LOCATOR button The buttons can be used to enter numerals as indicat ed below LOCATOR Loc 1 6 Loc 2 8 Loc 3 0 Loc 4 8 CLEAR SCENE Oy 22 BI 43 5 CI nl NOM 70 g MARKER NEXT PREVIOUS LOOP AUTO PUNCH NUMERICS 16 173 8 9 Co GRADATION Snap shor Depend on parameters effect etc you can enter a minus sign by pressing 0 twice 3 After you have finished entering the numbers press ENTER YES This sets the numbers When using the numeric keys for input you can select whether to input the digits starting from the upper place or from the lower place Use the method with which you are most comfortable 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display 2 Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS NUMERICSType appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial NUMERICSType Numeric key type Select the input method for when using the LOCA TOR buttons as numeric keys Up Input from the lowest place Dwn Input from the highest place 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Example of entering numerals from lower to higher place dig
196. ecorded during track bouncing or when dealing with effects settings during mixdown there are settings which remain the same regardless of the song In such situations by preparing stored mixer settings to be recalled later you can easily get the most effective and appropriate mixer settings for each parameter At the time of purchase your VS 880EX came with three read only EZ Routing settings Preset Routings already configured In addition to these the VS 880EX offers 29 rewritable EZ Routing settings User Routings allowing you to make changes to the set tings provided and then save these to the User Routings Easy Routing can be used in the following situations Recording When you want to record the performance input via the INPUT jacks Mixdown When you want adjust the balance of each track or to record a MD player or similar input in two channel stereo Bouncing When recording the performance data from multiple tracks onto a number of other tracks Easy Routing can be set in the following two ways for recording mixdown and track bouncing respectively Template Recall a read only setting preset routing or a previ ously stored setting user routing without change Step Edit Reply to questions in dialog format to make settings in a logical sequence 74 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings Select this when you want to record the performance input via the INPUT jacks Recall a preset routing
197. ecovered is known as non destructive editing Track Edit To edit the sound you will need to specify the track or V track and the location where you wish to edit Only tracks or V tracks within the same V track bank can be selected for track editing For example it is not possible to copy or move track 1 V track 1 of V track bank A to V track bank B Bank A Bank B 1234567 8 12345 6 7 8 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Example of when track editing is possible Bank A Bank B 12345678 12345678 of RR OD AN oahRWD oN 0 Example of when track editing is not possible However Track Exchange p 92 is able to edit between different V track banks When you are selecting a track the bar display will indicate the track selection status The numbers on the horizontal axis are the track numbers and the num bers on the vertical axis are the V track numbers Locations corresponding to tracks which contain data will light Tracks which are selected for modification will blink Copy source track Copy destination track CONDITION MARKER SGT li AB LR 48 AUX MASTER 123 4 3678 INPUT RACK V Track bank blinking At this time you can view a Play List in the bar dis play Hold
198. ected Rotate the TIME VALUE dial I 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER FX1 Ins Effect 1 Insert Switch This sets how the effects are connected Insert Inserts in the between the equalizer and fader InsertL Inserts in the left channel of the stereo effect InsertR Inserts in the right channel of the stereo effect InsertS Inserts in the combined left and right chan nels of the stereo effect in series Insert L L EQ Ne R R Insert L EQ L L 2band 3band Insert R EQ FX 2band 3band R R Insert S a HEY 2band 3band sua 03 R R When Insert or Insert S is selected that effect cannot be used on any other channel Furthermore when Insert L or Insert R is selected that effect can be inserted on only one other channel 4 Press PARAMETER FX1 Ins Send appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Ins Send Insert Send Level This adjusts the level of the signal 0 127 sent to the Insert effect Set the initial value to 100 6 Press PARAMETER gt FX1 Ins Rtn appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Ins Rtn Insert Return Level This adjusts the level of the signal 0 127 returned from the Insert effect Set the initial value to 100 8 At this point you are ready to insert FX1 into the selected channel Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 9 You can insert FX2 in the same way In this cas
199. eerrerrnnncnn arar narararnnannnrnraras 101 Saving Performance Data to a Zip Drive Song COPY oncocccnccccnconinnnaccccnanccnnnannnnnncns 102 Saving a Song to a Single Disk Playable ooooonncccnnnccnnnncccnncconncrcnnncccncnrrnan arranco 103 To Load Data from Disks Drive Select oooooinicnninndninnccnnnnnnnncconacccnnnnarnnnnrccnn nn 104 When You Cannot Save a Song to a Single Disk Archives oooonnninnnncnncnnnnimmncoo 105 Saving to DiskKs Store rrei tt ai a A a i i 105 Loading Data From Disks Extract ooonoconinnnnonoconononononacananonononononanonononononanononononananonononos 106 About POWEr SAVE MOE cooocoocccccnonoccccnnnnnnnccnnn nan nc cnn EAE EAA EAAS rr 106 Chapter 8 Use with a CD RW Drive ooooooconncccnncccccccnoncnonnnnos 107 Before You Use a CD RW DIE di AAA caniidevaaatbidted 107 Handling the CD RW Drive coccononeneconnnnnnonnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnorarnnonnnnnrarnnnnnnnananarnanararnnannn raras 107 Handling CDRW Discs isien etea naese oei aenean ashara lacsadaa sales sve ceeastataede eves 107 Connecting the CD RW Drive ceccceessceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeseeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeesiaaeeneaeees 107 Creating an Audio CD aiii lat idad ia 108 Items Necessary for Creating an Audio CD conococonenenonnnnnnnnnnnnncnrnnennnnnnnnnnerararnnnnnnnraros 108 Creating a Master Datasiirto she eieae data oe ersa ie an anidan dao dior ae des dnd eiiie 108 Writing Songs to CD R DISCS cocecocinonononnonenencncnacnnnnenenacornnnnnnnnrnnnrnorar
200. en completed Complete appears in the display 17 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 125 Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices Delaying Sync Track and Tempo Map Start Times Usually a sync track or tempo map is created with 00h00m00s00f00 as the beginning of the song However recording usually doesn t actually start from 00h00m00s00f00 In this kind of situation you can determine how much later recording begins after the start of the song This time is referred to as offset For example if you want recording to begin ten sec onds after the start of the song with time to spare set the offset time to 00h00m10s00f00 During recording or playback when the beginning of a sync track or tempo map is reached the start message is sent from the MIDI OUT connector This is convenient when you wish to synchronize operation with an external MIDI sequencer 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS Ofs appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Ofs Offset Specify the time at which the sync track tempo map will begin Using NUMERICS NUMERICS allows you to use the ten LOCA TOR buttons as numeric keys to input numbers directly Refer to Directly Inputting Numeric Characters p 153 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play co
201. er editing situa tions In such instances you can specify the amount of time for playback leading up to or following a desig nated point as well as monitor the data on the tracks while gradually shifting the current time in the song This is referred to as the Preview function There are four Preview buttons and each one works differently Select the one whose function is most appropriate for what you are trying to accomplish You can set the length of playback time for the tracks you want to monitor for 1 0 10 0 seconds leading up to or starting from the current point in the song Press each buttons while the song is stopped TO A preview of the song is played back one time for the specified period of time up to the current time in the song Preview To FROM A preview of the song is played back one time for the specified period of time start ing from the current time in the song Preview From TO FROM A preview of the song is played back for the specified period of time both up to and from the designated point in the song i e with the current time placed at the center of the playback Preview To Preview From Current Time Preview Length 1 gt Time PREVIEW TO PREVIEW FROM PREVIEW THRU Finding the Location Where the Sound Begins example 1 While pressing STOP press the STATUS button for the track you want to monitor The STATUS indicator lights green 2 Press PLAY
202. er or not the digitally mixed down tape can be later copied digitally If you wish to prohibit digital copying set this On Off Digital copying is not prohibited On Digital copying is prohibited 4 Press PLAY DISPLAY Returns to Play condition With this procedure you have made it so that your digitally mixed master tapes cannot be later copied digitally onto DAT tapes or similar digital media Some DAT recorders do not conform to SCMS standards or cannot be connected digitally to CD players If you are using such a DAT recorder then if you set the Digital Protect Switch to On the digital output from the VS 880EX cannot be copied to the DAT recorder In such instances set the Digital Protect Switch to Off 9 SCMS Appendices p 124 Protecting Songs Song Protect The possibility that a performance saved to the disk may still be mistakenly overwritten recorded over or that the song itself may be accidentally deleted has been considered You can protect songs from being rewritten in situations such as these The function is called Song Protect Turning on Song Protect disables the following opera tions e Recording e Undo and Redo e Song Name Song Optimize e Track Edit e Recording to Sync Tracks e Creating Tempo Maps e Song Store About Effective Use Song Protect performs the same function as the protect tab or switch on floppy disks and magnet optical disks Thus eve
203. eration to be completed This is not a malfunction Do not turn the power off until the Optimize operation is completed 156 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions When you are making a master tape or backing up songs to a Zip disk this operation deletes song data that has become unnecessary This operation cannot be undone with the Undo function 1 Select the drive contains the song you want to erase as the current drive 2 Press SONG several times until SNG Song Erase appears in the display 3 Press YES The names of the songs stored on the current drive will appear An asterisk Q will appear at the begin ning of the current song 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Select the song that you wish to erase Song Number Song Name AUX MASTER Sample Rate Recording Mode Press YES A confirmation message appears in the display Press YES If you wish to cancel the procedure then press CANCEL NO 7 Ifthe song you are erasing is not the current song STORE Current then appears in the display 8 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 9 When the song has been erased return to Play condition If the current song has been erased the lowest numbered song in the current drive will be selected as the current song Changing the Name of Performance Data Song Name
204. ess record over the places where they occurred punch in punch out 5 Adjust the volume level pan equalization and other settings for each part 6 If you run out of empty tracks you can marge the contents of two or more tracks onto a different track track bouncing 7 Mix down the tracks to your recorder and make a master tape Well it s time to try multi track recording This will be explained using concrete examples Connecting Instruments 1 Turn down the master fader as low as possible 2 Connect instruments and microphones to the INPUT jacks Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers This can be remedied by 1 Changing the orientation of the microphone s 2 Relocating microphone s at a greater distance from speakers 3 Lowering volume levels 41 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording Recording to the Tracks 1 Select a recording track While holding down REC press the STATUS button for the track to which you want to record The STATUS indicator blinks red 2 Switch to the input mixer Press FADER EDIT several times to let the FADER indicator light orange Select source to be recorded to the track While holding down the STATUS button for the track to which you want to record press the SELECT but ton for the input channel whose source you want assigned to the track The SELECT indicator blinks INPUT TRACK CIFX RIN
205. ess YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 15 f you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 16 After the initialization is completed correctly the VS 880EX restarts automatically and return to Play condition Be aware that initializing a drive requires some time This is not a malfunction For example when physical format ting is turned on the time required to format one Zip disk is approximately 10 minutes The progress of initializa tion will be shown in the display Be sure not to turn the power off until initialization is complete When initializing a hard disk or other disk you can confirm that the read and write functions in all of the disk partitions are operating correctly This is referred to as Surface Scan If there are any places on the disk where the reading or writing of data cannot be per formed the VS 880EX registers this as unusable memory Recording and playback then become unavailable at that location Performing this procedure deletes all contents saved on the disk Conduct this check when initializing newly purchased disks or disks which previously have been used with a personal computer or other device Be sure to make a backup copy of any disk you are presently using on the VS 880EX before carrying out the procedure on it 1 Set Surface Scan to On and as described in Ini
206. essages or mixer parameter settings control change messages or exclusive messages Thru MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN con nector will be retransmitted from the connector without change 6 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt gt gt several times until SYS Gen appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Gen Generator This selects the type of synchronization signal that will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector At this point select SyncTr Off Synchronization signals are not transmitted MTC MIDI Time Code is transmitted MIDICIk MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map is transmitted SyncTr MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track is transmitted 10 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 11 Set your MIDI sequencer so that it can operate according to the MIDI Clock messages received from external devices and set it so that it can play back MIDI song data When playback begins on the VS 880EX the MIDI sequencer begins play back as well If your MIDI sequencer supports Song Position Pointer messages you can use the MIDI Clock to syn chronize operations There are two methods of syn chronization using the MIDI Clock one is using the sync track and the other one is using the tempo map This section gives an explanation of how to control the MIDI sequencer from the VS 8
207. ettings Method 1 record a Snapshot with the time locations at which you want Gradation to begin and end Confirm that Auto Mix mode is on Select the channels which you want to record using Auto Mix While pressing AUTOMIX so that the button indicators to blink press the each channel SELECT button or EZ ROUTING Master Block 4 Hold down AUTOMIX and press PREVIOUS or NEXT 5 A confirmation message appears on the screen Press YES A new mark point is automatically added between the two mark points and Gradation is executed Press CANCEL NO if you wish to cancel Gradation When the current time is included in an adjacent marker Press either AUTOMIX and PREVIOUS or AUTOMIX and NEXT the gradation range will be specified in a same range prvou AUTOMIX AUTOMIX ngr VARI PITCH VARI PITCH m Marker 2 Gradation Range When the current time matches with a marker When you press AUTOMIX and PREVIOUS the gradation includes the preceding marker pressing AUTOMIX and NEXT creates a gradation including the following marker ree AUTOMX po aru ou vani PITCH 8 a Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Gradation Range Gradation Range 6 Press AUTOMIX The AUTOMIX indicator light goes off With this method time based both channel fader and master fader movement during play back song are recorded to the marker directly This method is referred to
208. eturn to Play condition 183 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples Synchronizing with Video Equipment 184 When used in combination with the Roland SI 80S you can control playback and stop functions on the VS 880EX with video equipment featuring a consumer video interface that conforms to RCTC time code Make the connections as shown below and refer to the SI 80S owner s manual and the owner s manual for your video device L CONNECTORS IN IDI SYNC OUT MTC MIDI IN gt ao ESO JE y Video Cassette Recorder qoooo gogg PS oon rail BEA 60000 o ols ajo ee ee ee 1 c J SI 808 JololoJoJolojolo o ha Y JO na Cope po VS 880EX 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS MIDI PRM appears in the dis play 2 Press YES 3 Press PARAMETER B several times until SYS MID SysEx Rx appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial SysEx Rx System Exclusive Receive Sw itch Exclusive messages are received when this is set to On At this time set this to On The Exclusive messages can be received when the VS 880EX is in Play condition 5 Press PARAMETER b gt SYS MID MMC appears in the d
209. eturn to Play condition Hold down SHIFT and press EDIT FADER Press PARAMETER lt a gt gt Jo let AUX Out appears in the display 3 Determine what is to be output from the AUX jacks by rotating the TIME VALUE dial AUX Out In the example AUX CONDITION MARKER 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER AUX Out This selects what sounds are heard through the AUX jacks AUX The sounds assigned to the AUX bus FX1 The sounds assigned to the FX1 EFFECT bus FX2 The sounds assigned to the FX2 EFFECT bus 4 Press PARAMETER bb 5 AUX Level appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the volume of the sound that is output from the AUX jacks This value is linked with AUX SEND knob on the top panel Press PARAMETER gt AUX Bal appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the left right balance of the sound that is output from the AUX jacks 8 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Hold down SHIFT and press EDIT FADER 2 Press PARAMETER lt gt gt to let DigitalOut1 appears in the display 3 Determine what is to be output from the DIGI TAL OUT1 connectors by rotating the TIME VALUE dial Digital Out 1 In the example MST CONDITION MARKER TIME D 8 s 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER DOUT1 DIGITAL OUT1 This selects what sounds are heard through the DIGI
210. f you try to do this the disk is identified as being an uninitialized disk Here we will explain the example of when a Zip drive with SCSI ID number 5 is connected as an external disk drive 1 Make the drive internal hard disk containing the song you want to copy the current drive Insert a disk into the Zip drive 3 Press SONG several times until SNG Song Copy appears in the display 4 Press YES SNG CpyMode appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Here select Archives CpyMode Select how the song will be copied Playable Playable type Archives Archives type 6 Press PARAMETER gt SNG ArcTarget appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to copy the current song select 1 Song To copy all songs from the current drive select All 8 Press PARAMETER gt SNG Arc Drive appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Select the copy destination disk drive For this operation you will be able to select only removable disk drives which are connected to the SCSI connector It is not pos sible to select the current drive the internal hard disk as the copy destination drive For example if you wish to copy to a Zip disk select SC5 0 10 Press PARAMETER B gt SNG Arc Func appears in the display 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Here select Store Arc Func Archi
211. ff Normally this is set to On 5 Hold down SHIFT and press STORE ZERO STORE OK appears in the display 6 Press YES The song is saved 7 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition The changed setting becomes effective from the next time when the VS 880EX is turned on 167 Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions You can designate the level at which the peak indica tor lights for sounds input via the INPUT jacks 1 6 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until Peak Level appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Peak Level This sets the volume level at which the peak indicator lights CLIP The indicator lights when the sound distorts 3dB The indicator lights 3 dB before the sound dis torts 6dB The indicator lights 6 dB before the sound dis torts 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Overall Settings for Playback and Recording These are settings related to the overall workings of the Play and Record functions On channels for which Track Status is set to REC playing back the song in record ready mode REC indicator blinking will allow you to monitor the per formance that is recorded in the track and during recording REC indicator lit you will be able to moni tor the input source At this time p
212. g Optical OUTPUT DIGITAL 7 8 FOOT PHONES MASTER__ IN 1 SWITCH R L MOC O O noo DAT Recorder 134 Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder DAT Backup Coaxial OUTPUT DIGITAL 7 8 FOOT PHONES MASTER_ IN1 SWITCH R L O 4 DIGITAL 7 8 F FEN A en E OUT2 IN2 Digital Out Hao Y oaod AAA O 00 DAT Recorder 2 Insert the tape which contains the song data into the DAT recorder If the song data is backed up on two or more tapes insert the first tape 3 Prepare the tape for playback from the beginning of the song data 4 Press SONG several times until SNG DAT Recover appears in the display 5 Press YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 6 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 7 D IN Sel appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial D IN Sel Digital In Select Select either DIGIN1 coaxial or DIGIN2 optical if you are going to recover data using the VS 880EX s DIGITAL IN connector 8 Press PARAMETER P thrice Verify Ready appears in the display
213. g LOOP press PREVIOUS LOCATOR toc1 G Loc2 8 0c3 M 0c 4 8 CLEAR SCENE O O O O O O 1 2 3 4 5 START FROM END TO MA PREVIOUS NEXT Ke Lal TAP LOOP AUTO PUNCH NUMERICS DI jl O H SNAP SHOT 47 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording Specifying The Points While the Song Plays Back 1 Press PLAY to begin playback of the song 2 When you reach the desired location for the beginning of the loop hold down LOOP and press TAP 3 Continue holding down LOOP and when you reach the desired location for the end of the loop press TAP once again 4 Press STOP LOCATOR Loc 1 B Loc2 8 0c3 M Loc4 8 CLEAR SCENE CI LJ C 3 1 2 Lo START FROM END TO 5 PREVIOUS NEXT Ke Lal TAP LOOP AUTO PUNCH NUMERICS J tJ Making Fine Adjustments to the Loop 1 Press LOCATOR several times until LOC LpSt appears in the display CONDITION MARKER TIME 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 2 The loop start time will be displayed If no loop start time has been specified the display will indi cate h m s f Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the time 3 Press PARAMETER gt LOC LpEd appears in the display 4
214. g the STATUS button for Track 5 or 6 press the SELECT buttons on Channels 5 and 6 The SELECT indicator which had been blinking orange will go dark 12 Now Tracks 1 4 can be monitored on Channels 5 6 Adjust the Pan for Each Track 13 Press the Channel 1 CH EDIT SELECT The CH EDIT indicator lights 14 Press PARAMETER B several times until MIX Sw appears in the display 15 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIX Sw Mix Switch This selects the bus to which the source or track out put will be assigned For this example select On On The source or track will be sent to the mix bus Set this to On when for example you simply want to mix the inputs without recording the source However the sources that are assigned to the RECORDING bus are disabled Off The source or track will not be assigned to the mix bus If it is not assigned to a recording bus either then that source track will not be output anywhere 16 Press PARAMETER gt 17 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIX Pan This adjusts the pan setting L63 0 R63 of the signal sent to the MIX bus and the RECORDING bus 18 Repeat Steps 13 17 if you wish to make adjust ments to other pans 19 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 20 Press FADER EDIT The FADER indicators light green Track Mixer 60 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording 21 Press PLAY to begin playback of the song 22 Adjust the v
215. gt Sel appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the song you want to convert Song Type In the example VS 880 EX s song Song Number Song Name ODE SCENE REMP NING TIME INPUSIRACK AUX MASTER Sample Rate Recording Mode 9 Press YES A confirmation message appears in the display 10 Press YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 11 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 12 After Song Import is completed return to Play condition You can convert the current song for use with a VS 880 and copy it as a new songs to a Zip drive connect ed to the VS 880EX s SCSI connector This is referred to as Song Export e All song data including mixer settings such as equalizer and Stereo Link system settings such as sync tracks and Tempo Maps locate and mark points effects settings and so on are copied e Song data in the V track bank A Tracks 1 8 V tracks 1 8 is Song Exported Please copy the data in the V track bank B to the V track bank A before hand by using Track Exchange P 92 e The sample rate and recording mode of the newly created song will be the same as the original song e If there is insufficient free space on the conversion destination drive Song Export cannot be carried out Here we will explain the pro
216. h free space or when recording live perfor mances 6 Press YES Create New Sure appears in the display 7 Press YES STORE Current appears in the display 8 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 9 When a new song has been created you will return to Play condition The newly created song will be selected as the song for recording playback About Recording Time The recording time track minutes of both sam pling rate and recording mode are as shown below for one track with 2 GB free space 2 Track Minutes Appendices p 125 Recording Sample Rate Mode 48 0 kHz 44 1 kHz 32 0 kHz MAS 185 185 mins 202 202 mins 278 278 mins MT1 371 371 mins 404 404 mins 557 557 mins MT2 495 495 mins 539 539 mins 742 742 mins LIV 5944594 mins 646 646 mins 891 891 mins All times approximate The above chart is a general yardstick for estimating recording times Actual times may be somewhat shorter depending on your hard disk s specifications or the number of songs created 40 If Drive Busy is Displayed If this message appears during recording or play back it means that the disk drive cannot catch up with the data read write speed In such instances create a new song which lower the sample rate or recording mode from their current settings and record over
217. hat track and press CANCEL NO twice 10 Press PARAMETER gt gt gt several times until TRK St appears in the display 89 Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance Track Editing 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial St Start point Specifies the starting time of the copy range 12 Press PARAMETER gt TRK Frm appears in the display 13 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Frm From point Specifies the time of the copy source playback data in relation to the To point Normally you will set this to be the same as the Start point Using Frm Effectively Normally the data is copied starting at the speci fied copy destination time However if you want to have the copy made with reference to a point within the designated range where a specific sound occurs set this with Frm For example suppose that you wish to copy a sound effect of a time bomb ticking and then exploding and that you want to place the explo sion at a specific timing location Normally in order to specify the copy destination time you would have to calculate the time until the explo sion occurs In such cases however you can spec ify Frm as the copy source time at which the explosion begins and TO the reference time of the copy destination as the copy destination time at which you want the explosion to occur This lets you copy the data with the explosion placed with precise
218. have selected a demo song then press NO 16 Please Play DAT appears in the display Rewind the tape and then put the DAT recorder in play mode 17 Loading of the song data begins If you have backed up the data to multiple tapes then the operation is suspended when the end of each tape is reached Insert the number tape indicated in the display press YES and start the DAT recorder playing again 18 When the recover procedure is finished Please Stop DAT appears in the display Stop the DAT recorder then press YES 19 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition To cancel this operation press CANCEL NO Checking the Recording Condition of Saved Performance Data Verify This operation checks the condition of song data that was recorded to DAT tape However it does not per form a comparison of the song data on the hard disk and the tape If results of the DAT verify operation warns that data is not recorded correctly it is possible that the tape has been scratched or stretched If the original song data still exists in the disk drive perform the backup opera tion once again to a different DAT tape When performing DAT backups in order to confirm that the data indeed has been properly backed up we recom mend that you carry out the Verify procedure as well 1 Connect the DAT recorder to the VS 880EX as fol lowin
219. he VS 880EX playable on ordinary CD players write a TOC Table of Contents This is referred to as Finalize CD R discs that have undergone the finalize procedure can no longer have additional material written to them 9 Finalize Appendices p 123 2 TOC Appendices p 125 1 Press SONG until SNG CD R Write appears in the display 2 Press YES Scanning CD R appears in the display The VS 880EX is checking the SCSI ID of the connected CD RW drive and displays the next ID number for a set time SNG Write Finalize appears in the display 112 Chapter 8 Use with a CD RW Drive 3 Press PARAMETER Bb until SNG Finalize appears in the display 4 Press YES Finalize Sure appears in the display 5 Press YES Obey Copyrights is displayed 6 Carefully read the License Agreement p 39 if you agree to the terms press YES CONDITION MARKER aes 12345678 AB LR AUX MASTER INPUT TRACK 7 After Complete appears in the display the VS 880EX returns to conditions at Step 1 If you do not agree to the terms of the license press NO The VS 880EX returns to conditions at Step 1 Now you can arrange the writing and finalization of the song data as has been described thus far Carry out the procedure as follows Insert the CD R disc into the CD RW drive Press SONG until SNG CD R Write appears in the display 3
220. he available hard disk space and in order to get the fullest performance in gener al from the VS 880EX we recommend using the 2 1 GB or larger Hard Disk CD R Drive designated by Roland A CD R drive connected with a SCSI connector With this drive you can write songs created on the VS 880EX as well as create your own original audio CDs Additionally you can use it for backing up songs to CD R discs SI 80S This is a video MIDI sync interface for connection to the MIDI connector VS 880EX operations such as play stop forward can be synchronized from a video device with a LANC connector 13 Front and Rear Panels Mixer Section i i ae Es 5 gt OF i INPUT PHONES OPEAK 2 OPEAK 3 OPEAK 4 OPEAK 5 OPEAK 6 OPEAK 7 8 Q MIC 0 MIC MIC MIC O MIC O MIC 10 PAN PAN ry SEND LR LR LR Or R C INPUT C TRACK C FX RTN SELECT CHEDT grin FXIRTN FX2RTN EZ 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 ROUTING 9 MTrack EQ Low EQ Mid EQHi Aux Send EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 SOLO J SOURCE O REC PLAY O OFF FADER STATUS o i f AMAN lt a 1 Z A 5 C 6 E lL 8 MASTER murc aux 6
221. iccnnncccccnccnnnnos 131 When Canceling the Recover Operation csccseeescsseseseeceneesesesnsneeseseecenessseseanenens 132 Checking Names of Saved Performance Data Name s an 133 Checking the Recording Condition of Saved Performance Data Verify 134 Chapter 11 Compatibility ooooonnncnnicicnnnnonicanananacanananennnnnnos 136 Disk Compatibility sisrate annie aicaves needles a aie ete 136 VS O80 VO BOE nda Odd eins A A oe 136 VS 880EX y AAA A O occa uel lect tel alsa 136 Woe GSO 29 VS 880EX coito tiore ia iia Do eb 136 MESE MOLDEO titulo dica 137 Wis AS VO 1e i D lod aa ao er a a A ARS aan 137 Song Data Compatibility oooooooonnncdininnicinncccnnncnnnnccnn conc n cnn nr cra 137 Loading VS 880 Performance Data into the VS 880EX Song Import cocccocica 137 Converting VS 880EX Song Data for Use with the VS 880 Song Export 138 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions oocccccccccccnccnnne 140 Previewing Techniques Preview ccecseecceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesneeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeneaaes 140 Using TO FROM invitaron A A 140 Using SERUB iei Senn b tno dik eave all 141 Recalling a Specific Location JUMP ceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeaeeneaes 142 Recording Mixer Settings Auto MIX ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeseseeeceaeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeaeeneaes 142 Preparations for Auto MIX cecccceccesessesescececesescsnsneneseseseesesesescecesesesesnaenesese
222. ices or when you want external MIDI devices to be controlled by synchronization signals from the VS 880EX EXT The VS 880EX is controlled with synchroniza tion signals MTC from the connected external MIDI device In this case the VS 880EX does not operate unless it is receiving MTC signals Select this setting when you want to use the MTC from an external MIDI device to control the VS 880EX 14 Press PARAMETER gt SYS Syn Gen appears in the display 15 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Gen Generator This selects the type of synchronization signal trans mitted from the MIDI OUT connector For now set this to MTC Off Synchronization signals are not transmitted MTC MIDI Time Code is transmitted MIDICIk MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map is transmitted SyncTr MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track is transmitted 174 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples 16 Press PARAMETER gt gt gt several times until SYS Syn MTC Type appears in the display 17 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MTC Type MTC Type This selects the type of MTC 30 29N 29D 25 or 24 Set this to conform to the type of MTC on the slave VS 880EX Here select 30 18 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Make the settings for Cakewalk Pro Audio as described below For more detailed information about Cakewalk please refer to the Cakewalk owner s m
223. il SYS MIDI PRM appears in the display 3 Press YES Press PARAMETER several times until SYS MID MIDIThr appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIDI Thru MIDI Thru Switch This selects the function of the MIDI OUT THRU con nector For now select Out Out The connector transmits MIDI messages from the VS 880EX Select this when you want to transmit metronome Note messages or mixer parameter settings control change messages or exclusive messages Thru MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN con nector will be retransmitted from the connector without change 117 Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices 6 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS Gen appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Gen Generator This selects the type of synchronization signal that will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector At this point select MTC Off Synchronization signals are not transmitted MTC MIDI Time Code is transmitted MIDICIk MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map is transmitted SyncTr MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track is transmitted 10 Press PARAMETER gt SYS MTC Type appears in the display 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MTC Type This selects the MTC type 30 29N 29D 25 24 Select the MTC that m
224. il the sound begins precisely The sound waveform being played back will be dis played for your reference Waveform display INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER Displayed blinking Scrub Length 7 Now you can easily find the precise location where the sound begins Press SCRUB once more The SCRUB indicator light goes off 8 Place a marker at the current time or store the cur rent time in a locator so that you will be able to easily find it later Adjusting the Scrub Length 1 Hold down SHIFT and press SCRUB 2 The Scrub Length is displayed Rotate the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the time Press SCRUB to check the actual playback time Scrub Length 45 msec s8 12345678 AB LR AUX MASTER INPUT TRACK Scrub Length This sets a length 25 100 msec of playback time when the Preview function SCRUB button is pressed 3 After you have finished making the settings press PLAY DISPLAY The initial display reappears 141 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions Recalling a Specific Location Jump Besides using the TIME VALUE dial markers and locators to move the current time of the song you can also directly specify a location or measure and beat to be recalled This is convenient when designating loca tions during Track Edit Press PLAY DISPLAY If you wish to directly recall a marker time loca tion use CURSOR a gt to make the MAR
225. important data we rec ommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit s memory on a storage device e g hard disk or Zip disk or DAT recorder O Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored on a storage device e g hard disk or Zip disk or DAT recorder once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no lia bility concerning such loss of data O Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions O Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display O A small amount of noise may be heard from the dis play during normal operation When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal operation O To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be con cerned about those around you especially when it is late at night When you need to transport the unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possi ble Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials If an internal IDE hard di
226. ing from the moni tors 5 During playback of the song each time the button is pressed the monitor switches between source and track Using the input sensitivity knob adjust the volume of the source so that it matches that of the prerecorded performance 6 Once you have adjusted the input sensitivity press STOP 46 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording 7 Press AUTO PUNCH The AUTO PUNCH indicator lights and Auto Punch In Recording is enabled 8 Move to a previous locate point where you want to re record 9 Press REC 10 Press PLAY again Playback of the song begins 11 The VS 880EX automatically goes into record mode at the point where the punch in is set Start the song or performance now 12 When you reach the point where the punch out is set the VS 880EX automatically returns to play back mode Press STOP to stop the song 13 Listen to the results of the rerecording Return to the beginning of the song and press PLAY You can repeatedly play back a specified area the loop and use Auto Punch In Recording in that area This is called Loop Recording This is convenient for when you want to check the results immediately after recording or if you want to record a number of takes of a guitar solo and compare the different takes Loop start Punch in Punch out Loop end Time 4 i i CEs E REC REC AUTOMIX REC AUTOMIX REC Before you begin recording specify th
227. ing partition sizes and numbers of tracks there will be limitations as to what you can do For more detailed information please see Compatibility p 136 The VS 880EX accepts installation of Internal hard disks desinated by Roland For simultaneous recording or playback of a number of tracks for getting more out of the available hard disk space and in order to get the fullest performance in general from the VS 880EX we recom mend using the 2 1 GB or larger Internal Hard Disk 22 The location where a performance data is recorded is refered to as the song For example on a cassette MTR this would correspond to cassette tape Up to 200 songs can be created in each partition Normally you should set the partition size at 1000 MB When dealing with large numbers of songs at the same time setting the partition size to 500 MB is recommended The song currently being recorded played back or edited is referred to as the current song Following data are included in a song e All data recorded on V tracks e MIDI clocks of the sync track e Points specified within songs locator marker punch in out points loop in out points p 36 e Scenes mixer settings e Vari Pitch settings p 152 e System settings system MIDI disk sync Scene p 164 e Effect settings e Auto Mix Data On the VS 880EX the recorder section and mixer sec tion use term sources tracks and channels These terms may appear similar to e
228. ing the VS 880EX itself or a connected device About the License Agreement The VS 880EX and its CD R capability are designed to allow you to reproduce material to which you have copyright or material which the copyright owner has granted you permission to copy Accordingly repro duction of music CDs or other copyrighted material without the permission of the copyright owner other than for your own personal use and enjoyment pri vate use constitutes copyright infringement which may incur penalties Consult a copyright specialist or special publications for more detailed information on obtaining such permission from copyright holders Preparations oonan anat aeaaea a aa aeaa aaia diaaa diaa 12 About the Package Contents cccccececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeesaaeeeeneeeseaeeesaeeees 12 M in Features aa O il de dorada 12 Front and Rear Panels ssscsssssssssnsesseesenennensnenennenees 14 AAA o POCO 14 RECO Sr SOCIO ar A A ected hice 16 Display Section ii A Ai diz 18 Gar Panel und AS A A 19 Chapter 1 Before You Start VS 880EX Terminology 21 Saving and Managing Data siiis ena a ae a aa a a cnn nc nnana canos 21 Managing Disk Contents Partitioning oocccooononcnnonnnncnnencncnecanannnnnnnrnrornnnnnnnararanoos 21 The Location Where a Performance is Recorded Song cccccccccnnonicinanononananinaninononononos 22 Sources Tracks and Channels ccccccccsscssecsscessesscesseecesceeses
229. ing those for recording track bouncing and mixdown EZ Routing Effects Section A Effect is built in This allows you to use up to two stereo effects when the VS 880 EX is used by itself The effect provides not only basic effects such as reverb and delay but also effects ideal for vocals and guitar such as guitar amp simulator and even special effects such as RSS The way in which each of these effects are organized by the 34 algorithms so that you can create new sounds easily The effect provides 210 read only effects setting Preset Patches which designed for various uses In addition the effect provides 100 read and write effects setting User Patches for changing and saving that contents You can instantly switch between a variety of effects simply by selecting a patch The VS 880EX can be operated as easily as convention al multi track recorders You will be able to enjoy the advantages of home studio from the day that you pur chase it The custom LCD screen provides visual confirmation of many settings at once In particular the bar display provides a graphical indication of the level meter pan and fader settings and the track record status The LCD screen is backlit and inclined so it is easy to read when used on stage or wherever high visibility is required 12 Preparations There are six sets of balanced input jacks handling a wide input sensitivity range from line level 4 dBu to mic
230. initial value to 100 11 Press PARAMETER P gt EFFECT1 Pan appears in the display 12 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial 13 In the same way as in steps 7 12 make settings so that reverb is applied to tracks 24 as well 14 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition EFFECT1 Pan Effect 1 Send Pan This adjusts the stereo placement of the signal L63 0 R63 sent to the EFFECT 1 bus Specify the Tracks for Playback and Recording 15 Press CH EDIT SELECT for Track 5 16 Press PARAMETER lt lt PP until Channel link appears in the display 17 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select On 18 Press PLAY DISPLAY 19 While pressing STOP press the STATUS buttons for Tracks 14 The STATUS indicators light green 20 Press the STATUS buttons for Track 5 or 6 to let the STATUS indicators light orange 21 While pressing the STATUS button for Track 5 or 6 press the SELECT buttons on Track Channels 14 The SELECT indicators blink 22 Press FADER EDIT several times to light red the FADER indicator 23 While pressing the STATUS button for Track 5 or 6 press the Channel 7 FX RTN SELECT The SELECT indicators blink 24 Usually the source entering the INPUT 5 6 jacks is also assigned for recording on Tracks 5 When you want to record only the material on Tracks 1 4 use the following procedure 25 Press FADER EDID The FADER indicators light orange Input M
231. ion damaged does not interfere with its proper ventilation 11 Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described 6 The product should be located away from heat sources such in the user maintenance instructions All other servicing as radiators heat registers or other products that produce should be referred to qualified service personnel heat 7 The product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the product For the USA GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS This product must be grounded If it should malfunction or breakdown grounding provides a path of least resistance for electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock This product is equipped with a cord having an equipment grounding conductor and a grounding plug The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances DANGER Improper connection of the equipment grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock Check with a qualified electrician or serviceman if you are in doubt as to whether the product is properly grounded Do not modify the plug provided with the product if it will not fit the outlet have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician For the U K WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CO
232. isk is necessary for this procedure Furthermore internal IDE hard disk must has a enough free space on the hard disk for the creation of the image data file Regardless of partition settings all free space on the inter nal hard disk may be accessed by the image data file After writing of the image data file to the CD R disc is complet ed it is automatically deleted With the CD RW disc you can record the audio data and create audio CDs But it is impossible to play back this audio data recorded in the CD RW disc with the common CD players even if the disc is finalized Please use CD R disc to play back with the common CD players Audio data in the CD RW disc can be played back with CD Player Function on VS series You can overwrite the audio data in the CD RW disc repeatedly So it is conve nient for making a trial copy before you create final audio CDs with the multiple CD R discs VS 880EX 1 CD RW drive designated by Roland 1 Internal IDE hard disk 1 Blank CD R Compact Disc Recordable disc Audio equipment to be connected to the MASTER jacks or stereo headphones What is written to the CD R disc is performance data of the current song in two tracks stereo tracks This is not the performance data that can be heard from the output from the MASTER jacks or PHONES jack Song data that can be written to CD R discs for the creation of original audio CDs must satisfy the following con ditions Check
233. isplay 6 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MMC MMC Mode This setting determines how the VS 880EX implements MMC Set this to SLAVE Off MMC is neither transmitted nor received MASTER MMC is transmitted The VS 880EX functions as the master device for external MIDI equipment SLAVE MMC is received The VS 880EX functions as a slave device for external MIDI equipment 7 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the dis play Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples 8 Press YES 9 Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS Syn ErrLevel appears in the display 10 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial ErrLevel Error Level This sets the interval 0 10 for checking MTC receiv ing status when synchronize VS 880EX with MTC from an external MIDI device If the MTC is not being sent continuously the VS 880EX checks the MTC and if there is an error cancels synchronization By setting a longer interval under such circumstances synchro nization can continue even if there is a certain degree of error Normally set this to 5 11 Press PARAMETER gt SYS Syn MTC Type appears in the display 12 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MTC Type MTC Type This selects the type of MTC 30 29N 29D 25 or 24 Set this to conform to the type of MTC on the slave VS 880EX Here select 30 13 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to P
234. its For example let s see how 01h23m45s00f is input when the NUMERICS Type is set to Up 1 Press NUMERICS The NUMERICS indicator lights 2 The cursor appears at the digit furthest to the right in the lowest place Press the LOCA TOR buttons 1 2 3 4 5 0 and 0 in that order The numerals appear in the place furthest to the right and shift to higher places as other numerals are entered You can also move the cursor to the desired place by pressing the CURSOR fl and gt 3 When you are finished inputting the number press ENTER YES The numerical value is set and the button indica tor goes off Example of entering numerals from higher to lower place digits Now let s see how 01h23m45s00f is input when the NUMERICS Type is set to Down 1 Press NUMERICS The button indicator lights and the current time in the song is displayed 2 The cursor appears in the digit furthest to the left the highest place Press the LOCATOR buttons 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 and 0 in that order The numerals appear from left to right just as they are entered You can also move the cursor to the desired place by pressing the CURSOR a and gt 3 When you are finished inputting the number press ENTER YES The numerical value is set and the button indica tor goes off 153 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions
235. ive before powering up or down To prevent damage to the Zip disk drive s heads always try to hold the Zip disk in a level position not tilted in any direction while inserting it into the Zip drive Push it in firmly but gently Never use excessive force O Do not insert disks other than the specified Zip disks O Zip disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of magnetic storage medium Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface area To preserve their integrity please observe the following when han dling Zip disks e Never touch the magnetic medium inside the Zip disk e Do not use or store Zip disks in dirty or dusty areas e Do not subject Zip disks to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle Storage temperature 22 51 C storage humidi ty 10 90 e Do not expose Zip disks to strong magnetic fields such as those generated by loudspeakers O The identification label should be firmly affixed to the Zip disk Should the label come loose while the Zip disk is in the Zip drive it may be difficult to remove the Zip disk O Put the Zip disk back into its case for storage O Zip disks do not have a protect tab to prevent data from being erased accidentally If necessary use Song Protect to protect your data p 65 Connecting the Zip Drive Use the following procedure to connect the Zip drive to the VS 880EX
236. ived C C The mixer is controlled using Control Change messages Excl The mixer is controlled using Exclusive mes sages When C C or Excl is selected making mixer adjust ments on the master VS 880EX makes the same adjust ments to the slave VS 880EX mixer For more detailed information about Exclusive messages please refer to MIDI Implementation Appendices p 74 12 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display 13 Press YES SYS Syn Source appears in the display 14 Make sure that the Sync Source is set to INT Sync Source This determines how the VS 880EX is synchronized with other devices Here set this to INT INT The VS 880EX runs according to its own inter nal clock Select this setting when you are not synchronizing with other devices or when you want external MIDI devices to be controlled by synchronization signals from the VS 880EX EXT The VS 880EX is controlled with synchroniza tion signals MTC from the connected external MIDI device In this case the VS 880EX does not operate unless it is receiving MTC signals Select this setting when you want to use the MTC from an external MIDI device to control the VS 880EX 15 Press PARAMETER b gt SYS Syn Gen appears in the display 16 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Gen Generator This selects the type of synchronization signal trans mitted from the MIDI OUT con
237. ixer 26 While pressing the STATUS button for Track 5 press the SELECT buttons on Channels 5 and 6 The SELECT indicator which had been blinking orange will go dark 27 Now you have set it up so that you can monitor Tracks 1 4 and Effect 1 Return on Channels 5 6 Record and Check the Content 28 Carry out track bouncing by following the proce dure described in Combining the Contents of Tracks p 60 62 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording Creating a Master Tape When you finish recording a song adjust the balance of each track equalizer pan and volume level and using your stereo recorder record a two channel stereo master mix to a stereo cassette DAT MD or other media This process is called mixdown Prepare for Mixdown 1 Hold down STOP and press the STATUS but tons for all tracks you want to have mixed down The STATUS light green 2 Press FADER several times to light green the FADER indicator 3 Use the channel faders and pan knobs on the top panel to adjust the effect volume and pan of each track First determine the volume of the song s main tracks usually the vocals or perhaps a gui tar melody Then set levels for the other tracks It is a good idea to create a balance in which the vol ume of the other tracks is lower than the main tracks Afterwards make final adjustments to the pan and equalizer settings for each track as you listen to the overall mix 1 Connect the
238. k is turned OFF If Channel Link is also turned on settings such as equalizer and effect send level will also be linked 1 Press CH EDIT SELECT for the channels for which you wish to have Fader Link turned on 2 Press PARAMETER lt lt gt gt so that Fader Link appears in the display 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial For now select On Fader Link This turns the Fader Link function on and off 4 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 5 As described in Adjusting the Faders p 149 adjust the volume balance of each channel and the overall volume level 151 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions Mixing In a Stereo Source Stereo In You can assign input signals from the INPUT jacks or DIGITAL IN connector to the MIX bus or RECORD ING bus without having them pass through the input mixer You can also monitor these signals without having them pass through the input mixer or output mixer This is referred to as Stereo In This can be con venient when for example the same input source fea tures sounds with effects and sounds without effects recorded on separate tracks Use the following proce dure for Stereo In 1 Press FADER EDIT several times to let the FADER indicator lights red 2 Press channel 6 ST IN CH EDIT several times until RTN StereoIn appears in the display 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Stereoln This selects the external in
239. l once again take effect Alternatively you can tem porarily disable Auto Mix during playback and then enable it by turning it on again 4 When the playback is finished press STOP 1 Move to the point where you want to disable Auto Mix Confirm that Auto Mix mode is on Select the channels for which you want Auto Mix disabled While pressing AUTOMIX so that the button indicators to blink press the each channel SELECT button or EZ ROUTING Master Block 4 Hold down AUTOMIX and press CLEAR Auto Mix is disabled on the selected channels 5 Press AUTOMIX The AUTOMIX indicator light goes off 145 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Scene Auto Mix appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER BB several times until SYS A Mix Erase appears in the display 4 Press YES 5 Use the TIME VALUE dial to specify the first marker in the range that you want Auto Mix erased Erase From Specify the first marker in the range that you want Auto Mix erased 6 Press CURSOR b gt The cursor will move toward the right 7 Use the TIME VALUE dial to specify the last marker in the range that you want Auto Mix erased Erase To Specify the last marker in the range that you want Auto Mix erased 8 Press PARAMETER SYS EraseMode appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Erase Mode Select the au
240. lay condition 14 Hold down SHIFT and press SYSTEM The SYNC MODE field of the display will show EXT indicating that the unit will operate in syn chronization to MTC received from the SI 805 In this condition operations performed on the video equipment are performed in synchrony on the VS 880EX Using External Effects Devices When using external effects devices the AUX SEND jacks A B function as effects send jacks Here we see how effects can be added to a performance recorded in stereo on Track 1 This is handy when for example you want to add reverb using an external effects device Use the INPUT 1 and 2 jacks as the effect return jacks 1 Connect your effects device as shown below N OUTPUT INPUT MASTER R L 6 5 4 3 2 1 C gt Tip HOT i LO Sieve GND B A T AUX SEND INPUT OUTPUT 3 O o 90 HOHE o 4 2 Press FADER EDIT several times to let the FADER indicator lights green 3 Press CH EDIT SELECT on Channel 1 Press PARAMETER lt 1 gt to let MIX Sw appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIX Sw Mix Switch This sets how the signal is sent to the MIX bus Here select Off Off The signal is not sent to the MIX bus On The signal is sent to the MIX bus 185 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and example
241. lay condition When Channel Link is on the balance of both channels is preserved and the total volume level controlled with fader for the odd numbered channel If you want the channel faders to act independently use the fol lowing procedure 1 Press CH EDIT SELECT for the channels for which you wish to adjust that channel s fader 2 Press PARAMETER gt gt so that MIX Sw appears in the display 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIX Sw Mix Switch This selects the bus to which the source or track out put will be assigned For this example select On On The source or track will not be assigned to a recording bus but will be sent directly to the mix bus Set this to On when for example you simply want to mix the inputs without recording the source However the sources that are assigned to the RECORDING bus are dis abled Off The source or track will not be assigned to the mix bus If it is not assigned to a recording bus either then that source track will not be output anywhere 4 Press PARAMETER b gt so that MIX Level appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Mix Level In the example 100 CONDITION MARKER TIME s8 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER MIX Level Adjust the volume level 0 127 of the signal that is output to the mix bus or the recording bus 149 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions P
242. layback tracks recording tracks for which you will turn Channel Link ON Press the SELECT CH EDIT button of the tracks for which you wish to turn Channel Link ON and rotate the TIME VALUE dial MEASURE BEAT SYNC MODE SCENE el med Sl e a 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 7 Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt a 8 TR to appears in the display Specify which track will be recorded to which track First press the SELECT CHEDIT button for the playback track and then press the STATUS button for the track that you wish to record You can also use the TIME VALUE dial to select the recording destination track If you select that track will not be played back it will not be heard If you select MIX the playback track will be assigned to the mix bus it will be heard but not recorded s 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER Playback tracks that have Channel Link set to On can not be recorded to tracks on which Channel Link is set to Off with the EZ Routing 9 Press PARAMETER A You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt d 10 TR Pan appears in the display Adjust the pan of the playback track Press the SELECT CH EDIT button for the playback track whose pan you wish to adjust and use the TIME VALUE dial You can also adjust the pan using the
243. layback of the MIDI song data The MIDI clock data is recorded on the sync track While MIDI clock data is being recorded onto the sync track the input sources can be monitored but audio tracks cannot be recorded or played back 7 When the MIDI song data is finished playing back the VS 880EX automatically stops recording MIDI clock data Return to Play condition Synchronized Operation 1 Connect the VS 880EX and the MIDI sequencer as shown below SCSI _MID I OUT THRU THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RUI NIS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS 1 THIS DEVIC JSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE AND 2 THIS DEVICE MUST Af P NCE RECEIVED INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIF No MIDI IN O Ppoo000 0O 00 PadHada EA ooo ac Eg CI Bora Oo Oooo 1o ea MIDI Sequencer 120 Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices 2 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS MIDI PRM appears in the display 3 Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS MID MIDIThr appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIDI Thru MIDI Thru Switch This selects the function of the MIDI OUT THRU con nector For now select Out Out The connector transmits MIDI messages from the VS 880EX Select this when you want to transmit metronome Note m
244. le rate and recording mode of the newly created song will be the same as the original song e If there is insufficient free space on the current drive Song Import cannot be carried out Here we will explain the procedure of how a VS 880 song which was copied as a playable copy to a Zip disk can be read from a Zip drive connected to the VS 880EX and converted for use with the VS 880EX If you need to use Song Archive Extract or to convert a song which was recovered from DAT read from step 3 1 Make settings as shown below SCSI THE FCC RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT J THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL T ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED ISE UNDESIRED OPERATION 2 Insert the disk onto which VS 880 song data has been recorded into the Zip drive 137 Chapter 11 Compatibility 3 For the current drive select the drive internal IDE hard disk you want to be the load destina tion 4 Press SONG several times until Song Import appears in the display 5 Press YES Source Drv the drive from which the data will be read appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the drive which con tains the song you wish to convert For example if the source drive is the Zip drive select SC5 0 Load source drive in the example a Zip drive REMAINING TIME 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER Press PARAMETER
245. le to get stable digital audio output meaning the sound will suffer when digital connections are used Additionally Cakewalk Pro Audio 5 0 and Cakewalk Professional 5 0 do not feature the above mentioned settings We recom mend upgrading to Version 6 0 In the present status condition when record is begun with Cakewalk MMC is transmitted to the VS 880EX and upon receiving the MMC the VS 880EX also begins playback During playback MTC is sent from the VS 880EX to Cakewalk thus synchronizing operations 178 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples Recording to the VS 880EX 1 Make the connections as shown below coaxial or optical 2 3 Computer Cakewalk A A Sound Card M Y MIDI Interface gt MIDI E ES Q g A pra Driver lt DIGITAL EY MIDI OUT OUT Al Dich ALS TT MIDI OUT 000000520 m ololc olo o Sy L PDOODOoDO TAg EN ELL y J E 10 L DOODOODOC Soo oO ls olo 5 I A TC m e ea TC T i c Oo VS 880EX Follow the procedure as described in Settings for the VS 880EX p 195 and Settings for Cakewalk Pro Audio p 196 set up the system so that the VS 880E
246. led In this case when a Scene is recalled the location of the faders on the top panel may no longer match the actual fader settings KeepF This changes the mixer settings to those of the Scene being recalled with the exception of the fader settings This means that even when a Scene is recalled fader settings will still match the fader positions on the top panel 4 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Deleting a Scene 1 Press SCENE The SCENE indicator lights 2 The indicators for the LOC buttons 1 5 4 8 to which scene are stored then light 3 Hold down CLEAR and press the LOC button 1 5 4 8 for the scene that you wish to clear For example if you wish to clear the mixer settings that were stored in scene 1 hold down CLEAR and press 1 5 If you wish to clear the mixer set tings that were stored in scene 5 hold down both CLEAR and SHIFT and press 1 5 4 Press SCENE once more The SCENE indicator will go dark If you wish to halt the Clear procedure press SCENE before step 3 Making Mixer Settings Automatically EZ Routing Settings related to mixer connections including set tings for routing of inputs to tracks for recording for determining where signals are output and for deter mining which output is to be monitored can be stored and recalled easily with the VS 880EX This is referred to as EZ Routing For example when setting tracks to be played back or r
247. less of the perfor mance or condition of the DAT recorder Backing Up Song Data with a CD R Drive or Zip Drive You can use a CD R drive or Zip drive to back up song data from the VS 880EX Song data backed up onto a CD R disc cannot be overwritten Thus this method is appropriate for backing up com pletely finished songs or other such data Song data backed up on Zip disks can be overwritten any number of times but considering the time required for saving data and because of reliability issues it is more convenient to back up data using a Zip drive Roland recommends backing up data Song Copy with a Zip drive Items Necessary for DAT Backup e VS 880EX 1 e Internal IDE hard disk HDP88 series e DAT recorder 1 e DAT tape as many as needed e Digital connection cables coaxial or optical DAT recorder You can use a conventional DAT recorder Other digital recording devices including MD recorders or DCC recorders cannot be used to back up data Furthermore you cannot back up data if you are using a DAT recorder for example one featuring external digital signal processing whose playback data differs from the data as it was recorded Portable DAT recorders may require a special adapter when connecting to the VS 880EX Please check the owner s manual for your DAT recorder or consult your dealer or service center to see what your model may require Tape You can use a conventional DAT ta
248. level 50 dBu Besides the RCA phono type stereo MASTER jacks the mono AUX A and AUX B jacks are provided The VS 880EX provides both coaxial and optical digi tal I O connectors With these you can make digital connections with popular consumer electronic devices such as CD players DAT recorders MD recorders and so on A SCSI connector DB 25 type is also provided allow ing you to connect to external SCSI devices such as the Zip drive and the CD R drive MIDI IN and MIDI OUT THRU connectors are also provided You can synchronize the VS 880EX with an external MIDI sequencer use the MIDI sequencer to control the VS 880EX s mixer sound an external MIDI sound generator with the metronome and more Besides tracks for recording audio signals the VS 880EX has sync track for storing MIDI clock message You can even synchronize MIDI sequencers that are not compatible with MTC MIDI Time Code or MMC MIDI Machine Control Internal Hard Disk desinated by Roland An internal 2 5 inch IDE hard disk Having this inter nal hard disk installed makes the VS 880EX system compact and easy to transport Furthermore there is no need to make complex settings and no problems with faulty connections unlike those which could occur when an external disk is used We recommend that you install an internal hard disk when using the VS 880EX For simultaneous recording or playback of a number of tracks for getting more out of t
249. ls as shown below For channel pairs linked with the Stereo Link function Control Change messages can be exchanged using the odd numbered channel s MIDI channel Control Change messages transmitted via the even numbered channel s MIDI channel are ignored MIDI Input Track Effect Return Master Channel Mixer Mixer Mixer Block 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 DIGITALL 7 8 8 DIGITALR 8 11 ST IN 12 FX1 13 FX2 16 MST Controller numbers correspond to the track mixer parameters as follows Controller Number Mixer Parameter 3 TRACK STATUS 7 MIX Send Level 10 MIX Send Pan 12 EQ L Freq 13 EQ L Gain 14 EQ M Freq 15 EQ M Gain 16 EQMQ 17 EQ H Freq 18 EQ H Gain 19 FX1 SND Level 20 FX1 SND Pan Bal 21 FX2 SND Level 22 FX2 SND Pan Bal 23 AUX Send Level 24 AUX Send Pan Bal 29 MIX Offset Level 30 MIX Offset Bal Controller numbers correspond to the input mixer parameters as follows Controller Number Mixer Parameter 8 MIX Send Level 70 MIX Send Pan Bal 71 EQ L Freq 72 EQ L Gain 73 EQ M Freq 74 EQ M Gain 75 EQMQ 76 EQ H Freq 77 EQ H Gain 78 FX1 SND Level 79 FX1 SND Pan Bal 80 FX2 SND Level 81 FX2 SND Pan Bal 82 AUX Send Level 83 AUX Send Pan Bal 88 MIX Offset Level 89 MIX Offset Bal Controller numbers correspond to the effect return mixer parameters as follows Controller Number Mixer Parameter 68 MIX Se
250. ly the right timing Example 3 Copying using the Frm setting 14 Press PARAMETER gt TRK End appears in the display 15 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial End End point Specifies the ending time of the copy range 16 Press PARAMETER B TRK To appears in the display 17 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial To To point Specifies the reference time of the copy destination 18 Press PARAMETER B TRK Copy Time appears in the display 19 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Copy Time This specifies the number of times 1 99 the data is to be copied 20 Press PARAMETER gt TRK Track Copy OK appears in the display 21 Press YES This executes Track Copy If you wish to cancel press NO 22 When the copy is completed correctly Complete appears in the display and return to Play condition An Easy Way to Specify the Time Settings Times for the St Frm End and To can be specified directly without having to display the Track Copy page In Play condition use the fol lowing procedure 1 Move to the beginning St of the copy source performance data Hold down TRACK and press LOC1 5 Move to the time location in the destination to which the performance data will be copied Frm Hold down TRACK and press LOC2 6 Move to the end location of the copy source performance data End Hold d
251. mation message is displayed 5 6 Press YES When the user routing has been deleted Complete appears in the display and you will return to Play condition 87 This chapter explains the content and procedures for editing sound that has been recorded Please read this chapter to gain an understanding of the concepts of editing described in this section About Editing Operations On a tape recorder in order to modify a performance that has been recorded you have to erase the perfor mance which you recorded previously Additionally if you wish to change the composition of a song you must re record it from the beginning or use scissors and tape to splice sections or the recording In either case with the tape itself subject to handling it can never be returned to its original condition This type of editing is known as destructive editing Compare with a tape recorder with digital disk recording since copying data has negligible effect on the sound you can copy the original data before edit ing and back it up It is also easy to copy parts of the data to different locations or to erase specified por tions of the data Track Edit Furthermore even if you make a mistake during Punch In Recording or Track Bouncing you can restore data to its condition any number of steps before the edit without the edited content being deleted Undo function Editing of this type which allows the original data to be r
252. messages can be received when the VS 880EX is in Play condition 6 Press PARAMETER gt SYS MID MMC appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MMC MMC Mode This setting determines how the VS 880EX imple ments MMC Set this to SLAVE Off MMC is neither transmitted nor received MASTER MMC is transmitted The VS 880EX func tions as the master device for external MIDI equipment SLAVE MMC is received The VS 880EX functions as a slave device for external MIDI equip ment 8 Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS MID CtrType appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial CtrType Mixer Control Type This selects the type of MIDI messages that will be used when transmitting mixer settings to an external MIDI device or when MIDI messages from an exter nal MIDI device are used to control the mixer At this time set this to Off Off MIDI messages related to mixer operation are not transmitted or received C C The mixer is controlled using Control Change messages Excl The mixer is controlled using Exclusive mes sages When C C or Excl is selected making mixer adjust ments on the master VS 880EX makes the same adjust ments to the slave VS 880EX mixer For more detailed information about Exclusive messages please refer to MIDI Implementation Appendices p 74 10 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo a
253. messages or Exclusive messages Thru This sends MIDI messages received via the MIDI IN connector without change 6 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt gt gt several times until SYS Gen appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Gen Generator This selects the MIDI Clock on which the Metronome will be based Select MIDIclk if you wish to use the Tempo Map and SyncTr if you are going to use Sync Track Off The MIDI Clock is not transmitted MTC MIDI Time Code is transmitted the metronome does not sound MIDIclk The Tempo Map MIDI Clock is transmitted SyncTr The Sync Track MIDI Clock is transmitted 10 Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS MetroOUT appears in the display 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MetroOUT Metronome Out This selects how the metronome is output For now select MIDI Selecting Off prevents you from making any set tings related to the Metronome Off The metronome sound is not output INT The metronome sound is output from the MONITOR jacks MIDI The metronome signal is transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector 12 Press PARAMETER gt several times until MetroMd appears in the display 13 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MetroMd Metronome Mode This is for selecting when the metronome sound is played Rec Only The
254. mixer Press FADER several times to let the FADER indicator light green 11 Press PLAY to begin playback of the song 12 Use the channel faders and the master fader to adjust the volume to a comfortable level 13 Does the recording sound as you though it would If you are satisfied with the results of your recording then save the song to the disk using the procedure described in Saving a Recorded Performance p 43 To cancel track assignments You can cancel all assignments routings of sources or tracks to tracks i e to a state where nothing is connected 1 Press PLAY DISPLAY 2 Hold down the STATUS button and press CLEAR Viewing the Assign screen In Play Condition hold down the STATUS button to view the source track effect which is assigned to that track Assigned source 1 8 upper line Assigned track 1 8 lower line CONDITION MARKEF 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER Recording Tracks 1 8 Stereo In first line Effect 1 second line Effect 2 third line 42 When You Are Recording in Stereo When recording in stereo or when recording to tracks with Channel Link p 149 on you can set the pan for each input channel After Step 5 per form the procedure described below 5 1 Press the SELECT button for the input chan nel you want assigned as the source The SELECT indicator lights 5 2 Press PARAMETER lt lt
255. mportant information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Quick Start Owner s Manual and Appendices should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference Copyright 1998 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION Roland Homepage http www rolandcorp com CAUTION The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ihi DO NOT OPEN presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK intended to alert the user to the presence of important NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL Iiteratur accompanying me predict INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
256. n if Song Protect is turned on you can still store locate points and mark points and carry out operations such as changing Scenes However when you try to save the work you have done Song Protected appears in the display and you are prevented from continuing any further with the save However when you remove Song Protect any settings made when Song Protect was on are lost After you have finished all work for the day turn on Song Protect immediately before shutting off the power to the VS 880EX Furthermore right after turning on the power to the VS 880EX at the beginning the day s operations you should imme diately turn off Song Protect 64 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording 1 Make the current song the one to which you want to apply Song Protect 2 Press SONG several times until SNG Song Name Prtct appears in the display 3 Press YES Song name appears in the display 4 Press PARAMETER SNG ChangePrtct gt On appears in the display 5 Press YES If you wish to cancel press NO STORE Current appears in the display If you wish to save the current song and then protect it press YES If you wish to protect the state in which Song Store was last executed without sav ing the current song press NO 7 The song will be protected SNG Complete appears in the display and return to Play condition 1 Select the song from which you currently w
257. n inserted in another channel the display will indicate and this item cannot be set s8 12345678 INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 48 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt d 49 Change Routing appears in the display Press YES When the routing has been finalized Complete appears in the display and you will return to Play condition If you decide to discard the routing that was set press NO 80 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings Select this when recording the performance data from multiple tracks onto a number of other tracks 1 Press EZ ROUTING several times until EZR Bouncing appears in the display 2 Press YES EZR Use Template do you wish to apply the tem plate appears in the display 3 Press NO 4 REC Track appears in the display Specify the track on which you will record Press the STATUS button for the track that you wish to record The STATUS indicator will blink red Each time you press the STATUS button you will alternate between recording and not recording Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the V track on which you will record 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 5 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER 6 TR Link is the displayed track appears in the display Specify the p
258. n of the fader and pan settings linked so that they adjusted in the same way This is called the Channel Link When Channel Link is on adjacent odd and even numbered channels are paired as shown below The settings of each odd numbered channel will be the same as the settings of the corresponding even num bered channel When the setting of one channel are modified the settings of the paired channel will change in the same way nel 1 Channe Channe Channe Channe At this time you can use the channel faders and pan knobs to make the following adjustments Odd numbered channel faders Overall volume level of the signal that is output to the mix bus or the recording bus Offset Level Off numbered channel pan knobs Overall left right balance of the signal that is output to the mix bus or the recording bus Offset Balance Even numbered channel faders Overall volume level of the signal that is output to the AUX bus AUX level Even numbered channel pan knobs Overall left right balance of the signal that is output to the AUX bus AUX balance 1 Press CH EDIT SELECT for the channels for which you wish to have Channel Link turned on 2 Press PARAMETER lt lt gt gt so that Channel Link appears in the display 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial For now select On Channel Link This turns the Channel Link function on and off 4 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to P
259. n personal use and enjoyment private use constitutes copyright infringe ment which may incur penalties Consult a copyright specialist or special publica tions for more detailed information on obtaining such permission from copyright holders Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Windows 95 is known officially as Microsoft Windows 95 operating system Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc Iomega is a registered trademark of lomega Corporation ZIP is a trademark of lomega Corporation Cakewalk is a registered trademark of Twelve Tone systems Inc Cakewalk Pro Audio and Cakewalk Professional are trademarks of Twelve Tone systems Inc All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respec tive owners Roland Corporation 01562867 99 3 E3 41N
260. n the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial RemainDsp Remaining Display This selects how the remaining disk space is shown Time This indicates the time minutes seconds left for recording CapaMB This shows the actual memory in megabytes Capa This indicates the remaining space as a per centage of the total disk space This shows the number of events used in the recording Event 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition With an optional foot switch such as the Roland DP 2 or BOSS FU 5U connected to the FOOT SWITCH jack you can choose how the foot switch functions 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER several times until SYS Foot Sw appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Foot Sw Foot Switch This sets the foot switch function Play Stop Pressing the switch alternately starts and stops playback of the song Works the same as the REC button Use this to switch between recording and playback during manual Punch In Recording TapMarker Works the same as the TAP button Mark points are set when the pedal is pressed Next Works the same as the NEXT button Each time the pedal is pressed recalls the next marker Previous Works the same as the PREVIOUS but ton Each time the pedal is pressed recalls the previous marker Record GPI This controls start and
261. nchronize the VS 880EX s reference clock the mas ter clock with the digital signal from the digital audio device 1 Press SYSTEM several times until System PRM 2 appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS MasterClk appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MasterClk Master Clock This sets the VS 880EX s reference clock In this case select DIGIN1 or DIGIN2 DIGIN1 Based on the digital signal received from the DIGITAL IN connector coaxial INT Based on the VS 880EX s reference clock DIGIN2 Based on the digital signal received from the DIGITAL IN connector optical When you change the master clock value clicking noise may happen Please turn down the master fader of the VS 880EX or the volume of the amplifier beforehand 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition If Digital In Lock is Displayed This indicates that the reference clock for the sam ple rate is set by the digital signal from the DIGI TAL IN connector You can record using the digi tal connection If Digital In Unlock is Displayed This indicates that no digital signal is being received from the DIGITAL IN connector Alternatively it may indicate that the sample rate selected for the song does not match the sample rate of the digital device connected to the DIGI TAL IN connector In this state you cannot record usi
262. nd Level 70 MIX Send Balance Controller numbers correspond to the Master section parameters as follows Controller Number Mixer Parameter 68 Master Level 70 Master Balance 78 FX1 SND Level 79 FX1 SND Balance 80 FX2 SND Level 81 FX2 SND Balance 82 AUX Level 83 AUX Balance 181 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples 1 Make the connections as shown below SCSI MIDI DIGITAL 7 8 OUT THRU N1 ecm o CE Gn225 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RUL TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS 1 THIS DEVICE i INTERFERENCE AND 2 THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT Al INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIR MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI Sequencer 2 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS MIDI PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER B several times until SYS MID MIDIThr appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIDIThr MIDI Thru Sw itch This switches the function of the MIDI OUT THRU connector For now set this to Out Out The connector transmits MIDI message such as metronome Note messages or MTC from the VS 880EX Thru MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN con nector are retransmitted from the connector without any changes 6 Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS M
263. ndition Use with a MIDI Controller The VS 880EX can transmit its mixer settings and functions as MIDI messages Conversely MIDI mes sages from an external MIDI controller can be used to control the VS 880EX s track status and mixer settings Switching Track Status You can use MIDI control change messages to switch the status of each track track status MIDI channels 1 8 correspond to Tracks 1 8 respectively Use con troller number 29 to switch the track status Depending on the value of controller number 3 the track status changes as shown below When stopped VALUE 0 31 32 63 64 95 96 127 STATUS MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE gt 0FF gt PLAY gt REC gt SOURCE PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY gt MUTE PLAY REC gt SOURCE REC REC REC REC gt MUTE gt PLAY REC gt SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE gt MUTE gt PLAY gt REC SOURCE During playback or recording VALUE 0 31 32 63 64 95 96 127 STATUS 1 MUTE 1 1 PLAY PLAY PLAY 1 1 gt MUTE gt PLAY 1 1 REC REC gt REC gt SOURCE 2 SOURCE 1 MUTE SOURCE SOURCE REC 2 gt SOURCE 1 Ignored 2 Cannot be switched while recording Also SOURCE here indicates the status in which the track indicator blinks alternately red and orange and is valid only when Record Monitor is set to AUTO p 168 126 Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices You can switch Scenes with MIDI Progr
264. nector For now set this to MTC Off Synchronization signals are not transmitted MTC MIDI Time Code is transmitted MIDICIk MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map is transmitted SyncTr MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track is transmitted 17 Press PARAMETER gt gt gt several times until SYS Syn MTC Type appears in the display 18 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MTC Type MTC Type This selects the type of MTC 30 29N 29D 25 or 24 Set this to conform to the type of MTC on the slave VS 880EX Here select 30 19 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 171 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS MIDI PRM appears in the display 2 Press YES SYS MID DeviceID appears in the display 3 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial DevicelD This sets the Device ID number 1 32 that is used when exchanging exclusive messages mixer parame ters with an external MIDI device Exclusive mes sages can be transmitted and received between devices which have the same Device ID number set ting Here set this to 17 4 Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS MID SysEx Rx appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial SysEx Rx System Exclusive Receive Switch Exclusive messages are received when this is set to On At this time set this to On The Exclusive
265. nel Link is OFF cannot be Complete appears in the display and return to exchanged to a track whose channel has a Channel Link Play condition setting of ON 92 Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance Track Editing Track Exchange with a different V track bank You can use Track Exchange to swap tracks or V tracks of different V track banks For example if you wish to copy track 1 V track 1 of V track bank A hereafter referred to as A 1 1 to track 1 V track 1 of V track bank B referred to as B 1 1 you can use the following procedure 1 Track exchange A 1 1 and B 1 8 2 Copy B 1 8 to B 1 1 3 Once again track exchange B 1 8 and A 1 1 1 You can exchange the tracks that are currently audible Select the V track containing the source playback data to be exchanged 2 Press TRACK several times until TRK Track Exchange appears in the display 3 Press YES Press CURSOR a several times until TRK Tr 2 2 gt 2 2 is the current V track bank appears in the display 5 Press SELECT CH EDIT for the channel con taining the exchange source track The SELECT indicator will light orange You can also use the TIME VALUE dial to select the exchange source track 6 Press STATUS for the exchange destination track The STATUS indicator will light red 7 Rotating the TIME VALUE dial allows you to specify the exchange destination V track For example
266. nel fader is sent If the effect has been inserted into another channel the effect cannot be used But the signal from the channel will be sent to EFFECT bus 9 Press PARAMETER EFFECT1 Send appears in the display 10 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial EFFECT1 Send Effect 1 Send Level This adjusts the level 0 127 of the signal sent to the EFFECT 1 bus Set the initial value to 100 11 Press PARAMETER gt EFFECT1 Pan appears in the display 12 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial EFFECT1 Pan Effect 1 Send Pan This adjusts the stereo placement of the signal L63 0 R63 sent to the EFFECT 1 bus 13 Hold down REC and press the Track 1 STATUS button The STATUS indicator blinks red 14 While holding down the Track 1 STATUS button press the Input Channel 1 SELECT CH EDIT The SELECT indicator blinks 15 Press FADER EDIT several times to let the FADER indicator light red 16 While holding down the Track 1 STATUS button press the Channel 7 SELECT CH EDIT The SELECT indicator blinks 17 At this point the mixer is set up so that both the direct sound and the sound with effects can be recorded to Track 1 Record and check the content as described in Recording to the Tracks p 42 Many recordings of electric guitar vocals or the like contain the insertion of effects such as Guitar Multi and Vocal Multi Here we will explain how you can connect an ele
267. ng Rec amp Play The metronome sounds during both recording and playback 13 This completes the metronome settings Press PLAY DISPLAY to return to Play condition 154 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions A MIDI sound source can be used to play the metronome with a sound of your choosing To do this use the following procedure 1 Connect the VS 880EX and the MIDI sound gener ator as shown below SCSI MDI DIGITAL 7 8 OUT THRU IN IN1 f Y Su o E THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RUL IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS 1 THIS DEVICI ISE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE AND 2 THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT Al ACE RECEIVED INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRet UN ED o O D opa J O oja me 2 yO c me J iii Gy souwbCanvas sc 88 Pro MIDI Sound Generator 2 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS MIDI PRM appears in the display 3 Press YES Press PARAMETER B several times until SYS MID MIDIThr appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIDIThr MIDI Thru Switch This switches the function of the MIDI OUT THRU connector Here select Out Out MIDI messages are sent from the VS 880EX Select this when sending metronome sound note messages or mixer parameter settings Control Change
268. ng editing press NO If you have selected a demo song press NO 4 When shut down has been completed properly PowerOFF RESTART appears in the display Turn down the volume of your audio equipment Turn off the power of the audio equipment Turn off the power of the VS 880EX with the POWER switch on the rear panel After the power is turned off the momentum of the hard disk causes it to continue spinning for a short while Any physical shock to the unit during this time may damage the hard disk Avoid moving the VS 880EX with a hard disk installed for at least 30 seconds after turning off the power If STORE Current is Displayed When you begin to execute the various operations such as shutdown the message STORE Current Save the current song is displayed This message asks you whether you wish to save the currently selected song to the disk drive If you wish to save the song before continuing with the shutdown press YES If you want to proceed with the shutdown without saving the song press NO If you press YES in response to the STORE Current message when Song Protect is on or when if you have selected a demo song the message Song Protected is displayed and you will be unable to save the song Before editing a song set Song Protect to Off p 65 Otherwise press NO You can restart the VS 880EX without turning off the rear panel POWER switch This is convenient
269. ng the digital connection Here we will explain how to select an input source using the example of recording a digital signal on tracks 1 and 2 Here we will explain how to select input sources using the example of recording a digital signal stereo to tracks 1 and 2 The left channel will be recorded on track 1 and the right channel on track 2 Using STATUS 1 Press FADER EDIT several times to let the FADER indicator light orange Input Mixer 2 While pressing REC press the STATUS buttons for Tracks 1 and 2 The STATUS indicators light red 3 While pressing the STATUS button for Track 1 press SELECT CH EDIT on Channel 8 4 While pressing the STATUS button for Track 2 press SELECT CH EDIT on Channel 7 5 As described in Recording to the Tracks p 42 record and check the contents Using YES NO 1 Press FADER EDIT several times to let the FADER indicator light green Track Mixer Press SELECT CH EDIT on Channel 1 Press PARAMETER lt lt gt gt to let TR1 Assign appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial to let TR1 Assign IN7 appears in the display 5 Press YES 56 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording Assign Specify the source track effect return which will assigned to each track for recording If you press YES the display will indicate On showing that it has been assigned for recording If you press NO
270. ning which output is to be monitored For example these settings which stay the same regardless of the song include playback and recording track settings during track bouncing and effects settings during mixdown This makes EZ Routing convenient in such situations Up to 8 sets of settings values included that define the total condition of the mixer can be stored for each song and can be recalled instantly at the touch of a button A stored set of mixer settings is called a Scene A Scene includes not only the volume and pan settings but also connections e g the track to which the source from the INPUT 1 jack is recorded V track settings the track to which each is recorded and effects such as the selection of the effect to be applied This feature is convenient when you want to compare different balances of volume pan equalizer and other settings during mixdown Storing a Scene 1 Press SCENE The SCENE indicator lights 2 At this point the LOC button 1 5 4 8 act to store or recall scene Indicators light for any LOC buttons 1 5 4 8 storing scene 3 Press a LOC button 1 5 4 8 whose button indicator does not light For example if you want to record to Scene 1 then press 1 5 If you wish to store the settings in Scene 5 hold down SHIFT and press 1 5 4 Press SCENE once more The SCENE indicator will go dark If you wish to halt the registration procedure press SCENE befor
271. nnrnraras 148 Simultaneously Adjusting a Stereo Source Channel Link ccoonnnncninncnnncncnnnnccncnccn 149 Adjusting the Rad ers srini asnicar 149 Adjusting the Pan sited acct taihhuun iii aan aan is 150 Linking Only the Faders Fader Link moococconicinononconenenennncnnnonennrnrornnnnnnnanannrrorarnnnnnnnnraros 151 Mixing In a Stereo Source Stereo IM ooconcccnnnnicinicccnnoconnnncccnonannnnrnnnnnno co nannnnnnnn cnn 152 Changing the Pitch During Playback Vari PitCh oooooonnnnnnncnnnnnonnnnnnnnacconerccnnccnncnncns 152 Record Playback Tracks When Using Vari Pitch ooonoococoninananncncnrncnncncncnrneroraronanannraros 153 Directly Inputting Numeric Characters onncccnnnnnnnccconcccnnonnnnano conan naaa carac nan 153 Selecting the Method for Numeric Input emoconoccncocononennncnnnnnnnnnrnnnennarananonnarnrannnnnnnrananos 153 10 CONTENTS Sounding the Metronome c ccccecceceesceceeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeaeseseaeeeceaeseseaaesseeeeessaaesenneees 154 Using an External MIDI Sound Source to Play the Metronome ccccceeeees 155 When the Disk Has Little Remaining Space 0 cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeesecaeeeeneees 156 Deleting Only Unneeded Performance Data Song Optimize 156 Deleting One Song of Performance Data Song Erase cooccococonononcnoononenanernrnnncnncnrannns 157 Changing the Name of Performance Data Song Name ccccsssceeeeeeeesteeeeeees 157 Adjusting the Levels for Each Track oconnnc
272. noncnnenncarnnnnnnnnrorannnnnnananarnnrararanannnraraas 175 Making Digital Connections with Cakewalk ccccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeteeeeee 177 Using an External MIDI Device to Adjust the Mixer Compu Mix eeeeeeeee 180 The Correspondence Between MIDI Channels and Controller Numbers 181 Preparations for COMPU MIX sereen se rae E ae EAEE eR E a EESE 182 Recording with Compu Mix sssrinin e e iiien 183 To Have the Fader Movements Ignored cccccsccesesseesessetetescecesesesssteneneseseseeneneneeeeees 183 Synchronizing with Video Equipment c ccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeesaaaeeeeeeeesaaeeseneees 184 Using External Effects Devices ooo eee eeneeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeetaeeeeeseaaes 185 11 Preparations About the Package Contents The following items are included with the VS 880EX Please check to make sure you have all the items e VS 880EX e AC cord e Quick Start e Owner s Manual this manual e Appendices Main Features The VS 880EX retains all of the features of Roland s VS 880 workstation a revolution in the world of the home studio with the disk recorder digital mixer and multi effects systematically and more organically inte grated From when you start picking mics to when you actually record to mixdown adding effects and on to creating the master data for playing through a PA or mastering on a CD you can get a handle on eve
273. nononaranononononos 36 Moving to the Beginning or End of the Performance eomccoconenenennonnnnnrncnrnncnncarannananos 36 Storing a Time Location cuicos 36 Using the eG CatOr sss ccs cick san sees eat reena Te Saahan raih Stee obSeGisode ah Stacecasasat hana Shee ebeatatiobehatatesentsd 37 Using Markers iii en elisa AEN EE E asta EE tee ested 38 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording coocccoconaconcncocnnancnanenancnanos 40 ROCOSAS A A Alaa aos 40 Items Necessary for Multi Track Recording cocccononononoononnnonnnnonenencneracannonnnnrorornannnnnananos 40 Creating a New Song Song New eececcncncononcncnnnncnnanannnnanacannnnncnnarnnnnnnnananannnnanaranannnnanarans 40 CONTENTS General Course of the Recording Process cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeees 41 Connecting Instruments 0oonccccnnncccnnocccnnnnnccnnnn cnn nn nn ncnncn cano ranma carac nn ranma 41 Recording to the Tracks cccceesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaeeeeseeaaaeeeseseeeeeeeneeseeeeees 42 Saving a Recorded Performance Song Store cccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeneeeees 43 Recording Over a Portion of a Performance Punch In Punch Out cceeeeees 44 Using the RECORD Button Manual Punch In 1 ococccicicinacicicanananannnnananinononanananonononos 44 Using the Foot switch Manual Punch In 2 coooncnoninccicicananacnnnninnnncncnonanonononononanononononcnos 44 Specifying Beforehand the Location for Rerecor
274. nononencnnnncnnncnnnrornnennnananarnanarannnnncnrnranos 61 Creating a EE A 63 To Record to a Cassette Tape cccccccsecssessscsceesssesnsnsessseesenesescsceesessseansnensseseeneeseeeeeenes 63 Recording with DAT and MD Recorders c c cccesesseseeseeseseseececeseseseeneneneseseeneeseseeeeney 63 Protecting Songs Song Protect cccceceeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeceaeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeaaeeseeeeesesaeeseneees 64 Protecting Performances ccsescsceesessesssesescecesesssesnssneseseeneseseseecenesesssesnaneseseseeeseseeeeeeney 65 To Remove Song Protect ccccccsessesesssssseseseececesescssenenesesesesssseseseecesasesssneneneseseseseeseseeeeennes 65 Selecting a Song Song Select c occocccccinncccnnnccnnnonnnconcccnnnnnnnnnn cn naar nana nn cnn rca nar rra 65 Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects oooooccnnncnnnccocoonnnnnmm 66 Composition of the Effects ooooocnccccnnccninccccconccnnnonnncnncncnn cnn nano cn ran nnnnnn nn ran rra 66 Connecting the Eff cts aci a 66 Changing the Source Sound Itself Insert ccccsccescseesescseeneneseseseeneeseseeceneseseenenenes 66 Inserting with Input and Track Channels ccccccccsesssseseececeescseeneneneseseeneneneseeeenes 67 Inserting an Effect into the Master Block ccccscsessescseeseseseenenesesesnsneeseseesenesesesnanenes 67 Adding the Sound with the Effect Applied to the Direct Sound Send Return 68 Selecting Effects Patch ooooonccincccnnnnccnonccccnonccnnnonnncono con
275. nsformer Creating New Effects Sounds When creating a new effect first select the existing patch whose sound is closest to the image of the patch you wish to create and then alter that patch set tings Since changes to effects settings are temporary they are lost once you select another patch or recall a differ ent Scene When saving changed effects settings either save them to the User Patches or store the mixer set tings as a Scene About Algorithms An algorithm determines the composition or structure of an effect The VS 880EX features 34 different algorithms The settings for the effects in each patch use at least one of these algorithms Check the algorithms used in each patch in Preset Patch List Appendices p 19 For details on each algorithm refer to Algorithm List Appendices p 26 1 Using the procedure described in Selecting Effects Patch p 70 call up the patch contain ing the effect on which you will base your new effect 2 Press PARAMETER gt When you select a patch with an algorithm in which the effect can be turned on and off the following screen is displayed Block Block Block Off On On o CONDITION MARKERA A MEASURE BEAT SYNC MODE SCENE s8l 12345678 INPUT TRACK AB LR AUX MASTER An effect block which is currently ON is displayed as W and an effect block which is currently
276. nstalled in the VS 880EX or when Zip disks that have been used by a VS 880 are inserted into a Zip drive connected to the VS 880EX they are recognized as the initialization disk In this case the VS 880EX can be used for playing back songs recorded with the VS 880 and creating new songs as well However you cannot use the VS 880EX to edit songs that were recorded on the VS 880 or save new versions of songs If you wish to edit VS 880 song data with VS 880EX convert it to VS 880EX song data Song Import Song data that has been saved using the Archive Copy procedure on the VS 880 can be restored archive extracted with the VS 880EX However the VS 880EX cannot edit or save new versions of the extracted songs In this case you should first execute Song Archive Extract p 106 Then convert the extracted song data for use with the VS 880EX Song Import You can recover VS 880 song data backed up using DAT backup However you cannot edit or resave the recovered data on the VS 880EX In this case you should first execute DAT Recover p 131 Then convert the extracted song data for use with the VS 880EX Song Import When internal hard disks that have been used by a VS 880EX are installed in the VS 880 or when Zip disks that have been used by a VS 880EX are inserted into a Zip drive connected to the VS 880 they are recognized as the initialization disk I n this case however the VS 880 can create new songs on the disk F
277. o LLC P O Box 889 Muscat Sultanate of OMAN TEL 959085 QATAR Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 DOHA QATAR TEL 423554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL P O Box 2154 ALKHOBAR 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Khaled Ibn Al Walid St P O Box 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 2235 384 TURKEY Barkat Muzik aletleri ithalat ve ihracat limited ireketi Siraselvier Cad Guney Ishani No 86 6 Taksim Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 2499324 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Grand Floor DUBAI U A E P O Box 8050 DUBAI U A E TEL 04 360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Music Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 0604 270 6626 Roland Canada Music Ltd Toronto Office Unit 2 109 Woodbine Downs Blvd Etobicoke ON M9W 6Y1 CANADA TEL 0416 213 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 7200 Dominion Circle Los Angeles CA 90040 3696 U S A TEL 0323 685 5141 As of February 17 1999 For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89 336 EEC and LVD 73 23 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part
278. o point Specifies the reference time of the move destination 18 Press PARAMETER gt TRK Track Move OK appears in the display 19 Press YES An Easy Way to Specify the Time Settings Times for the St Frm End and To can be specified directly without having to display the Track Move page In Play condition use the fol lowing procedure 1 Move to the beginning St of the move source performance data Hold down TRACK and press LOC1 5 Move to the time location in the destination to which the performance data will be moved Frm Hold down TRACK and press LOC2 6 Move to the end location of the move source performance data End Hold down TRACK and press LOC3 7 Move to the basic time of the move destina tion To 8 Hold down TRACK and press LOC4 8 If you now access the Track Move page the times that were specified in steps 1 8 will be input as the time settings for the respective points This operation exchanges the playback data of two tracks Example Exchanging tracks 1 and 2 Track 1 Time Playback data of a track for which Channel Link is ON This executes Track Move If you wish to cancel press pice aaa ele My eee P cannot be exchanged to a track whose channel has a NO Channel Link setting of OFF In the same way playback 20 When the move is completed correctly data of a track for which Chan
279. o set the SCSI ID number for these other devices to a num ber other than 7 If no other SCSI ID number is vacant it is also possible to change the SCSI ID number of the VS 880EX 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS DISK PRM appears in the display Press YES 3 Press PARAMETER several times until SYS DSK SCSI Self appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial SCSI Self SCSI Self ID Number This sets the VS 880EX s own SCSI ID number 0 7 5 Hold down SHIFT and press STORE ZERO STORE OK appears in the display 6 Press YES The song is saved 7 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition The new SCSI ID number becomes effective from the next time when the VS 880EX is turned on Even when there is no hard disk installed in the VS 880EX it still can be used with only a Zip drive con nected to the SCSI connector In such instances it takes approximately 30 seconds after the power is turned on of the VS 880EX to check its internal hard disk connection status To avoid this wait you can preset the VS 880EX not to attempt to use the internal hard disk 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS DISK PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS DSK IDE Drv appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial IDE Drv IDE Drive When not using the internal hard disk set this to O
280. oading tray face downwards when carrying it O DO NOT play a CD ROM disc CD R disc on which song data has been backed up on a conventional audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result Please observe the following when handling discs e Never touch the shiny underside encoded sur face the disc e Do not use or store discs in dirty or dusty areas e Do not subject discs to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle Recommended temperature range 10 to 50 C 50 to 122 F O Put the disc back into its case for storage O Do not leave discs in the CD RW drive for extended periods Do not affix stickers labels or other such items to the face of discs O Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded surface of the disc Damaged or dirty CD ROM discs may not be read properly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner O Using a soft dry cloth wipe the disc from the center to the outer rim Do not wipe the disc about the cen ter in a circular direction O Do not apply record cleaners or sprays benzene or other solvents Avoid bending or twisting discs as this can adversely affect them to extent that data can no longer be read from nor written to them Device malfunction can be caused as well Connecting the CD RW Drive Use the following
281. of 999 levels of operation history may be recorded for each song Operations That Can Be Undone Operations that can be undone are recording operations and each of the Track Edit opera tions Check the list below for operations that cannot be undone e Song Edit operations Optimize Erase etc e Saves to User Effect Patches e System operations mixer initialization Drive Initialize Sync Track Recording etc Auto Mix operations Snapshot Gradation Realtime Recording etc Storing in EZ Routing Stored Locators Markers Scenes 1 Press UNDO Level appears in the display 2 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial to select the num ber of previous steps the conditions of which you want to have restored Undo Level In the example 1 CONDITION MARKER TIME L MEASURE BEAT SYNC M SCENE 8 s 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 3 Press YES to execute Undo The UNDO indicator lights If you want to cancel the Undo press CANCEL NO The Redo function can be executed when the UNDO indicator is lit When the song data is saved for exam ple by your doing Song Store or selecting another song the UNDO indicator will go out indicating that the Undo function will no longer be available 1 While the UNDO indicator is lit hold down SHIFT and press UNDO 2 Cancel the last UNDO appears in the display Press F4 Exec The UNDO indicator light goes off If
282. oint on a selected track for a more precisely specified length of time 25 100 msec Press SCRUB while the song is stopped The button indicator lights and the specified section is played back repeatedly The playback time 25 100 msec is shorter than when Preview as used Press the following buttons while their button indica tors are lit STATUS button Selects the track to be played back TO The song is played back repeatedly up to the designated point FROM The song is played back repeatedly starting from the designated point Current Time Scrub Length Scrub Length Finding the Location Where the Sound Begins example 1 While pressing STOP press the STATUS buttons for all tracks that you want to monitor The STATUS indicator lights green 2 Press PLAY to begin playback of the song 3 Play back the song until you reach the point you are looking for Press STOP to stop playback 4 Press SCRUB The SCRUB indicator lights and the specified section is played back repeatedly Press TO or FROM to select the range before or after the current time that you want to play back 5 Press STATUS button for the track on which you want to use Scrub playback 6 If you pressed TO in Step 4 rotate the TIME VALUE dial to move the current time until you can just hear the very beginning of the sound If you pressed FROM is Step 4 rotate the TIME VALUE dial to move the current time unt
283. olume balance with the faders for Channels 1 4 The presently monitored sound volume levels pan will be recorded to Tracks 5 and 6 just as you hear it You can raise the volume as much as possible without causing distortion 23 Press STOP to stop playback of the song Record and Check the Content 24 Press ZERO to return to the beginning of the song 25 While pressing REC press the STATUS button for Track 5 or 6 The STATUS indicator blinks red 26 Press REC The REC indicator blinks red 27 Press PLAY The PLAY indicator lights green and starts recording 28 When recording is finished press STOP This stops the song 29 Check the content of the recording Press ZERO to return to the beginning of the song 30 Mute sound is prevented from playing Tracks 1 4 Press the STATUS buttons for Tracks 14 The STATUS indicators go off 31 Press PLAY to begin playback of the song Use the channel faders 5 and the master fader to adjust the volume to a comfortable level Sometimes you may want to record previously record ed tracks to another track while apply the effects to them Here is how to add reverb to Tracks 1 4 while bouncing these tracks to Tracks 5 and 6 This can be convenient when you want to add spatial effects such as reverb and delay to each track while mixing down Select an Effect 1 Press EFFECT several times until EFFECT 1 PRM appears in the display 2 Press YES
284. om mark points CV3 S Tr T Map Create the tempo map from the sync track CV4 Time gt S Tr Automatically create the sync track 123 Chapter 9 Use with MIDI Devices 6 Press PARAMETER gt SYS CV Beat appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Beat Specify the number of beat 1 1 8 1 1 2 8 2 1 4 8 4 1 8 8 8 in one measure 8 Press PARAMETER gt SYS CV Tap Beat appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Tap Beat Specify the number of marks 1 8 in each measure 10 Press YES 11 A confirmation message asking if you want to save the changes to the sync track appears in the display If you want to save the changes press YES If you wish to cancel then press NO 12 When the sync track has been completed Complete appears in the display 13 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Creating a Sync Track from the Marker A sync track can be generated from markers that were assigned according to the tempo of a previously recorded performance This is convenient when you have already recorded a performance of an acoustic instrument such as guitar or vocal and now you wish to synchronize a MIDI sequencer etc to the recording 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Sync Tempo appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER BB several times until SYS Sync Tr Cnv appears in the display
285. ontents are saved e Song data backed up on CD R discs cannot be rewritten Thus this is an appropriate procedure for backing up completed song data in its final form e Song data recorded onto Zip disks cannot be backed up onto CD R discs or CD RW discs e Incorrectly conducting the backup procedure may result in the loss of data Roland Corporation assumes no liabili ty concerning such loss of data e Roland does not warrant any copied data regardless of the performance or condition of the CD R drive 113 Chapter 8 Use with a CD RW Drive e VS 880EX 1 e CD RW drive 1 e Internal IDE hard disk HDP88 series e CD RW Compact Disc ReWritable disc 1 Select the disk internal IDE hard disk containing the source song you want to back up as the cur rent drive Place a CD RW disc in the CD RW drive Press SONG several times until CD R Backup 2 appears in the display 4 Press YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 5 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO CDR Bak appears in the display 6 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the song only one song or all songs on the current drive that you wish to save To backup all songs from Total number of songs in the current drive 3 songs CONDITION MARKER TIME 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER
286. ormation please refer to MIDI Implementation Appendices p 74 127 Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder DAT Backup This chapter explains the procedures for using a DAT recorder in conjunction with the VS 880EX Refer to the owner s manual for your DAT recorder as you read this manual Before Backing Up with DAT With a DAT recorder connected to the VS 880EX s DIGITAL OUT connector coaxial or optical song data created on the VS 880EX can be saved using a DAT recorder This procedure is referred to as backup Conversely the procedure of loading the previously backed up song data into the VS 880EX is referred to as recover The song data that is backed up includes the data of all V tracks and song settings such as locate points mark points and scene settings You should make backups of your data as a precaution against unforeseen problems or when your disk drive is full and no more recording is possible Furthermore since DAT tapes are easily transported this is conve nient when you wish to exchange song data with a friend who also has a VS 880EX or when you have a VS 880EX both at home and in the studio We recom mend that important data be backed up onto multiple tapes 2 DAT Appendices p 123 Incorrectly conducting the DAT Backup procedure may result in loss of data Roland Corporation assumes no lia bility concerning such loss of data Furthermore Roland does not warrant any copied data regard
287. ot save something to a single disk then try the Song Optimize proce dure p 156 This way you can reduce the mem ory required to save a song enabling you to save to a single disk 102 Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive Saving a Song to a Single Disk Playable Here the procedure for saving a playable copy of a song on the VS 880EX s internal hard disk to a Zip disk which is set to SCSI ID Number 5 is explained The approximate times which can be copied to one Zip disk 100 Mbyte are as follows calculated as one track Recording Sample Rate Mode 48 0kHz 44 1kHz 32 0kHz MAS 17mins 18mins 26mins MT1 34mins 37mins 52mins MT2 46mins 50mins 69mins LIV 55mins 60mins 83mins All times approximate 1 Select the disk containing the source song you want to copy as the current drive 2 Press SONG several times until SNG Song Copy appears in the display 3 Press YES SNG CpyMode appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Here select Playable CpyMode Select how the song will be copied Playable Playable type Archives Archives type 5 Press PARAMETER PF SNG CpyTarget appears in the display 6 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to copy the current song select 1 Song To copy all songs from the current drive select All 7 Press PARAMETER BF SNG Dest Drive appears in the display 8
288. overdubbing and Punch In Recording are repeated the old data will remain in the disk drive In some cases significant amounts of mem ory can be occupied by this unnecessary data decreas ing the available space on the current drive and short ening the length of time available for recording Deleting this unnecessary data from the disk drive and thus freeing up available disk space on the drive is referred to as Song Optimize This operation cannot be undone with the Undo function The Optimize operation searches all V tracks on the target song and when playing back those V tracks erases the phrases that cannot be heard For exam ple even if you execute the Optimize with the V track 1 of Track 1 selected the phrases that are heard when V tracks 2 8 are selected for playback are not deleted Track 1 Phrases erased in the Optiize operation 1 Select the song you want to optimize as the cur rent song 2 Press SONG several times until Song Optimize 2 appears in the display 3 Press YES Song Optimize Execute Execute Song Optimize appears in the display Press YES If you wish to cancel Song Optimize the press CANCEL NO 5 A confirmation message appears in the display Press YES If you wish to cancel the procedure press NO 6 When the optimize is finished return to Play con dition Be aware that depending on conditions it may take some time for the Optimize op
289. own TRACK and press LOC3 7 Move to the basic time of the copy destination To 8 Hold down TRACK and press LOC4 8 If you now access the Track Copy page the times that were specified in steps 1 8 will be input as the time settings for the respective points 90 Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance Track Editing This operation moves the playback data in a specified range to another location This is convenient for cor recting timing mistakes that can occur during record ing If playback data exists at the move destination that data will be overwritten Example 1 Moving with in the same track Start End To Time Playback data of a track for which Channel Link is ON cannot be moved to a track whose channel has a Channel Link setting of OFF In the same way playback data of a track for which Channel Link is OFF cannot be moved to a track whose channel has a Channel Link setting of ON The length of the data to be moved must be greater than 0 5 seconds If data shorter than 0 5 seconds is moved the sound will not playback Do not leave sound within 0 5 seconds before or after the section of data that is moved Any sound which was with in 0 5 seconds of the moved data will not playback 1 You can move the tracks that are currently audi ble Select the V track that contains the move source playback data and prepare that data for playback 2 Press TRACK several times until
290. parameters of the next effect block by holding down SHIFT and pressing PARAMETER gt To display the parameters of the previ ous effect block hold down SHIFT and press PARAMETER 4H 71 Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects About Effect Levels Many algorithms include parameters for effect level which adjusts the output level of the effect sound and direct level which adjusts the output level of the direct sound When these parameters are preceded by a minus sign the phase is invert ed The direct level of the Preset Patches which were created with careful consideration given to the connection to the EFFECT bus is set to 0 When inserting an effect into a channel raise the direct level To determine the type for each Preset Patch please refer to Preset Patch List Appendices p 19 When you save effect settings to a User Patch the User Patch that had previously been in that location is lost At the time of purchase the effects in the VS 880EX s User Patches are the same as those stored in the Preset Patches 1 Press PARAMETER Save User Patch appears in the display Press YES Rotate the TIME VALUE dial to select the desti nation patch number U00 U99 4 Press YES When the User Patch has been saved the display will indicate Complete 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition For more detailed information ple
291. pes However 180 minutes tapes are very thin and may easily stretch or become tangled in the recorder Avoid using 180 minutes tapes When you need more than one tape to do the backup prepare whatever number of tapes you need making sure that all of the tapes feature the same recording time It is recommended that you write the numbers of the tapes to indicate the order in which they are backed up Audio equipment During DAT backups no sound is output from the VS 880EX analog output jacks Additionally turn down the volume of any connected audio devices at minimum level while song data is being backed up The song data sent to the DAT recorder from the VS 880EX is a particular signal recorded on the disk Monitoring this with the DAT recorder s volume raised may result in damage to your speakers and may adversely affect your hearing 128 Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder DAT Backup Saving Song Data to a DAT Recorder Backup Use the following procedure to back up the song data on the current drive 1 Connect the VS 880EX and the DAT recorder as shown below Optical R Digtal In ODO ie O ooo oam TTT TT TT ogm 00 DAT Recorder Coaxia DIGITAL 7 8 FOOT PHONES MASTER IN1 SWITCH R L 09 B AUX SEND
292. ppears in the display 11 Press YES 12 Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS Syn ErrLevel appears in the display 13 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial ErrLevel Error Level This sets the interval 0 10 for checking MTC receiv ing status when synchronize VS 880EX with MTC from an external MIDI device If the MTC is not being sent continuously the VS 880EX checks the MTC and if there is an error cancels synchronization By setting a longer interval under such circumstances synchro nization can continue even if there is a certain degree of error Normally set this to 5 14 Press PARAMETER gt SYS Syn MTC Type appears in the display 15 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MTC Type MTC Type This selects the type of MTC 30 29N 29D 25 or 24 Set this to conform to the type of MTC on the slave VS 880EX Here select 30 16 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 17 Hold down SHIFT and press SYSTEM The SYNC MODE field of the display will show EXT indicating that the unit is waiting to receive MTC In this condition the slave VS 880EX is operated synchrony when the master VS 880EX is operated 172 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples Synchronizing with Cakewalk Pro Audio MMC The VS 880EX supports MMC This means that when two VS 880EX units are synchronized or when a VS 880EX is used in conjunction with
293. ptions see Quick Start p 49 e Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is Q level and sure to remain stable Never place it on stands that could wobble or on inclined surfaces e Before using the unit in a foreign country consult AN with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as list ed on the Information page e Avoid damaging the power cord Do not bend it S excessively step on it place heavy objects on it etc A damaged cord can easily become a shock or fire hazard Never use a power cord after it has been damaged e Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord E before attempting installation of the Hard disk drive a unit HDP88 series Quick Start p 49 e In households with small children an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of fol lowing all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit e Protect the unit from strong impact AN Do not drop it USING THE UNIT SAFELY CAUTION e Always grasp only the plug on the power supply cord when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this unit e Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled Also all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of the reach of children e Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on S the unit e Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands when plugging into or unplugging from
294. put connector or jack using Stereo In Off Stereo In is not used Input 12 Selects INPUT jacks 1 2 for use with Stereo In Input 34 Selects INPUT jacks 3 4 for use with Stereo In Input 56 Selects INPUT jacks 5 6 for use with Stereo In Digital Selects the DIGITAL IN connector coaxial or optical for use with Stereo In 4 Press PARAMETER gt RTN StIn Level appears in the display 5 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Stin Level Stereo In Level This adjusts the volume level 0 127 for Stereo In 6 Press PARAMETER RTN StIn Bal appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Stin Bal Stereo In Balance This adjusts the balance L63 0 R63 for Stereo In 8 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition The volume level of Stereo In can be adjusted directly with the channel fader 6 when the effect return mixer is in effect when the FADER indicator is lit red Changing the Pitch During Playback Vari Pitch When recording an ensemble performance all the instruments normally tune to an instrument such as an acoustic piano whose tuning cannot easily be changed However it is sometimes necessary to record over dub an acoustic piano onto an existing recording In this case if the pitch of the recording is different than that of the acoustic piano something must be done about it In such cases by changing the playback speed of the recorder you can change the pitch of the
295. r s Manual provides a blank virtual track sheet to help you keep track of your virtual track recordings p 129 Feel free to copy the sheet to use when you record 30 Chapter 1 Before You Start VS 880EX Terminology Effects Section The VS 880EX contains effect This allows you to use up to two stereo effects FX1 and FX2 simultaneously On the VS 880EX there are two ways to connect the effects devices Please read and understand these differences described below Insert The effect is directly added either between each channel s equalizer and fader or before the master fader Connect the effect in this manner if you want to use effects applied to change the output of the sound itself such as when using dis tortion or overdrive effects When inserting an effect into one of the channels or into the Master Block that effect cannot be used in another channel For example you insert FX1 into Channel 1 then no other channel can access FX1 MIX bus or REC bus Send Return Besides the RECORDING bus and the MIX bus the output of each channel can also be sent to the EFFECT bus Use this routing with effects such as reverb and delay when you want to mix the sound without effects and the sound after effects have been applied MIX bus or REC bus FX bus 31 Chapter 2 Basic Operation This chapter explains the basic operation of the VS 880EX This covers all of the fundamental processes including
296. r 5 Storing Mixer Settings Display parameter name Input Track Mixer Mixer Channel Link Off Off EFFECT1 PstFade PstFade EFFECT1 Send 100 100 EFFECT1 Pan 0 0 EFFECT2 PstFade PstFade EFFECT2 Send 100 100 EFFECT2 Pan 0 0 Display parameter name Return Mixer StereoIn FX1 RTN Lev FX1 RTN Bal FX2 RTN Lev FX2 RTN Bal Display parameter name Off 100 0 100 0 Master Block Master Sel MIX EQ Mode 2band Direct Out Off Master FX1 Ins Off Master FX2 Ins Off Display parameter name Effect FX1 Sel A00 LargeHall FX2 Sel A22 Short Dly Select this when you want to record the performance input via the INPUT jacks 1 Press EZ ROUTING several times until EZR Recording appears in the display 2 Press YES EZR Use Template do you wish to apply the tem plate appears in the display 3 Press NO 4 REC Track appears in the display Specify the track on which you will record Press the STATUS button of the track that you wish to record The STATUS indicator will blink red Each time you press the STATUS button you will cycle between recording and not recording You can rotate the TIME VALUE dial to select the V track that you wish to record Current track selected for setting Display of tracks for recording CONDITION MARKER l 2aas6e78 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 5 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing
297. r in which clusters not included in any song are detected as containing valid data In this case the VS 880EX will not store data in those clusters A situation which causes this error to occur is called a loose area Directories The VS 880EX stores data such as audio data or parameter values on disk in units called files In order to manage large numbers of files the VS 880EX keeps lists of file names and the locations on disk in which the data of these files is stored These lists are called directories The IllegalDIR message will appear when this list is incorrect For example this message will appear if the data of a certain file is supposed to be recorded in an area of the disk which does not actually exist or if the list itself becomes perma nently unreadable If a disk error is found it is possible to erase only the data that was lost as a result of the error Recover Le the disk can be restored to a correct operating condi tion while keeping as much possible of the non error data This procedure does not correct the disk error All error locations will be erased This means that depending on the location in which the error occurred a take that was recorded may no longer be playable auto mix data may be lost or even the entire song itself may be erased If the error has occurred in the system or song list the probabil ity of this danger is especially high 9 2 Press ENTER YES
298. r two 120 minutes tapes to back up 1000 MB of song data However the disk space available for each song decreases as the number of songs save increases Look at the display to see the number of tapes needed to do the backup Time Needed for Backup It takes about 60 minutes to back up 330 MB of song data For example backing up 1000 MB of data takes about 190 minutes However the high er the number of songs backed up the longer it takes 130 Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder DAT Backup Loading Performance Data from a DAT Recorder Recover Use the following procedure to load song data that was backed up on a DAT recorder If two or more songs were saved together during the backup the data of all songs will be loaded You can recover VS 880 song data backed up using DAT backup For more detailed information please see Compatibility p 136 1 Connect the DAT recorder to the VS 880EX as fol lowing Optical OUTPUT DIGITAL 7 8 FOOT PHONES MASTER__ IN 1 SWITCH ooo O o ooo ooo a AS IO IS oaod DAT Recorder Coaxial OUTPUT DIGITAL 7 8 FOOT PHONES MASTER IN 1 SWITCH R L B A AUX SEND Digital Out oac
299. rchase the VS 880EX is not able to record the output of CD players via its DIGITAL IN connectors Perform the following procedure when you wish to make a digital connection with your CD player 1 Press SYSTEM several times until System PRM appears in the display 2 Press YES 3 Press PARAMETER gt several times until CD DigiREC On appears in the display 4 Press YES Obey Copyrights appears in the display 5 Carefully read the conditions for permission that are listed on the back cover of this manual and if you agree to the conditions press YES After the display indicates Complete you will return to Play condition Now you will be able to make digital connections with your CD player If you do not agree to the conditions press NO and you will immediately return to Play condition To Prevent Digital Connections with CD Players Use the following procedure when you want to pre vent digital connections with CD players 1 Press SYSTEM several times until System PRM appears in the display 2 Press YES 3 Press PARAMETER gt several times until CD DigiREC gt Off appears in the display 4 Press YES After the display indicates Complete you will return to Play condition Subsequently it will no longer be possible to make digital connections with your CD player 55 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording Sy
300. re even if no track number marker is set at the beginning of the song it is still used for the beginning of the first song Thus you can set up to 98 markers as track numbers 00h00m00s00 M1 M2 M3 M97 M98 y y y Song 1 ag Song 2 sa Song 3 7 Song 98 Song 39 Time 3 Pressing PREVIOUS while also pressing SONG moves you to the previous track number marker Pressing NEXT while also pressing SONG moves you to the next track number marker Please check the time at the track number EDIT CONDITION PLAY sone QLocaroR TRACK EFFECT system Mosa io O O O O O Marker ter Pre Level Post Level Play List Loop Fader Pan Mix Xchg APunch 1 0 Insert Cut Amp Profile Track Copy EFFECT 1 Move 2 Opti Erase Import Export Time Comp Exp CD Write CD Player CD DAT Backup LOCATOR Loc1 8 Loc2 8 Loc3 M Loc4 8 CLEAR a O O O CI O O 4 5 PREVIOUS H LOOP AUTO PUNCH NUMERICS C 4 Store the song to the CD R disc by following pro cedure as described in Writing Songs to CD R Discs p 109 To Delete Track Number Markers Delete markers used as track numbers the same way you would regular markers p 39 1 Move to the marker you want to delete 2 Hold down CLEAR and press TAP To make CD R discs prepared with t
301. ress CH EDIT SELECT for the other channel Repeat steps 2 5 to make the same settings for the other channel 8 Press PARAMETER q q Ofs Level appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Ofs Level Offset Level Adjust the overall volume level 0 127 while main taining the volume balance of the two channels This will operate linked with the channel fader of the odd numbered channel 10 If you wish to assign the output of a source or track to the AUX bus press PARAMETER gt to make the display read AUX Sw 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial AUX Sw AUX Switch This sets how the signal is sent to the AUX bus Here select PstFade Off The signal is not sent This will not be out put from the AUX jacks PreFade The signal before passing through the chan nel fader is sent PstFade The signal after passing through the chan nel fader is sent 12 Press PARAMETER gt AUX Level appears in the display 13 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial AUX Level AUX Level This adjusts the level 0 127 of the signal sent to the AUX bus 14 Press CH EDIT SELECT for the other channel 15 Repeat steps 11 14 to make the same settings for the other channel 16 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition When Channel Link is on this adjusts the total left right balance while preserving the pan settings for both channels If you want to adjust the pan
302. ress YES 6 STORE Current appears in the display If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 7 Drive Check is the executed Progress of the oper ation is shown in the display Do not turn off the power until the operation is completed 12345678 INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 160 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions To Cancel the Drive Check You can use the following procedure to cancel the Drive Check 1 Press CANCEL NO Cancel appears in the display 2 Press YES Drive Check is canceled 8 When Drive Check is completed the display screen appears as shown below CONDITION MARKER TIME s 12345678 AB LR AUX MASTER INPUT TRACK If the display indicates No Err 9 1 The entire disk could be read correctly Press YES Return to Play condition If the display indicates ___ Err The underlines portion will display the number of times that a read error occurred Rotate the TIME VALUE dial to check the list The display will indicate Err for locations where an error was found Locations for which OK was dis played have no problems REMAINING TIME 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER ResultList Drive check results System Location where basic data used by the VS 880EX for recording and playback is stored
303. ress PARAMETER gt several times until SYS MID P C Eff appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial P C Eff Program Change Effect With this set to On the effect is switched when pro gram change messages are received For now select On 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Use MIDI channel 1 to switch effect 1 and MIDI chan nel 2 to switch effect 2 The relationship between the bank number received by the VS 880EX and the Effect Patch Number it switches to is shown below Bank No MSB Bank No LSB Program No Patch No 0 0 0 99 Preset A00 A99 0 1 0 99 Preset BOO B99 0 2 0 99 User U00 U99 0 3 0 99 Prset C00 C09 For more detailed information please refer to MIDI Implementation Appendices p 74 You can use MIDI control change messages transmit ted from an external MIDI controller to control effects 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS MIDI PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS MID C C Eff appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial C C Eff Control Change Effect With this set to On the effect is adjusted when con trol change messages are received For now select On 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition If you wish to use control change messages to switch effects use NRPN Non Registered Parameter Numbers For more detailed inf
304. ressing STATUS will let you switch between monitoring the track and monitoring the input source It is also possible to make settings so that the input source is always monitored 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER B several times until SYS Record Mon appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Record Mon Record Monitor This switches between track and source monitoring AUTO This switches monitoring between track and source SOURCE This sets the VS 880EX to monitor the source at all times While During stopped playback AUTO SOURCE TRACK SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE During recording 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition You can cause song playback to stop automatically at a marker 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display 2 Press YES 3 Press PARAMETER Bb several times until SYS Marker Stop appears in the display 168 Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Marker Stop When this is set to On playback of the song stops automatically when a designated marker is reached 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 6 Press PLAY to begin playback of the song When the song reaches the location containing the marker playback then stops
305. result in stereo on tracks 5 and 6 Track 2 Performance data 2 Before Track Bounceing Track 1 Performance data 1 Track 3 Performance data 3 Performance data 4 Performance data 1 3 Performance data 2 4 After Track Bounceing Track 6 Volume pan equalizer effects and other settings cannot be adjusted on tracks mixed with track bouncing Do not use track bouncing with tracks to which you want to apply the equalizer and effects separately Specify the Tracks for Playback and Recording 1 Press CH EDIT SELECT for Track 5 2 Press PARAMETER lt lt PP until Chamnel Link appears in the display 3 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select On Press PLAY DISPLAY 5 While pressing STOP press the STATUS buttons for Tracks 14 The STATUS indicators light green 6 Press the STATUS buttons for Track 5 or 6 sever al times to let the STATUS indicators light orange 7 Press FADER EDIT several times to let the FADER indicators light green Track Mixer 8 While pressing the STATUS button for Track 5 or 6 press the SELECT buttons on Channels 1 4 The SELECT indicators blink green 9 Usually the source entering the INPUT 5 6 jacks is also assigned for recording on Tracks 5 6 When you want to record only the material on Tracks 1 4 use the following procedure 10 Press FADER EDIT The FADER indicators light orange Input Mixer 11 While pressin
306. return to the the source input SELECT CH EDIT button then previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt a press the track STATUS button for the track to 14 IN Level appears in the display Adjust the which the source is to be recorded level of the source Press the SELECT CH EDIT You can also use the TIME VALUE dial to select the y q button for the input whose level you wish to recording destination track If you select that adjust and use the TIME VALUE dial You can input will not be output anywhere i e the sound will n pe i also use the channel faders on the top panel to not be heard If you select MIX the source will be adjust the level assigned to a mix bus i e sound will be heard but a will not be recorded When Channel Link is on adjust the Offset Level of the sources p 150 CONDITION MARKER TIME MEASURE BEAT SYNC MODE SCENE 12345678 AB LR 7 71 INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER i lS eas ere AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER Sources that have Channel Link set to On cannot be recorded to tracks on which Channel Link is set to Off 15 Press PARAMETER B gt You can return to the with the EZ Routing previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt 16 Use EFFECT1 appears in the display If you wish to use effect 1 press YES and proceed to step 17 If you do not wish to use effect 1 press NO and proceed to step 31 11
307. rm From point Specifies the time of the move source playback data in relation to the To point Normally you will set this to be the same as the Start point 91 Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance Track Editing Using Frm Effectively Normally the data is copied starting at the speci fied move destination time However if you want to have the move made with reference to a point within the designated range where a specific sound occurs set this with Frm For example suppose that you wish to move a sound effect of a time bomb ticking and then exploding and that you want to place the explo sion at a specific timing location Normally in order to specify the move destination time you would have to calculate the time until the explo sion occurs In such cases however you can spec ify Frm as the move source time at which the explosion begins and TO the reference time of the move destination as the move destination time at which you want the explosion to occur This lets you move the data with the explosion placed with precisely the right timing Example 3 Moving using the Frm setting 14 Press PARAMETER gt TRK End appears in the display 15 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial End End point Specifies the ending time of the move range 16 Press PARAMETER gt TRK To appears in the display 17 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial To T
308. ry aspect of the recording process with the VS 880EX in your home studio Disk Recorder Section The digital disk recorder section provides eight play back tracks and allows eight tracks to be recorded simultaneously Each track has eight supplementary tracks V tracks and each song can have two sets of these 64 tracks 8 tracks x 8 V tracks This means that a song can have a total of 128 tracks 64 V tracks x 2 banks giving you flexibility when you need to record multiple takes or need a location for temporary stor age for editing You can instantly find the location of sections in a song you want to hear repeatedly or places that you wish to record over Locator by placing marks at such points Marker These Markers are recalled by simple procedure and you will never wait for any rewinding or fast forwarding time The VS 880EX uses non destructive editing This allows you to cancel and recover up to 999 previous recording and editing operations Undo Redo Digital Mixer Section You can store all mixer settings including fader levels pan and effects Stored settings can be recalled very simply making it convenient in adjusting balances during mixdown and comparing mixes with effects Changes in settings over time such as fader levels and pan can also be stored Auto Mix so you can realize easy fade ins and fade outs in your mixes You can easily make the most appropriate mixer con dition settings includ
309. s 6 Hold down SHIFT and press the channel 6 AUX Send CH EDIT AUX Sw appears in the display 7 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial AUX Sw AUX Switch This sets how the signal is sent to the AUX bus Here select Off Off The signal is not sent PreFade The signal before passing through the chan nel fader is sent PstFade The signalafter passing through the channel fader is sent 8 Press PARAMETER bP AUX Level appears in the display 9 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial AUX Level AUX Level This adjusts the level 0 127 of the signal sent to the AUX bus Set the initial value to 100 10 Press PARAMETER b gt AUX Pan appears in the display 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial AUX Pan This adjusts the stereo placement of the signal L63 0 R63 sent to the AUX bus Set the initial value to 0 12 Hold down SHIFT and press EDIT FADER several times until AUX Level appears in the display 13 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MST AUX Level Master AUX Level Adjust the volume 0 127 of the sound that is output from the AUX SEND jacks This is linked with the AUX SEND knob on the top panel 14 Press PARAMETER gt MST AUX Bal appears in the display 15 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MST AUX Bal Master AUX Balance Adjust the left right balance L63 0 R63 of the sound that is output from the AUX SEND jacks Set the initial value to 0
310. s NO 14 When the insert is completed correctly Complete appears in the display and return to Play condition An Easy Way to Specify the Time Settings The time for the To can be specified directly without having to display the Track Insert page In Play condition use the following procedure 1 Move to the time location into which you wish to insert the blank To 2 Hold down TRACK and press LOC4 8 If you now access the Track Erase page the time that was specified in steps 1 2 will be input as the time setting for the To point Just specify the length of the blank Length and execute Track Erase This operation cuts playback data from the specified area When playback data is cut using this operation any playback data following the data that was cut will move forward to fill the gap To use the analogy of a tape recorder this operation is like cutting an unwant ed portion out of an audio tape and splicing the ends Start End Time Do not leave sound within 0 5 seconds before or after the area to be cut Any sound which was within 0 5 seconds of the cut data will not playback While it may seem that the performance data has disap peared the data itself is not deleted from the hard disk Thus even when you carry out the Track Cut procedure the free disk space shown in the display does not change 1 Press TRACK several times until TRK Track Cut appears in the
311. s by mixing the output of the VS 880EX along with the output of a synchronized MIDI sequencer or other such device you can also record to MD recorders or similar devices By Step Editing a mixdown you can change the track and source settings to be the same If you wish to change the track settings press FADER EDIT to make the FADER indicator light green If you wish to change the source settings press FADER EDIT to make the FADER indicator light orange Here we will explain the example of how to change the track settings 1 Press EZ ROUTING several times until EZR Mix Down appears in the display 2 Press YES EZR Use Template do you wish to apply the tem plate appears in the display 3 Press NO 4 TR Link or IN Link is the displayed track source appears in the display Select the tracks sources for which you wish to turn Channel Link ON Press the STATUS button for the track source for which you wish to turn on Channel Link and use the TIME VALUE dial sl i 8 mm 12345678 AB LR AUX MASTER INPUT TRACK 5 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER 6 TR or IN appears in the display Specify the tracks sources that you wish to output to the mix bus Press the SELECT CH EDIT button for the corresponding track source and use the TIME VALUE dial Tracks sources which are turne
312. s PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd 33 TR SndLev appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send level 34 Press PARAMETER B gt gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt a 35 TR SndPan appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send pan 36 Press PARAMETER B gt gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt a 37 Master Sel appears in the display Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the bus MIX AUX FX1 FX2 REC that you wish to output from the MASTER jacks CONDITION MARKER TIME 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 38 Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd 39 EQ Sel appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial CONDITION MARKER TIME s 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 40 Press PARAMETER gt You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt d 41 Direct Out appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you do not wish to use Direct OUT select Off If you wish to output tracks 1 4 select 1 4 If you wish to output tracks 5 8 select 5 8 8 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 42 Press PARAMETER A gt You can return to the previo
313. s condition when playback is begun with Cakewalk MMC is transmitted to the VS 880EX and upon receiving the MMC the VS 880EX also begins record During playback MTC is sent from the VS 880EX to Cakewalk thus synchronizing operations Using an External MIDI Device to Adjust the Mixer Compu Mix The VS 880EX can send and receive the mixer settings and movements as MIDI messages You can use an external MIDI controller to control the VS 880EX s faders and by using a MIDI sequencer to record mixer settings and movements during playback as MIDI song data the mixer can be controlled automatically by the MIDI sequencer when the song is played back later This is referred to as Compu Mix Compu Mix uses Control Change messages and Exclusive mes sages This roughly describes how things proceed when performing operations using Control Change messages For more detailed information please read the appro priate pages When Using Exclusive Messages When working in Compu Mix you should use normal Control Change mes sages However if the use of Control Change messages would affect other MIDI devices in your setup you may use System Exclusive message instead For more detailed information about Control Change messages and Exclusive messages please refer to MIDI Implementation Appendices p 74 180 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples MIDI channels correspond to the mixer channe
314. s referred to as Auto Power Save mode Sleep mode This function limits the power consumption and extends the life of the disk When you perform a read or write operation on the disk it will return to its normal state This will take two or three seconds 106 Chapter 8 Use with a CD RW Drive You can connect a CD RW drive which is designated by Roland to the VS 880EX s SCSI connector This chapter explains the procedures involved in creating your own original audio CDs and in backing up song data to CD RW discs Refer to the owner s manual of CD RW drive as you proceed Before You Use a CD RW Drive Install the unit on a solid level surface in an area free from vibration If the unit must be installed at an angle be sure the installation does not exceed the permissible range upward 5 downward 5 O Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly different than its former location Rapid changes in the environment can cause condensation to form inside the CD RW drive which will adverse ly affect the operation of the CD RW drive and or damage CD RW discs When the unit has been moved allow it to become accustomed to the new environment allow a few hours before operating it O Remove any disc from the loading tray before pow ering up or down O When transporting the CD RW drive remove the disc from the loading tray Also avoid having the l
315. s the partition number For example if you wish to switch to the Zip drive select SC5 0 6 Press YES A confirmation message appears on the screen 7 Press YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 8 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 9 After you have switched the current drive return to Play condition 104 Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive 10 Following the procedure described in Saving a Song to a Single Disk p 103 make a playable copy of the song on the Zip disk to the internal hard disk 11 After you have made the copy repeat Steps 3 9 to reselect the internal hard disk as the current drive When You Cannot Save a Song to a Single Disk Archives Handling of Archives Copy Disks To save songs in archives format the destination disk must be initialized This initialization proce dure differs from the usual Drive Initialize for matting p 111 This procedure lets you carry out Archives Copy with newly purchased disks disks which previously have been used with a personal computer or other device or other disks which have not been formatted with Drive Initialize However any song data saved to the disk is lost once the Archives Copy procedure is performed Additionally you cannot designate a disk contain ing archive format songs as the current drive I
316. seeneneeeeeeees 143 Recording the Mixer Settings Method 1 Snapshot oocnicincoconononcnnononcnanrnrnnrnonnrnnnnns 143 Recording the Mixer Settings Method 2 Gradation oococcccnconcnononcnnononcnenennrnrnnnonnnannnos 144 Recording Fader Operations Realtime o cnooinioonconnennonemcnrrrencnnarnrcrrorarnnnannnnroros 144 If You Don t Want to Record Fader Settings Mask Fader ccncnincocnninononiconaninonononos 145 Playing Back the Alto Mix cocoocononenonnnnnnnnnncnnannnnncannnnnnncararnnnnnnnnrarnnnnnnnnnan nana iaoei eissa 145 Disabling Auto Mix Only on Specified Channels cococoocononincnonnoncnnnonnncnnrrarnnnernraros 145 Disabling Auto Mix on All Channels cococcconeninoncnnnnenennncnnnnnnnnroronnnnonnnannrnnrorarnnannnnnraros 146 Undoing Recordings and Edits Undo cooooocccccnnicccncnnnicccnnncnnccnnnncnnna nan rnnana nana ncnnnnn 146 Recording and Editing Operations Which Can Be Undone Undo ucucconcnononinnononnos 147 Canceling the Last Performed Undo Redo cccccncccncononaninonocanononanonononanonononononanononononos 147 Canceling Only the Very Last Performed Operation coccciconconcncnncnncncncnanrnrnnnnnnnannnos 147 Listening Only to a Specific Channel Solo MUute o oooconncccnnccccnonccnnnonnncnnncnanannnanccnnn 148 Listening Only to a Specific Channel coococonconcononinccnnnnennncnnannnnnnnroronnonnnnnanannrrorarnnnnnnnnrnros 148 Muting Only to a Specific Channel moocococconononononcononenenenncannnnnnnnrornnnnnnnnnanannanararanan
317. settings will not return to their default state 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER B several times until SYS Init Mix SysPRM appears in the display 4 Press YES A message will ask you to confirm that you really want to restore the mixer to the initial settings N 5 Press YES To cancel the operation press NO When the mixer settings return to the initial state you will be in Play condition 169 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples Along with the functions or external devices explained in earlier chapters this chapter explains some actual ways and gives some tips in which the VS 880EX can be used effectively First press PLAY DISPLAY and begin each operation from Play condition Synchronizing the Operations of Two VS 880EX Units The VS 880EX is compatible with MMC Here we explain how the operation of two VS 880EX units can be synchronized One VS 880EX acts as the MMC MTC master and the other acts as the MMC MTC slave Make connections as described below 9 MMC Appendices p 124 MASTER L R l l E Wife 00000020 0 mu 0 00000005 O m ololojoloJojolo o Bai MY loloJo oloJololo o J MIDI IN gt
318. several times until V Track Bank appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Select A or B 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 6 As described in Recording to the Tracks p 42 record and check the contents 49 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording Using Effects When you playback a song you will frequently want to apply effects such as reverb or delay Here we will explain how to apply reverb as you playback previ ously recorded tracks Select an Effect 1 Press EFFECT several times until EFFECT 1 PRM appears in the display 2 Press YES The number and name of the currently selected effect will be displayed and you can select the desired effect Effect Number Effect Name CONDITION MARKER MEASURE BEAT SYNC MODE SCENE 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 3 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the effect you wish to use Here select A00 RV LargeHall 4 After selecting the effect press YES Specify the Tracks for Playback 5 Press FADER EDIT several times to let the FADER indicator light green 6 Hold down STOP and press the STATUS button for the track you want played back The STATUS indicator lights green 7 Press CH EDIT SELECT for the track to which you want to apply reverb The CH EDIT indicator lights 8 Hold down SHIFT and press the channel 7 EFFECT 1 CH EDIT EFFECT1
319. sk HDP88 series is installed then remove the hard disk Place the hard disk in its carton and set this in the specified place inside the VS 880EX shipping carton The unit is now ready to be transported Moving the VS 880EX with the hard disk installed may result in loss of song data or damage to the hard disk IMPORTANT NOTES Handling the Disk Drive For details on hard disk handling refer also to the instructions that accompanied your hard disk O Before performing any of the following actions be sure to perform the shutdown procedure Failure to do so may result in loss of song data or damage to the hard disk e Turning off the power of the VS 880EX e Turning off the power of the Zip drive connected with SCSI connector e Removing a disk from a Zip drive connected with SCSI connector 9 Shutdown Appendices p 124 When the VS 880EX MIDI DISK indicator or Zip drive status indicator is lit it means that data is being written to or from the hard disk If you are using a Zip drive confirm that this indicator is not lit before removing disks O While using the VS 880EX be careful not to subject the unit to vibration or shock and avoid moving the unit while the power is turned on Install the unit on a solid level surface in an area free from vibration If the unit must be installed at an angle be sure the installation does not exceed the permissible range 0 Avoid using the unit immediately after it has
320. so MIDI Sound Generator In this example Cakewalk is the master device when MMC is used and the VS 880EX is the master device when using MTC Cakewalk can be used to control such operations of the VS 880EX as playback stopping switching track status and more Use a MIDI interface when connecting the VS 880EX to a computer You can also use a MIDI interface in connecting a computer to a sound generator 173 Chapter 14 Takein Advantages of the VS 880EX idea and examples 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS MIDI PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER BB several times until SYS MID MIDIThr appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial MIDIThr MIDI Thru Switch This switches the function of the MIDI OUT THRU connector For now set this to Out Out The connector transmits MIDI message such as metronome Note messages or MTC from the VS 880EX Thru MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN con nector are retransmitted from the connector without any changes 5 Press PARAMETER B several times until SYS MID SysEx Rx appears in the display 6 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial SysEx Rx System Exclusive Receive Switch Exclusive messages are received when this is set to On At this time set this to On The Exclusive messages can be received when the VS 880EX is in Play condition 7 Press PARAMETER bb SYS MID MMC
321. ssages are being received and red when data is being written or read on the disk drive If both of these are occurring the indicator lights orange 12 UNDO REDO Button Press this button to cancel a recording or editing step that you have made Undo function Pressed with SHIFT this button cancels the last performed Undo function Redo function 13 PREVIEW Button Press this button to use the Preview function that plays back a specific length before and after the cur rent location 17 Preparations Display section CONDITION MARKER TIME 4 mm E e 24 sl amp 48 12345678 AB INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 1 CONDITION This indicates the current condition PLY Normal status Play condition INn Change the input mixer settings n 1 8 a d TRn Change the track mixer settings n 1 8 to a d RTN Change the return mixer settings MST Change the master block settings SNG Song edit LOC Locator edit TRK Track edit FX Effect edit SYS System edit If Song Protect p 64 is turned on the Play Condition display will be Ply The input track mixer display will indicate 1 8 for chan nels whose Channel Link is OFF and a d for channels which are turned ON 2 MARKER marker number This shows the marker number for the current time If a mark point has not been assigned to the current time the closest marker number located before the current
322. stopping of play back of the song according to the GPI trigger signal received from the FOOT SWITCH jack 9 GPI Appendices p 123 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 165 Chapter 13 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions Overall Settings for the VS 880EX These are setting related to the overall operation of the VS 880EX You can temporarily hold functions by pressing SHIFT Operations such as switching V tracks or sav ing songs can be performed with one hand 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER BB several times until SYS Shift Lock appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial WwW N Shift Lock Shift Lock Sw itch Setting to On temporarily holds the SHIFT button function 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 6 Afterwards the SHIFT button indicator light goes on and off each time the button is pressed SHIFT is in effect when the indicator is lit The hold is lifted the next time another button is pressed or if the TIME VALUE dial is rotated Example Procedure for Switching the Solo Function ON 1 Press SHIFT and immediately release the button The SHIFT indicator lights The display will briefly indicate Shift Lock The display in the CONDITION field will alternate between the name of the current condition and sft
323. t Appendices p 26 when making these settings 1 Press EFFECT several times until EFFECT 1 PRM appears in the display 2 Press YES The number and name of the currently selected effect will be displayed and you will be able to select the effect Effect Number Effect Name MEASURE BEAT 8l s 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 3 Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the effect you wish to use After selecting the effect press YES 5 Check the effect to make sure that the sound is actually being played Repeat Steps 3 5 for any other patches whose effects you want to confirm Noise may occur with some types of effects when the effect patches are selected If the audio device is at high volume levels then protect the speakers and other device from damage turn off the EFFECTS ON OFF or lower the volume on the audio device before selecting the effect patches 6 After you have checked the patches press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 7 You can use the same procedure to hear the effect of FX2 as well For step 1 in this case make the display read EFFECT 2 PRM 70 Chapter 4 Using the Internal Effects Patches using the following algorithms can not be selected for FX2 A horizontal line is drawn through the effect name in such cases Please select patches using these algo rithms for use with FX1 e Reverb e Gated Reverb e Vocorder 2 e Voice Tra
324. t If called for we recommend the use of the preview and scrub functions p 140 111 Chapter 8 Use with a CD RW Drive 2 Hold down SONG and press TAP Set a track number mark point at the present location on the track EDIT CONDITION PLAY SONG LOCATOR TRACK EFFECT SYSTEM DISPLAY Marker Track Copy FRESE ister re Level Locate Move 2 Loop Xchg A Punch I O Insert Cut Erase Export Time Comp Exp D Player CD DAT Backup LOCATOR Loc1 B6 Loc2 8 Loc3 WM Loc4 8 CLEAR SCENE 1 2 3 4 5 START FROM END TO MARKER PREVIOUS NEXT i gt i TAP LOOP AUTOPUNCH NUMERICS 6 i E a o 7 GRADATION SNAP St A plus sign appears at the end of the track num ber mark point CONDITION Mo aKERw A a 41 5 p m E a an 5 P m a a a an 12345678 INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER You cannot set markers for four seconds from the top of songs 00h00m00s00 Due to audio CD standards songs must be at least four seconds long Thus if you try to set two markers as track numbers within four seconds of each other Can t Set Marker appears on the display and the process cannot be carried out Reset the track number markers so there is an interval greater than four seconds between them Audio CD standards allow up to 99 songs to be stored on one disc Furthermo
325. t of available recording time will vary Thus this calls for a standard unit corresponding to the time of one contin uous monaural signal recorded to one track This unit is referred to as a track minute available recording time l at Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 00h00m00s00 00h30m00s00 00h40m00s00 Time In Case of Disk Recording 29 Chapter 1 Before You Start VS 880EX Terminology For example 10 track minutes be used for 10 minutes of monaural recording 5 minutes of stereo recording 2 minutes and 30 seconds of recording on four tracks and so on Track 1 gt 00hOOm00s00 00h10m00s00 Time Track 1 Track 2 gt 00h00m00s00 00h05m00s00 Time Trackt Track2 Tracks Traka gt 00h00mM00s00 00h02m30s00 Time The VS 880EX provides 8 playback tracks and allows 8 tracks to be recorded simultaneously Each track is composed from the features 8 supplementary tracks each on of which can be used for recording or playback These auxiliary tracks are called V tracks One song can contain two sets banks of 64 V tracks these 8 tracks x 8 V tracks In other words a maximum of 8 tracks x 8 V tracks x 2 banks 128 performance tracks can be recorded For actual recording playback you will specify the bank that you wish to use and then select one of the V tracks Song N V Track Bank A B ELA V Track1 ONDUAN SS A This Owne
326. t right level L63 0 R63 while maintaining the panning of both channels This will operate linked with the pan knob of the odd num bered channel 10 If you wish to assign the output of a source or track to the AUX bus press PARAMETER gt gt to make the display read AUX Sw 11 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial AUX Sw AUX Switch This sets how the signal is sent to the AUX bus Here select PstFade Off The signal is not sent This will not be out put from the AUX jacks PreFade The signal before passing through the chan nel fader is sent PstFade The signalafter passing through the channel fader is sent 12 Press PARAMETER gt twice AUX Bal appears in the display 13 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial AUX Bal AUX balance This adjusts the pan setting L63 0 R63 of the signal sent to the AUX bus 14 Press CH EDIT SELECT for the other channel 15 Repeat steps 10 13 to make the same settings for the other channel 16 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition The faders alone of adjacent odd and even numbered channels can be linked so that the volume balance of the channel pair can be maintained as you adjust the overall volume level This is referred to as Fader Link When fader link is turned on equalizer settings and effect send level settings etc for the two channels can be made independently for either channel Fader Link is valid only when Channel Lin
327. th the VS 880EX as the Reference Master cmocicinionnnoconananinononos 117 Synchronization with the MIDI Sequencer as the Reference Slave cccocoono 118 Synchronizing with an External MIDI Device coccononencnoooonononnnncnronnennnnnncnrnoranarnnnnnannraros 119 Using the Syne Track Master onononcncoconononanncncnnnennncncnrnnnocarnnnnnnnnrornnnnnnnnnanarnnnararnnannnrnraos 119 Using the Tempo Map Master coccocecononononncncnnnnnnnnnrnrnnnanannnnnnnnnrarnnnnnnnnnanarnanararanancnna raras 121 CONTENTS Various Operations Related to Synchronized Operation connencncooonononnnnnncnrancnrarananoos 123 Use witha MIDI Controler ricino 126 switching Track Status eer arae eana eA eo Winckel AEs as A EE EEEa a OE ee eA enaa ate 126 Switching Scenes sidra aaa SVET TEE EEEREN 127 Switching Effects EE E E aca A A en Cal cados donas 127 Adjusting Effects arnese greed eea Ere E E Gaon E EA Deas EER ER ENE E 127 Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder DAT Backup 128 Before Backing Up with DAT ooooocccccnnnoccccccnnoncnnnnoncnnnncnnnnn aneen a AEAEE 128 Items Necessary for DAT Backup coocooccccnononcccnonoonnnnnonononnnnnn conc nn cnn nn nn nn rrnnnn cnn rra 128 About the Devices Used in DAT Backup ooonecincncncononenennncnnnnannrnrannonncnnnnanonrararnnnnnannraros 128 Saving Song Data to a DAT Recorder Backup cccoccccinncininncccnnocnnnnncccnnncncnnnnnnnannco 129 Loading Performance Data from a DAT Recorder Recover conocccccnncoc
328. that is supplied by the water company to your house is branched to a variety of locations within the house kitchen bathroom toilet etc The water that is used at each of these locations is then collected into the sewer and carried away AO A SS AA Your House Kitchen Sink Bathtub Toilet 0 OUTPUT to street LAdLNO LNdLNO OUTPUT OUTPUT LAdNI Water Heater Bath Sink OE Cold Water Bus E ee Hot Water Bus Drain Bus If we think of the VS 880EX as the house the water being supplied from the water company corresponds to inputs such as mic or guitar Some of these inputs are sent to recording tracks and are recorded Other portions are sent to the effects and reverb or chorus are applied before they are output The basic principle of the VS 880EX is that by specifying in this way from where and to where the common lines run you can determine which input signals will be recorded on which track or sent to which effects and where they will be out put Chapter 1 Before You Start VS 880EX Terminology The VS 880EX has the following buses RECORDING Bus Signals assigned to the RECORDING bus are routed to the recorder section to be recorded There are eight channels which can be assigned to the output of the input mixer track mixer and effects Return Signals assigned to the RECORD ING bus cannot be routed to the MIX bus MI
329. the VS 880EX when you check errors in the song data Canceling a DAT Recovery Operation in Progress 1 Press EXIT NO during the DAT recovery Recovery is stopped and Delete Err Song Delete the song containing the error appears in the display 2 If you would like to delete from the hard disk the song data that stopped the recovery operation press YES If you would like to keep it as it is though the recovery is not completed press NO When an Error is Found in the Song Data 1 If an error is found in the song data which was recovered with the DAT recovery operation Recover Err Retry An error was found Retry the song appears in the display 2 If you want to try to recover the data press YES If you want to cancel the recovery press NO 3 If you press NO in Step 2 Delete Err Song then appears in the display 4 If you would like to delete the song data with the error from the hard disk press YES If you would like to keep it as it is though the error is included press NO 132 Chapter 10 Use with a DAT Recorder DAT Backup Checking Names of Saved Performance Data Name This operation lets you check the names of song data that was saved to a DAT tape Even if you have saved the data of two or more songs in a single backup oper ation you can check the name of each song This operation also allows you to load selected song data into the VS 880EX When the
330. the song the current location is before the first marker 38 Chapter 2 Basic Operation Moving the Location of Markers 1 Press PLAY DISPLAY 2 In the display the MARKER field will indicate the marker number of the current location Use CURSOR fl gt to move the cursor to the MARKER field and rotate the TIME VALUE dial Making Fine Adjustments to Marked Locations 1 Move to the marker where you want to change Press PREVIOUS or NEXT to move the marker 2 Press LOCATOR several times until LOC appears in the display is the marker number that you wish to modify 3 Set the marker where you wish to change Use the TIME VALUE dial The time of a marker can be modified only within the range between the pre ceding and following markers 0 1 2 vy v y gt E Time Possible range of change 4 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Deleting a Marked Location Setting markers makes it much easier to search for places within a song but having too many of them actually cam make it more difficult to find the location you re looking for It is a good idea to delete unneeded markers whenever you can 1 Move to the marker you wish to delete Press PREVIOUS or NEXT to move the marker 2 While holding down CLEAR press TAP Delete the marker Marker numbers for any markers after the deleted mark point shift one number ahead CLEA
331. the song and press PLAY Use a foot switch to punch in and out Using Punch In Punch Out when both performing on an instru ment and recording at the same time is difficult In such instances it is convenient to use a foot switch such as the DP 2 or the BOSS FS 5U to do your switches Start Punch in Punch out Stop Time STOP SHUT EJECT RESTART v SSOEIC ns S3 SSOEIC ns S3 44 Chapter 3 Multi Track Recording 1 Connect an optional foot switch such as the DP 2 or the BOSS FS 5U to the VS 880EX s FOOT SWITCH jack OUTPUT INPUT FOOT PHONES 6 5 4 3 QO IGITAL 7 8 _ D e aux SEND Cc T2 IN 2 FS 5U LBIBOSS 2 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display 3 Press PARAMETER gt gt gt several times until SYS FootSw appears in the display FootSw Foot switch icon Set the function of the foot switch connected to the FOOT SWITCH jack Play Stop Repeats playback and recording each time the foot switch is pressed Record Performs the same function as REC This is used for switching between recording and playback during manual Punch In Recording TapMarker Performs the same function as TAP Pressing the foot switch sets a Marker at the mark point Next Performs the same fun
332. the time location where you wish to record the auto mix Confirm that Auto Mix mode is on Select the channels which you want to record using Auto Mix While pressing AUTOMIX so that the button indicators to blink press the each channel SELECT button or EZ ROUTING Master Block 4 Hold down AUTOMIX and press TAP A marker is added at the current time location At the same time a Snapshot of the mixer settings is recorded at the marker A marker in which mixer settings are recorded will be indicated by an following it CONDITION ARKER Fog ts 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER If a marker already exists within 0 1 seconds before the time location where you are attempting to place a new marker i e the current time the Snapshot is recorded at the earlier marker A marker will not be newly assigned If a marker already exists within 0 1 seconds after the time location at which you are attempting to place a new mark er i e the current time the Snapshot is recorded at the later marker 5 Press AUTOMIX The AUTOMIX indicator light goes off 143 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions This creates an auto mix that smoothly connects Snapshots recorded in two adjacent markers This method is called Gradation For example this is convenient when you wish to specify the length of a fade in or fade out 1 Follow the operation as described in Recording the Mixer S
333. tializing the Disk p 111 carry out the Drive Initialize procedure 2 After initialization of the disk is completed Surface Scan begins automatically The Surface Scan procedure takes a certain amount of time Be aware that Surface Scan requires some time This is not a malfunction For example the time required to conduct Surface Scan on one Zip disk 100 MB is approximately 10 minutes The time it will take to con duct Surface Scan on your disk drive should be based on the size capacity of the disk The progress of the Surface Scan procedure is shown in the display 3 When Surface Scan is completed one of the fol lowing messages appears in the display File System Err A read or write failure has occurred in a location which stores basic data used by the VS 880EX for recording and playback This disk drive cannot be used by the VS 880EX Defect The underlined portion will indicate the number of unusable memory locations in this drive The larger this number is the lower the reliability of this drive Complete This drive has no unusable memory 4 Press YES The VS 880EX will restart Canceling Surface Scan You may cancel Surface Scan by performing the following procedure 1 Press EXIT NO Cancel appears in the display 2 Press YES Surface Scan is new canceled However the mem ory found to be unusable up to that point is not registered 3 The V
334. til appears The frame numerical display will switch to sub frame units approximately 1 100 frame Then rotate the TIME VALUE dial To return to the frame units press CURSOR B e To move in units of approximately 1 100 frame hold down SHIFT and rotate the TIME VALUE dial The MEASURE field in the display will indicate the measure number of the current location and the BEAT field will indicate the beat number of the current loca tion For details on setting the measure and beat and how they correspond to the song refer to Sounding the Metronome p 154 e To move in measure units use CURSOR gt to move the cursor to the MEASURE field and rotate the TIME VALUE dial e To move in beat units use CURSOR lt B to move the cursor to the BEAT field and rotate the TIME VALUE dial MM A shown following the beat display indicates that this time location is not at the beginning of the measure beat When the time location is at the beginning of the mea sure beat the indication will disappear You can move directly from within any of the V tracks in the currently selected track to the first or last loca tion in the song that contains recorded sound Use the following procedure To go to the first location in the song containing recorded sound Hold down SHIFT and press SONG TOP REW To go to the last location in the song containing recorded sound
335. tings adjustable from the top panel will not be recorded as described in Recording the Mixer Settings Method 1 Snapshot For example this is effective when you have made fade in settings as in Recording the Mixer Settings Method 2 Gradation and then wish to modify effect send levels or other settings 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS Scene Auto Mix appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS A Mix Snap appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial A Mix Snap Auto Mix Snapshot Mode This selects the settings that will be recorded by the snapshot All All settings are recorded MaskF Settings which can be adjusted from the top panel channel faders etc will be ignored 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition 6 Record the Snapshot as described in Recording the Mixer Settings Method 1 1 Press AUTOMIX The AUTOMIX indicator lights indicating that the VS 880EX is in Auto Mix mode 2 Select the channels for which you want Auto Mix played back While pressing AUTOMIX so that each button indicators light press the each channel SELECT button or EZ ROUTING Master Block 3 Press PLAY Playback of Auto Mix begins Moving the channel faders master fader or PAN knobs while Auto Mix is being played back cancels the Auto Mix for that fader If you stop and then start playback again Auto Mix wil
336. tion Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA TEL 02 9982 8266 NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation NZ Ltd 97 Mt Eden Road Mt Eden Auckland 3 NEW ZEALAND TEL 09 3098 715 CEN TRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Florida 656 2nd Floor Office Number 206A Buenos Aires ARGENTINA CP1005 TEL 54 11 4 393 6057 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda R Coronel Octaviano da Silveira 203 05522 010 Sao Paulo BRAZIL TEL 011 843 9377 CHILE Comercial Fancy S A Avenida Rancagua 0330 Providencia Santiago CHILE TEL 56 2 373 9100 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Notre y Alameda Juan Pablo 2 No 4010 San Salvador EL SALVADOR TEL 503 262 0788 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 525 668 04 80 La Casa Wagner de Guadalajara s a de c v Av Corona No 202 S J Guadalajara Jalisco Mexico C P 44100 MEXICO TEL 03 613 1414 PANAMA Productos Superiores S A Apartado 655 Panama 1 REP DE PANAMA TEL 507 270 2200 URUGUAY Todo Musica Cuareim 1488 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 5982 924 2335 VENEZUELA Musicland Digital C A Av Francisco de Miranda Centro Parque de Cristal Nivel C2 Local 20 Caracas VENEZUELA TEL 02 285 9218 EUROPE AUSTRIA Roland Austria GES M B H Siemensstrasse 4 P O Box 74 A 6063 RUM AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 2
337. to mix data which will be erased Event Only Auto Mix events will be erased Marker Both markers and Auto Mix events will be erased 10 Press PARAMETER gt SYS Erase___ lt gt ___ appears in the display The marker you specified in steps 5 7 will be displayed in the underlined area 11 Press ENTER YES A confirmation message appears on the screen Press YES If you wish to cancel the erase press NO 12 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Undoing Recordings and Edits Undo When using the VS 880EX recordings may not sound as you intend settings for editing may be made incor rectly or there may be other situations where you want to go back and try something again In such instances you can restore the previous conditions at each of the steps where something was changed This is referred to as the Undo function Moreover you can restore conditions as they were before the last undo This is called the Redo function When using the Undo function you will specify the number of previous steps that will be undone For example suppose that you use punch in recording to perform five consecutive re recordings of the same location If you later decide to return to the condition of the second recording step 2 you would set the Undo function to return to the condition of three steps earlier Undo Level 3 Recording 5 i Recording 4 i i Recording3 1 Recording 2
338. ts in Punch In Recording ta E 1 Bank 7 j 7 7 7 00h00m00s00 Time Storing Locators 1 Move to the location in a song where you want to set a locator 2 Press a LOC button 1 5 4 8 For example if you wish to set Locator 1 press 1 5 If you wish to store the location in Locator 5 hold down SHIFT and press 1 5 These can be used in recording playback or while the song is stopped When a locate point is set the corre sponding indicator lights Moving to a Stored Time Location 1 Press the LOCATOR button for the locate point to which you want to move For example if you wish to move to the Locator 1 then press 1 5 If you wish to move to the location registered in Locator 5 hold down SHIFT and press 1 5 Changing the Locator Bank 1 Press LOCATOR The current locator bank number will be displayed as Locate Bank 1 etc Simultaneously the LOC indi cator corresponding to the current bank number will blink 2 Continue holding LOCATOR and press the LOC button 1 5 4 8 for the bank number that you wish to change LOCATOR is used both to recall the Locator condi tion and to switch the Locator Bank If you take your finger off LOCATOR without changing the Locator Bank the display screen may change EDIT CONDITION PLAY SONG LOCATOR ITRACK EFFECT SYSTEM DISPLAY Ca if CI O O O reek Gey PRRECT
339. udiomedia III or CardD that features digital input and output connectors installed in your computer you can connect Cakewalk and your VS 880EX digitally This is convenient when for example you want to record the audio tracks from the VS 880EX to Cakewalk via a digital connection edit the material in Cakewalk and then send it back via the digital connection to the VS 880EX for mixdown Be sure to read the owner s manuals for Cakewalk as well as the sound card you are using About Sound Cards Even when using the digital connections as described in the example noise originating inside the computer in the vicinity of the sound card may be introduced into the sound The level of noise will vary according to the com puter s exterior panels interior boards the condition of the cable connec tions etc In general high performance sound cards that tend to resist this kind of noise better With sound cards that feature both analog and digital input and output it may be necessary to set the card to use the digital input and output After carefully reading the owner s manual for your sound card make the neces sary settings to enable the sound card to use the digital input and output connectors About the Recording Mode Even when using the digital connections as described in the example since audio tracks are recorded from the VS 880EX to Cakewalk edited and then sent back to the VS 880EX this can be likened to repeated
340. urther more the VS 880 cannot recognize songs recorded on the VS 880EX If you wish to playback or edit VS 880EX song data with VS 880 convert it to VS 880 song data Song Export Song data that has been saved using the Archive Copy procedure on the VS 880EX cannot be restored archive extracted by the VS 880 Song data that has been saved using the DAT Backup procedure on the VS 880EX cannot be restored DAT recovered by the VS 880 When internal hard disks that have been used by a VS 1680 are installed in the VS 880EX or when Zip disks that have been used by a VS 1680 are inserted into a Zip drive connected to the VS 880EX they are recog nized as the initialization disk provided they meet the conditions below In this case however the VS 880EX can create new songs on the disk Furthermore the VS 880EX cannot recognize songs recorded on the VS 1680 Partition space 1 GB or less Even if the disk has been initialized with the Partition set to 2000 MB the disk can be used if the actual partition is 1 GB or less Partition numbers 1 4 5 8 cannot be used If you wish to edit playback a VS 1680 song on the VS 880EX you must first convert the VS 1680 song data into the VS 880 format and save it on a Zip disk etc the VS 1680 s Song Export function Then you must convert that song data into the VS 880EX format the VS 880 s EX Song Import function Song data that has been saved using the Archive
341. us screen by pressing PARAMETER lt lt d 43 FX1 MstIns appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to insert effect 1 into the master out select On If not select Off If effect 1 has been inserted in another channel the display will indicate and this item cannot be set 6 s 7 _ _ a a ee ee A E7 o 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 44 Press PARAMETER gt e You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER lt d 83 Chapter 5 Storing Mixer Settings 45 FX2 MstIns appears in the display Rotate the TIME VALUE dial If you wish to insert effect 2 into the master out select On If not select Off If effect 2 has been inserted in another channel the display will indicate and this item cannot be set 11 2 A a TERRE 3 8 12345678 INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 46 Press PARAMETER B You can return to the previous screen by pressing PARAMETER Hd 47 Change Routing appears in the display Press YES When the routing has been finalized Complete appears in the display and you will return to Play condition If you decide to discard the routing that was set press NO Select this when you want adjust the balance of each track or to record a MD recorder or similar input in two channel stereo Additionally when playing back all 16 track
342. vel FX2 Pan Effect 2 Send Pan AUX Lev AUX Level AUX Pan STEREO IN Fader Balance EFFECT RETURN Effect 1 Return Level Effect 1 Return Balance Effect 2 Return Level Effect 2 Return Balance Master Block Master Level Master Balance Master Effect 1 Send Level Master Effect 1 Send Balance Master Effect 2 Send Level Master Effect 2 Send Balance Master AUX Send Level Master AUX Send Balance EFFECT FX1 Effect 1 Program Number EX2 Effect 2 Program Number 142 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions Press AUTOMIX The button indicator lights indi cating that Mix mode is on AUTOMIX lit At this time while holding down the AUTOMIX but ton once more each time the each channel SELECT button or EZ ROUTING Master Block is pressed the status 1 Indicator off Auto Mix is disabled dark 1 Indicator on Auto Mix playback is enabled s 4 Indicator blinking 7 Auto Mix is enabled for recording and playback S 7 PAN blink Mixer settings recorded with Auto Mix can be record ed directly to markers This method is known as tak ing a Snapshot When you move to that marker the mixer settings that were recorded will be reproduced For example this is convenient when you want the intro and ending to have different volume levels or different effect send levels for guitar parts during intros or solos 1 Move to
343. ves Function Select the Archive Type copy method Store Saving to Zip Disks Extract Loading from Zip Disks 12 Press YES A message asking if you want to continue appears in the display 13 Press YES STORE Current Store the current song appears in the display 14 If you wish to save the current song press YES if not then press NO If you have selected a demo song then press NO 15 The display will ask You ll Lose Data Continue Press YES If you decide to cancel the Archives Copy operation press NO All data saved on the Zip disk will be deleted Do not use any Zip disk containing song data that you need 16 If the song holds a large amount of data and can not be contained on a single Zip disk the disk is ejected and the message Please Insert Disk appears in the display Insert the next disk and press YES At this time be sure to write the disk numbers on the labels so that you can keep track of the order in which the disks were inserted into the drive 105 Chapter 7 Use with a Zip Drive 17 When copying over multiple Zip disks Insert Disk indicates the number in the order of insertion appears in the display Insert each of the disks once more in the proper order and press YES 18 When the Archives Store procedure is finished return to Play condition 1 Select the load restore destination drive internal hard disk as the current
344. vi ronment of the VS 880EX Here is the general process used when executing the functions and changing the settings included in each condition Please take a look Display the menu for each condition 2 Select the page containing the desired function or setting 3 Select the setting to be changed Change the settings values 5 Execute the operation To select the desired condition press either the EDIT CONDITION button CH EDIT button or SHIFT EDIT FADER Edit Condition EDIT CONDITION PLAY SONG LOCATOR TRACK EFFECT SYSTEM DISPLAY ter Post Le Song Select Marker Tack Copy EFFECT 1 N Locate z Move 2 Loop APunch 1 0 ert Cut e Erase Import Export Time Comp Exp CD Write CD Player CD D T Backup Channel Condition O INPUT O TRACK CO FX RTN SELECT CHEDT srin FX1 RTN FX 2 RTN 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 O O Co Assign Virack EQLow EQ Mid EQ Hi Aux Send EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 Master Block Condition FADER EDIT CI The menu for the corresponding page is displayed Use PARAMETER lt lt B to select the desired page and press YES It is also possible to switch the menu display by repeatedly pressing the EDIT CON DITION button CONDITION MARKER 8 s 12345678 AB LR INPU
345. w prohibits the unauthorized recording public performance broadcast sale or distribution etc of a work CD recording video recording broadcast etc whose copyright is owned by a third party Roland will take no responsibility for any infringement of copyright that you may commit in using the VS 880EX 9 SCMS Appendices p 124 About SCMS The VS 880EX does not implement SCMS This design decision was made with the intent that SCMS should not restrict the creation of original compositions which do not violate copyright law Do not use this device in a way which would infringe on copyrights held by another Disclaimer of liability Wu Roland will take no responsibility for any direct damages consequential dam ages or any other damages which may result from your use of the VS 880EX These damages may include but are not limited to the following events which can occur when using the VS 880EX O Any loss of profit that may occur to you Permanent loss of your music or data O Inability to continue using the VS 880EX itself or a connected device About the License Agreement The VS 880EX and its CD R capability are designed to allow you to reproduce material to which you have copyright or material which the copyright owner has granted you permission to copy Accordingly reproduction of music CDs or other copyrighted material without the permission of the copyright owner other than for your ow
346. wish to initialize the current drive and then recover press YES If at this point you press YES all songs saved on the internal hard disk will be lost If you decide not to initialize press NO 12 Please Play DAT appears in the display Put the DAT recorder in play mode 13 Load the data If you have backed up the data to multiple tapes then the operation is suspended when the end of each tape is reached Insert the number tape indicated in the display press YES and start the DAT recorder playing again 14 When the recover procedure is finished Please Stop DAT appears in the display Stop the DAT recorder then press YES 15 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition You can stop the recover operation by pressing EXIT NO during the recover Moreover when there is an error in song data backed up on a tape the recover operation is temporarily halted In such instances you can choose whether to leave or delete the unfinished song data recovered up to that point This procedure does not correct the disk error but tries to restore the song data while keeping as much possi ble of the non error data Depending on the location in which the error occurred some noises may generated or settings for mixer tempo map and sync track may be lost Loud noises may damage your audio equipment such as amplifier and speakers Please make sure to turn down the headphones level and master volume of
347. y 17 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Type This specifies the type of conversion Select the setting that fits your needs or that matches the type song you are working with A For vocals or narration B For slow tempo songs such as slow ballads C For fast tempo songs such as rock 18 Press PARAMETER B TRK Amplitude appears in the display 19 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial 97 Chapter 6 Editing a Recorded Performance Track Editing Amplitude This specifies the volume level ratio 50 60 70 80 90 100 that will result from the conversion Normally the default value of 60 is recommended If the vol ume level after conversion is too low use the Undo function to return to the original data increase the amplitude settings and try the operation again However excessively high settings can introduce noise in the data 20 Press PARAMETER gt TRK TimeComp Exp OK appears in the display 21 Press YES This executes Time Compression Expansion If you wish to cancel press NO Be aware that depending on conditions it may take some time for compression or expansion to be completed This is not a malfunction Progress of the operation is shown in the display do not turn off the power until the compression or expansion the track is complet ed You can cancel compression or expansion by pressing NO 22 When the compression or expansion is completed correctly Complete
348. y will indicate Song Information briefly Song Number Song Name CONDITION MARKEH TS AUX MASTER Sample Rate Recording Mode Song Capacity In the example 72 MB The actual used capacity of the song is displayed as 1 MB 1 000 000 bytes The displayed value is the approximate standard value System Settings for Each Song These are overall settings that can saved in any song These settings are lost if the power is turned off with out the song being saved or if the System settings are reset to their original conditions When you press FADER EDIT to switch between input and track channels or to recall Scenes there will be times when fader positions may not correspond to their actual volume settings In such instances the position of each fader is represented by a black dot and the actual level that is set is represented by a white circle Use the following procedure when you wish to have the volume change as soon as the faders are moved CONDITION MARKER ea AA 8 s 12345678 AB LR INPUT TRACK AUX MASTER 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS FaderMatch appears in the display 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial Fader Match Here the fader is selected to control the sound if there is a discrepancy between the current fader and the actual volume level Jump The
349. ymbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it A CAUTION Material damage refers to damage or means that the unit must never be disassembled other adverse effects caused with The symbol alerts the user to things that must be respect to the home and all its carried out The specific thing that must be done is furnishings as well to domestic gt indicated by the design contained within the circle In animals or pets the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet Z WARNING Z WARNING e Before using this unit make sure to read the instruc AN e Do not force the unit s power supply cord to share S tions below and the Owner s Manual an outlet with an unreasonable number of other A a devices Be especially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insula tion on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through Do not open or perform any internal modifications Y on the unit The only exception would be where this manual provides specific instructions which should be followed in order to put in place user installable o
350. you wish to can cel press CANCEL NO If you most frequently use the Undo function to undo just the previously performed recording editing oper ation i e undo level 1 you may prefer not to be bothered with the messages that appear when the UNDO button is pressed In this case make the fol lowing settings so that just the previous operation will be undone immediately when the UNDO button is pressed 1 Press SYSTEM several times until SYS System PRM appears in the display Press YES Press PARAMETER gt several times until SYS UNDO MSG appears in the display 147 Chapter 12 Other Convenient Functions 4 Rotate the TIME VALUE dial For now select Off UNDO MSG UNDO message This selects whether or not the Undo confirmation message is displayed On The message is displayed asking how many levels you want to undo Off The message is not displayed and only the immediately preceding operation is undone 5 Press PLAY DISPLAY Return to Play condition Listening Only to a Specific Channel Solo Mute When making equalizer adjustments or checking the balance during mixdown it is often desirable to be able to monitor the sound of one specific channel Although it would be possible to individually mute each of the channels that you didn t want to hear with STATUS buttons this is inconvenient In such cases you can monitor only a specific channel and mute all th

Roland VR-5 Music Mixer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents